When Risk No Longer Feels Risky

After years of market turbulence followed by surprisingly resilient recoveries, many investors are asking an unexpected question: “Am I being too cautious?” Let’s look at how recent experience shapes our perception of risk, why discipline still matters, and the role thoughtful financial advice plays in keeping emotions from driving investment decisions.

Comments Off on When Risk No Longer Feels Risky

Is Private Healthcare Becoming Unaffordable?

For many South Africans, the annual medical scheme increase has become one of the most dreaded notifications of the year. As healthcare costs continue to outpace inflation and salaries, more families are questioning whether private healthcare is still affordable. Before making decisions to downgrade or cancel your cover, it's worth speaking to your financial adviser about balancing affordability with the protection your family needs.

Comments Off on Is Private Healthcare Becoming Unaffordable?

Why Are More People Building ‘Career Insurance’?

For a long time, a second income was a nice-to-have: a “side hustle” that brought in some extra spending money, or was a way to express your interests and creativity outside of work. But it is increasingly becoming something entirely different: ‘career insurance’. In this article we look at a profound shift in how people think about a second income, and why it is becoming more critical.

Comments Off on Why Are More People Building ‘Career Insurance’?

Market Update: Why Markets Keep Finding Their Way Back to the Same Place

This year, just about everything that could go wrong has gone wrong. But despite the turmoil markets have shown remarkable resilience. Time and again, investors have been confronted with events that seemed destined to derail global growth, only for fundamentals to reassert themselves. As wars, technology, and economic policy continue to pull markets in different directions, one question remains: why do markets keep ending up in almost exactly the same place?

Comments Off on Market Update: Why Markets Keep Finding Their Way Back to the Same Place

Cut Your Tax Bill: Rebates and Incentives Available This Tax Season

Wish you could pay less tax? The 2026 tax filing season is in full swing, with individual non-provisional taxpayers facing a 23 October 2026 deadline, while trusts and individual provisional taxpayers have until 22 January 2027 to ensure they have made use of every applicable tax rebate and deduction. Our tax team checks and applies every tax rebate and deduction possible for every individual and business, making sure that while you remain 100% compliant, you don't pay a cent more tax than you should!

Comments Off on Cut Your Tax Bill: Rebates and Incentives Available This Tax Season

National Wills Month: Do You Have a Business Will?

Most business owners think their personal will has the business covered too, but that's usually not the case. The term “business will” refers colloquially to a specialised directive, such as a shareholder’s agreement, a buy-and-sell agreement or a succession plan, that gives guidance on what should happen to your business when you (or other partners or shareholders) are no longer there. Without a regularly updated “business will”, the business you spent decades building can unravel in months.

Comments Off on National Wills Month: Do You Have a Business Will?

Some Companies are Going Back on Automation. Should you?

Automation once promised a cleaner, leaner future with lower costs, faster service and fewer repetitive tasks. Yet some businesses are now reversing course and humans are being returned to jobs only recently given to software. Discover why this is happening, and just how automation might be hurting your business.

Comments Off on Some Companies are Going Back on Automation. Should you?

SARS Moves Traveller Declarations Online

Anyone leaving or entering South Africa faces a new SARS requirement: an online declaration of goods, cash and other items before crossing the border. This article cuts through all the conspiracies and explains what the change means, why it matters, and how it could affect travellers, businesspeople and anyone carrying high-value items.

Comments Off on SARS Moves Traveller Declarations Online

Your Tax Deadlines for September 2026

07 September: PAYE submissions and payments 19 September: Start of Trust Filing Season 2026 25 September: VAT manual submissions and payments 29 September: Excise duty payments          30 September: VAT electronic submissions and payments PIT Provisional Tax payments CIT Provisional Tax payments where applicable End of the 2nd fiscal quarter

Comments Off on Your Tax Deadlines for September 2026

Provisional Tax Time: First Payment for 2027 Tax Year Due 31 Aug

For individual provisional taxpayers and for companies with a February year-end, the end of August brings yet another tax deadline: the first provisional tax payment for the 2027 tax year, covering the period 1 March 2026 – 28 February 2027. Find out here why income tax payments seem to roll round so very often, and what you need to do to survive this first income tax deadline for the current tax year.

Comments Off on Provisional Tax Time: First Payment for 2027 Tax Year Due 31 Aug

Everyone Makes Them: Here’s How to Recover from a Bad Business Decision

Every business leader, from the corner office to the corner store, has a story they wish they could rewrite. A product launched too early, a hire made too hastily, a pivot that led off a cliff. Despite this, bad business decisions are not a sign of a bad leader, they are simply a sign that a leader is human. The real measure of a leader is not whether they stumble, but how they recover. Here is what the evidence says you should do when you make a mistake.

Comments Off on Everyone Makes Them: Here’s How to Recover from a Bad Business Decision

The Subscription Trap: SMEs are Losing Thousands to “SaaS Creep”

As cloud-based software delivery has lowered the barrier to adoption, many companies are starting to lose track of the number of software subscriptions they have. This phenomenon is known as “SaaS creep” (SaaS stands for Software as a Service) and research suggests that the problem is considerably larger than most leaders recognise. The financial consequences are compounding, and, for organisations without formal oversight, almost entirely invisible.

Comments Off on The Subscription Trap: SMEs are Losing Thousands to “SaaS Creep”

CIPC, SARS, UIF, COIDA … Our Expertise Makes Compliance Easier

Running a business in South Africa is a challenge. Quite apart from the political and economic conditions, every business must also comply with a web of governance, regulatory, tax, and labour law requirements. It’s a massive cost burden, but failing to comply can mean penalties, lost business opportunities, and even deregistration. Here's how we can turn your compliance into a strategic strength, while also saving your business a substantial amount of time, cost, and hassle.

Comments Off on CIPC, SARS, UIF, COIDA … Our Expertise Makes Compliance Easier

Your Tax Deadlines for August 2026

07 August: PAYE submissions and payments 25 August: VAT manual submissions and payments  28 August: Excise duty payments    31 August: VAT electronic submissions and payments PIT Provisional Tax payments (first provisional tax payment) CIT Provisional Tax payments where applicable Disclaimer: The information provided herein should not be used or relied on as professional advice. No liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions nor for any loss or damage arising from reliance upon any information herein. Always contact us for specific and detailed advice. © AccountingDotNews

Comments Off on Your Tax Deadlines for August 2026

2026 Tax Season Opens: Experience the Power of Done

SARS's "The Power of Done" campaign promotes seamless, digital tax compliance for Tax Filing Season 2026. The season officially opens on 13 July, although auto-assessed taxpayers will receive notifications from 1 to 12 July. Find out here what the deadlines are, which apply to you, how to “experience The Power of Done”, and what to do if you are auto-assessed (and if not). Hot Tip: For a hassle-free Tax Filing Season 2026, simply rely on our expertise.

Comments Off on 2026 Tax Season Opens: Experience the Power of Done

Mandela Day: Why Younger Consumers Support Purpose-Driven Businesses

Millennials and Gen Z – two generations raised on social media, shaped by climate anxiety, and equipped with instant access to information – are now rewriting the rules of consumer behaviour. For these switched-on generations, purchases are a statement of identity. Brands that stand for environmental stewardship, fair labour, and community investment are winning a market share that older marketing models never anticipated. Here’s how you can make this trend work for you.

Comments Off on Mandela Day: Why Younger Consumers Support Purpose-Driven Businesses

Which Trust is Right for Me? Ask a Professional

Understanding the tax benefits and limitations of a trust or special trust is crucial to ensuring the trust beneficiaries are provided for as intended. South Africans can choose between several different trust structures, each with different purposes, benefits and limitations. Choosing the right structure for your situation is a make-or-break decision that demands professional advice.

Comments Off on Which Trust is Right for Me? Ask a Professional

5 Things Big Companies Do That Small Businesses Shouldn’t Copy

Big businesses have big budgets, big teams, and big safety nets. Small businesses have none of these things … And at times this can be to their advantage. The mistake many small business owners make is looking up towards their conglomerate competition and trying to replicate what they see. In fact, the playbook that works for a multinational can actually destroy smaller operations. This article explains why.

Comments Off on 5 Things Big Companies Do That Small Businesses Shouldn’t Copy

Death and (Capital Gains) Taxes: Don’t Get Caught Out

Capital Gains Tax (CGT) is not a flashy, Ferrari-driving, Gucci-wearing kind of tax. Instead, it quietly goes about its business in the background, day in and day out. This doesn’t make it any less consequential. Many estates that appear financially secure can come under unexpected pressure from Capital Gains Tax at death. The good news is that there are several relief mechanisms within the tax system that, with careful planning, can meaningfully reduce this impact.

Comments Off on Death and (Capital Gains) Taxes: Don’t Get Caught Out

Your Tax Deadlines for June 2026

05 June: PAYE submissions and payments 25 June: VAT manual submissions and payments 29 June: Excise duty payments 30 June: VAT electronic submissions and payments CIT Provisional Tax payments where applicable End of the 2nd fiscal quarter.

Comments Off on Your Tax Deadlines for June 2026

Business Budgeting Strategies for Navigating Volatile Markets

Particularly in volatile economic times like these, effective budgeting is a critical driver of business success. This is because a budget enables sustainable growth by aligning financial resources with strategic business goals. We can assist you to create well-structured budgets that provide a roadmap for navigating the ongoing market ups and downs, while maintaining cashflow and identifying opportunities for investment.

Comments Off on Business Budgeting Strategies for Navigating Volatile Markets

Top Tips for Handling Your Employee’s Personal Crisis

Personal crises, such as bereavement, divorce, illness, and mental health challenges, are a reality of life, and how you respond when your employee is struggling says everything about you as a leader. Handle the situation badly and you risk losing a good person. Handle it well and you’ll not only be doing the right thing, but you could also forge one of the most loyal working relationships of your career.

Comments Off on Top Tips for Handling Your Employee’s Personal Crisis

The Small Business Trends You Should Be Paying Attention To

While everyone’s talking about AI, trends are emerging that show the most successful small businesses have returned to the fundamentals: maximising every minute and tightening the leaks in local operations. Running a business in today’s topsy-turvy world is all about making the machine run smoother, ensuring that every hour spent translates directly into the bottom line and this is how they are doing it.

Comments Off on The Small Business Trends You Should Be Paying Attention To

Non-Compliant Trust? Penalties are Piling up…

This tax season marks an important shift for trusts, which are now subject to heightened reporting requirements, regardless of activity, as well as automated penalties for non-compliance starting on 4 May 2026. If you have a non-compliant trust, even if it is inactive, please speak to us. SARS has taken a zero-tolerance approach to trust compliance, increasing scrutiny of trust administration and automatically applying ongoing penalties and interest that can rapidly accumulate.

Comments Off on Non-Compliant Trust? Penalties are Piling up…

Annual Employer Tax Recon Due End May  

The Annual Employer Reconciliation Declaration (EMP501) remains a focus area for SARS. Employers have until the end of May to submit their declarations for the period 1 March 2025 to 28 February 2026. We invite you to rely on our expertise to ensure compliance with this legal requirement, as submitting incorrect or incomplete declarations (or missing the deadline) will cause additional work, penalties, delays and hassles for you and your employees.

Comments Off on Annual Employer Tax Recon Due End May  

Selling Your Business to Retire? Get This Tax Relief!

If you’re a small business owner aged 55 or older, the 2026 Budget contained some very good news. Not only has the CGT exemption on the sale of small business by older persons been increased, but the definition of “small business” has also been expanded. This could make a big difference to your retirement situation, not to mention the future of your business. Find out here what the new limits and conditions are, and how they might affect the decision and timing of a business sale.

Comments Off on Selling Your Business to Retire? Get This Tax Relief!

The 40% Rule: Do You Have Too Many Eggs in One Basket?

Client concentration risk can sink a healthy business faster than falling sales. When one customer accounts for too much revenue, cash flow, valuation, and even survival hinge on decisions you don’t control. Here we explain the “40% Rule.” What it is, why lenders and investors care about it, and how to manage concentration risk before it manages you.

Comments Off on The 40% Rule: Do You Have Too Many Eggs in One Basket?

“Invisible Work”: 3 Labour-Intensive Things Customers Will Never Pay For

Many small business owners fall into the “do it all” trap. You start with passion, but soon find yourself buried in tasks that have nothing to do with why you launched your venture. This leads to chronic burnout. You are busy, but are you productive? This feeling of being overwhelmed often stems from a failure to distinguish between being busy and making progress. That’s why you have to identify the “invisible work” that consumes your energy without ever appearing on a customer’s invoice or adding real value.

Comments Off on “Invisible Work”: 3 Labour-Intensive Things Customers Will Never Pay For

Your Tax Deadlines for April 2026

01 April: Start of the 2026/27 Financial Year 07 April: PAYE submissions and payments 24 April: VAT manual submissions and payments 29 April: Excise duty payments 30 April: VAT electronic submissions and payments  CIT Provisional Tax payments where applicable. Disclaimer: The information provided herein should not be used or relied on as professional advice. No liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions nor for any loss or damage arising from reliance upon any information herein. Always contact us for specific and detailed advice. © AccountingDotNews

Comments Off on Your Tax Deadlines for April 2026

When Growth Is a Tax Problem

Growth feels like progress. Sales increase, staff numbers rise, and profit improves. Yet each of these shifts changes your tax position. Here we examine how business expansion can trigger VAT obligations, higher provisional tax payments, payroll risk, structural strain, and cash flow pressure. Then we discuss what small business owners should address before growth creates avoidable tax exposure.

Comments Off on When Growth Is a Tax Problem

New VAT Thresholds: Thinking of Deregistering?

The recent increases in the compulsory VAT registration threshold to R2.3 million and in the voluntary registration threshold to R120,000 are widely welcomed. It will certainly ease the administrative burden on small businesses and the strain on their cash flow. Businesses that do not exceed the higher threshold on 1 April 2026 may apply to deregister for VAT. But be certain to rely on our expertise when making this decision, as it’s fraught with potentially costly consequences.

Comments Off on New VAT Thresholds: Thinking of Deregistering?

How to Create a Team Building Experience That Really Works

While on the surface they are just a spot of fun, team building exercises are actually a strategic investment in your business culture and performance. Done well, team building strengthens communication, fosters trust, and boosts morale. Done poorly, it feels like a forced afternoon that costs money and delivers little. As a small business owner, you need team building events that produce tangible improvements. Here’s how to do that.

Comments Off on How to Create a Team Building Experience That Really Works

15% Global Minimum Tax (GMT) Goes Live at SARS

The global minimum tax (GMT) – called an “agreement that will really change the world” – will be implemented in South Africa by SARS in 2026/27. While it may not impact your business directly, it should ultimately reduce your share of the tax burden by ensuring all multinational enterprises (MNEs) contribute their fair share of local taxes. SARS is actively preparing and the GMT registration and notification functionality on the eFiling platform went live on 16 March 2026. Find out here why specialist advice will be ever more important for local and global taxpayers in South Africa.

Comments Off on 15% Global Minimum Tax (GMT) Goes Live at SARS

Budget 2026: What it Means for You and Your Business

Taxpayers will enjoy long-awaited tax relief with much good news contained in the 2026 Budget. It scrapped the previously announced R20 billion in tax increases, and instead provides relief for taxpayers, assists small businesses and encourages savings by adjusting various tax brackets, caps and limits. There is also real optimism about the country’s economic growth prospects. So much so that Budget 2026 has been called a fiscal turning point for SA, as important milestones are achieved. Read more good news from the Budget here…

Comments Off on Budget 2026: What it Means for You and Your Business

Budget 2026: Your Tax Tables and Tax Calculator

Budget 2026 has brought long-overdue relief to taxpayers by not imposing VAT or income tax hikes and by adjusting the tables for tax rates, rebates and credits for inflation. Of course, some tax hikes were always going to happen: inflation-linked increases on sin taxes took effect on 25 February already and the fuel levies also increased. This selection of official SARS Tax Tables and other useful resources will help clarify your tax position for the new tax year. Then follow the link to Fin 24’s Budget Calculator (just follow the four-step process) to do your own calculation.

Comments Off on Budget 2026: Your Tax Tables and Tax Calculator

Why Your Cash Flow Problems May Be Down to Your Behaviour

For many small business owners, cash flow problems feel like a financial puzzle that’s impossible to figure out. It’s a numbers game that puts us at the mercy of the markets, and our clients’ payment terms. But what if the real issue isn’t the figures? When it comes down to it, cash flow issues have a lot more to do with our behavioural patterns than we sometimes believe.

Comments Off on Why Your Cash Flow Problems May Be Down to Your Behaviour

Streamlining In-House Accounting Processes with AI

By handling almost instantly the repetitive, menial bookkeeping tasks that previously consumed much company time and resources, Artificial Intelligence is fundamentally streamlining accounting processes. AI can reduce costs, minimise risks, and provide real-time business performance insights faster than a human. Freeing up you and your team to focus on growing the business.

Comments Off on Streamlining In-House Accounting Processes with AI

Your Tax Deadlines for March 2026

06 March – PAYE submissions and payments 25 March – VAT manual submissions and payments 30 March – Excise duty payments 31 March – End of the 2025/6 Financial year, VAT electronic submissions and payments & CIT Provisional Tax payments where applicable.

Comments Off on Your Tax Deadlines for March 2026

February Provisional Tax Deadline: How to Avoid Stiff Underestimation Penalties

The second provisional tax deadline for the 2026 financial year is just days away on 27 February 2026. This is an important and tricky deadline, because this second provisional tax estimate must be quite accurate (within 80–90% of actual taxable income) to avoid SARS’ stiff under-estimation penalty. Find out how we can help you to meet this important deadline with the highest accuracy.

Comments Off on February Provisional Tax Deadline: How to Avoid Stiff Underestimation Penalties

Why Doing Nothing May Be the Best Thing You Can Do

Business culture is obsessed with speed. In a world where motion, and constant optimisation is the dream, doing nothing can look like failure. Entrepreneurs, CEOs and other leaders are praised for quick decision making, rapid iteration, and relentless action, yet many of the highest performers quietly practise the opposite at critical moments. They pause. They wait. They refuse to react. Strategic inaction is often one of the most disciplined and profitable decisions a business leader can make.

Comments Off on Why Doing Nothing May Be the Best Thing You Can Do

Your Year-End Tax Checklist: Smart Moves Before 28 February

As we approach the end of the tax year, now is an ideal time to make a few strategic adjustments that can strengthen your financial position. These steps are simple, high-impact, and designed to help you make the most of the tax incentives available to South Africans. Read on to make sure you end the tax year right.

Comments Off on Your Year-End Tax Checklist: Smart Moves Before 28 February

So, You Want to Diversify? You Might Be Making a Mistake

Diversification is treated as a business virtue so unquestioned it borders on dogma. Expand the product line. Enter new markets. Hedge every risk. Spread exposure everywhere. Yet for many entrepreneurs, diversification may actually bring more risk than it solves. We examine whether more really is safer, and explore why simplicity, not spread, is often the real competitive advantage. Diversification makes perfect investment sense – but it doesn’t always make business sense.

Comments Off on So, You Want to Diversify? You Might Be Making a Mistake

Your Tax Deadlines for February 2026

06 February – PAYE submissions and payments 25 February – VAT manual submissions and payments 26 February – Excise duty payments 27 February – VAT electronic submissions and payments, CIT Provisional Tax payments where applicable and PIT Second Provisional Tax payments for the 2026 year of assessment.

Comments Off on Your Tax Deadlines for February 2026

The 5 Questions You Must Ask Before Making Your Business Resolutions

“If you can’t measure it, you can’t improve it.” (Peter F. Drucker, Business Management Guru) Entrepreneurs are hardwired to look forward, and chase the next win. This constant looking ahead can create a costly strategic blind spot. When you rush past December’s data to write January’s plan, you run the risk of missing the critical lessons already paid for in time, money, and stress. A comprehensive review gives you the opportunity to pinpoint previous issues and create solid strategies for growth. Without this backward glance, your resolutions become a wishlist disconnected from operational reality. The key is turning reflection into a data-driven process, not a feelings-based one. Before you look for your new year’s resolutions, it’s therefore wise to sit down and answer these five precise questions. 1. Which goals did we actually achieve last year, and what specific behaviours drove those wins? The most common mistake in goal review is simply ticking boxes. You hit the revenue target – great. But why? While hitting a financial benchmark is great, understanding which tactics got you there is the real win. Instead of simply analysing KPIs, you should compare your initial goals with your final metrics. Analyse the data to understand what's working and what isn't. Was the goal achieved because a specific marketing campaign worked, or did an unexpected market event carry the result? By identifying the exact steps, processes, or resource allocations that delivered the win you can prevent yourself from inadvertently eliminating a high-performing strategy in the new year or, worse still, believing a non-repeatable outcome is a sustainable strategy. 2. Where did we waste the most resources? This question requires an honest, non-emotional audit of your financial and calendar commitments. It’s a review of efficiency, not just income. Beyond the simple rand amount, evaluate the return on investment for projects and tasks. As your accountants we can help by examining your cash flow, expenses, and budget adherence. Which recurring expense failed to generate its expected value? Is there enough money coming in, and are you staying within budget? The next step is to look at which project delivered disappointing results compared to the time and effort it consumed. By identifying the single biggest time waster of the year for you and your key staff, you can cut inefficiencies and free up resources for genuinely productive initiatives. 3. What did the customer or market teach us that changes our fundamental approach? Growth depends on staying relevant and competitive. Your business exists to solve a customer problem, and that problem and the best way to solve it changes constantly. The information you need to adapt is already in your email inboxes, support tickets, and sales reports. First analyse your customer feedback. By looking for common themes of satisfaction and dissatisfaction you can open up areas for new services and pinpoint areas where your process is disappointing your biggest clients. Follow this up with a thorough audit of the latest industry trends and competitor actions. This will help you keep…

Comments Off on The 5 Questions You Must Ask Before Making Your Business Resolutions

Harnessing the New Year’s “Fresh Start Effect” for a Great 2026

“A fresh start is not a place, it is a mindset.” (Jordan Peterson) The beginning of the new year can be more than another Monday morning: it can be a powerful psychological reset button. The ‘fresh start effect’ comes after milestones, like New Year's or anniversaries, that help people believe they can become better versions of themselves – and this applies just as powerfully to teams as it does to individuals.  It’s as if a mere calendar flip wipes the slate clean, making new commitments feel more achievable and reducing the emotional weight of past disappointments.   When your team returns from the holiday break, they aren’t just rested – they are primed for change, and feeling capable of achieving goals that might have seemed daunting just weeks earlier. Capturing the moment: Practical strategies for January 2026 The “fresh start effect” creates a window of heightened motivation, but it is only temporary. Research consistently shows that initial New Year’s enthusiasm naturally fades without proper structure and ongoing engagement. The challenge then is to convert this early motivation into sustainable systems. Timing matters. Schedule your most important organisational initiatives, strategic planning sessions, and team goal-setting meetings in these early weeks of January. The psychological conditions are optimal right now, as your team feels capable, refreshed, and ready for change. Use this window to establish the habits, routines, and systems that will carry you through the entire year. Start by setting specific and measurable goals. Clear and quantifiable goals significantly improve employee engagement and productivity. Break annual targets into smaller quarterly or monthly milestones to prevent overwhelm and provide regular opportunities to maintain momentum and celebrate progress. Team-based goal setting enhances overall performance because it creates accountability, builds collective commitment, and ensures that everyone understands how their individual efforts contribute to larger team goals. Building sustainable momentum beyond January The fresh start effect can be a catalyst for creating systems, habits, and cultural practices that sustain performance all year long. Visual progress tracking taps into our psychological need for achievement and keeps the momentum alive. Implement regular check-ins and progress reviews — at least monthly. These touchpoints maintain accountability, allow for course corrections, and provide opportunities to celebrate wins. Creating fresh starts all year round You can also engineer temporal landmarks throughout the year. Things like monthly reset days, quarterly planning sessions, or team offsite retreats… These moments provide mini fresh starts that can reignite motivation when energy naturally dips. Use these inflection points for team brainstorming sessions, strategic pivots, or launching new initiatives. The psychology works the same way: you’re creating a sense of temporal separation that makes change feel achievable.   The long game: Making 2026 different The new year brings a gift: a team that believes change is possible and feels capable of achieving goals. What you do in the next few weeks – the systems you establish, the habits you build, and the accountability you foster – could significantly impact your team’s performance for the entire year ahead.…

Comments Off on Harnessing the New Year’s “Fresh Start Effect” for a Great 2026

Outlook 2026: Moving Forward with Confident Resilience

“The outlook is clear: resilience and innovation will define Africa’s growth story.” (Ignatius Sehoole, CEO of KPMG South Africa) “A continent brimming with optimism.” This is how KPMG’s 11th Africa CEO Outlook describes Africa. Among the African CEOs surveyed, 63% expressed optimism about their country’s growth prospects and 78% expressed strong business confidence. Over the short term, 98% expect business expansion and 86% are likely to pursue acquisitions. “African CEOs are not only adapting to global challenges but are actively investing in the future through AI, talent, and sustainable growth strategies,” explains Ignatius Sehoole, CEO of KPMG South Africa. Most CEOs globally (79%) also say they are optimistic about their own organisations’ prospects and the majority anticipate rising revenues over the next three years. Like their African counterparts, they are doubling down on AI, talent investment and ESG as the keys to resilience and growth. Common challenges & shared priorities CEOs, globally and in Africa, face very similar challenges. This has made them more deliberate when deciding how to channel their resources. Investment priorities for global and Africa CEOs  AfricaGlobalCybersecurity and digital risks resilience45%39%AI integration into operations and workflow41%34%Investing in solution and technology innovation for business expansion34%26%Regulatory compliance and reporting31%36%Supply chain resilience and operational continuity24%28%Climate and sustainability initiatives23%16%AI governance, ethics and responsible use20%20%Geopolitical monitoring and analysis20%23% Source: 2025 Africa CEO Outlook - KPMG South Africa In addition, in Africa, CEOs are increasingly prioritising intra-African trade and market expansion on the continent. AI: Top 2026 strategic priority For African and global CEOs heading into 2026, AI is a top strategic priority. 26% of African CEOs plan to allocate more than 20% of their annual budget to AI in the next 12 months, almost twice the global average of 14%. This high level of investment by African CEOs reflects a shift in mindset, with AI being viewed not only as a tool for future growth, but as an immediate lever for operational efficiency, better decision-making, and long-term resilience. To deploy and scale AI, African organisations are faced with three options: build, buy or partner. “Each organisation must weigh the pros and cons of building, buying, or partnering for AI solutions. There is no one-size-fits-all-approach. The right strategy depends on the organisation’s existing capabilities, risk appetite and strategic objectives,” explains Joelene Pierce, CEO Designate of KPMG South Africa. Talent in the age of AI Among African CEOs surveyed, 88% expect to increase headcount over the next year and 62% are focusing on retaining and re-training high-potential talent. The majority (81%) believe that upskilling in AI will directly impact their success and more than two thirds (67%) are redeploying staff into AI enabled roles. These numbers, too, closely reflect global perspectives, with 92% of CEOs expecting to increase headcount next year, and 77% agreeing that AI upskilling will directly impact business success. Already, 71% are focusing on retaining and retraining high-potential talent, and 59% are redeploying staff into AI enabled roles. ESG and sustainability Despite regulatory complexity, African CEOs remain committed to Environmental, Social, and…

Comments Off on Outlook 2026: Moving Forward with Confident Resilience

Our Top Tips for Communicating Price Changes

“People don’t mind price increases as much as they mind surprises.” (Robert Cialdini, Psychologist and Business Author) Costs go up and so do prices. And yet most businesses raise prices later than they should. A global study by Simon-Kucher found that less than a quarter of companies adjust prices multiple times a year as needed, with almost 30% discussing price changes only once annually, and 26% waiting for new customer tenders or contract expirations. By the time owners take action, margins are stressed and the communication feels rushed. This is unfortunate, because studies show that a thoughtful considered, and timeous approach is the difference between a customer accepting a change and walking away. “We’ll lose customers if we raise prices” This fear is common, but it’s not grounded in the research. Studies from the Harvard Business Review note that when customers leave after a price change, it’s usually because the business has stayed quiet about the reason. Silence erodes trust. People assume the worst, even when the increase is modest. The same study revealed that most customers accept changes if they still see value and understand why the adjustment exists. Communication is key. Your customers should know what costs shifted and what value you’ve added. Keep the message simple enough that a customer could repeat it back without confusion. “Customers won’t care about the reason” Owners often assume customers ignore explanations. Evidence says the opposite. Research from McKinsey & Company found that when companies explain the drivers behind price changes, such as rising input costs or service improvements, customer trust remains stable, even when the increase is noticeable. People don’t need all the details, but they definitely do want you to add context. A short, fact-based explanation helps them understand that the decision wasn’t arbitrary or simply based on greed. “If we apologise enough, customers will be less upset” For many owners the first inclination is to apologise to the customer for the added pressure the price changes will have on their lives. Trying to soften the blow with an apology frames the price change as a mistake rather than a strategic choice. Customers may wonder whether the change is temporary or negotiable, thereby weakening your position. This is all backed up by researchers writing in the Journal of Service Research who note that apologies work best when something has gone wrong. You can acknowledge the impact on customers without presenting the change as an error. Aim for respectful, not remorseful. “We should wait until the last minute to avoid backlash” Delaying the announcement doesn’t reduce resistance, it magnifies it. Short notice announcements leave customers scrambling. If the increases catch them off guard this can lead to resentment – something that’s far more likely to lead them to change supplier than the price change itself. Giving your customers timely notice shows that you respect their planning and cash flow. You should aim to communicate price increases as early as possible. Even a few weeks’ notice can make the shift easier. Use one message delivered…

Comments Off on Our Top Tips for Communicating Price Changes

Your Tax Deadlines for January 2026

07 January – PAYE submissions and payments 19 January – End of Filing Season 2025 for Provisional Taxpayers and End of Filing Season 2025 for Trusts 23 January – VAT manual submissions and payments               29 January – Excise duty payments 30 January – VAT electronic submissions and payments & CIT Provisional Tax payments where applicable. Disclaimer: The information provided herein should not be used or relied on as professional advice. No liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions nor for any loss or damage arising from reliance upon any information herein. Always contact us for specific and detailed advice. © AccountingDotNews

Comments Off on Your Tax Deadlines for January 2026

R&R for Better Business Performance? Here’s how…

"Sometimes the most productive thing you can do is relax." (Mark Black) By prioritising rest and relaxation (R&R) over the holidays, businesses can cultivate a healthier, more productive, and more resilient workforce – which ultimately leads to sustained high performance. Here’s why R&R matters for your business performance… And how to help your team make the most of their December break. 6 ways R&R boosts business performance Prevents costly burnout. Chronic stress leads to burnout, which dramatically decreases performance and increases employee turnover. Regular rest maintains sustainable energy and enthusiasm, protecting your investment in talent. Unlocks creativity and innovation. Downtime allows your subconscious mind to process information and make new connections. Those breakthrough ideas rarely happen amid non-stop meetings and deadlines but rather emerge when your brain has space to wander. Sharpens decision-making. Fatigue impairs cognitive function. Rested leaders and employees analyse situations more clearly, weigh options more effectively, and make sound strategic decisions that move the business forward. Increases productivity and focus. Paradoxically, working non-stop decreases productivity. Taking breaks recharges the brain, improving concentration and efficiency. Research shows that the busier people are, the less creative they become. Enhances problem-solving. Stepping away from a challenge provides fresh perspective. You'll often return with quicker, more effective solutions than if you'd powered through. Improves team communication. When people are tired or stressed, communication suffers. Rest enhances the ability to listen attentively, express ideas clearly, and avoid conflicts caused by fatigue-driven reactions. How to maximise your team’s December leave With the December holidays in a few days, now is the ideal time to encourage your team to make the most of the leave days. A good starting point is to ensure your team knows that taking leave is essential: some people need permission to step away from their responsibilities. Also encourage complete disconnection during leave days, reminding your team members that effective rest means genuinely disengaging from work and doing whatever their heart desires, be that hiking the Otter Trail, spending time with the family or embarking on a DIY project. To reduce anxiety about taking time off and allow everyone to truly switch off when they’re on leave, you need to plan ahead. Work with your team now to establish clear out-of-office dates, handover protocols, and emergency contacts. And ensure projects are covered and clients are informed long before the holidays begin.  Finally, remember to lead by example – when managers and business owners take their own breaks and visibly disconnect, it gives everyone else permission to do the same. Rest well, start well Rest is not an indulgence, it’s a strategic investment in your business’ long-term success. A well-rested team will return sharper, more creative, and ready to tackle challenges with renewed energy in 2026. Disclaimer: The information provided herein should not be used or relied on as professional advice. No liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions nor for any loss or damage arising from reliance upon any information herein. Always contact us for specific and detailed advice.…

Comments Off on R&R for Better Business Performance? Here’s how…

NPO? NGO? NPC? PBO? What’s the Difference Anyway?

“A rich man without charity is a rogue; and perhaps it would be no difficult matter to prove that he is also a fool." (Henry Fielding, English writer and judge) Across the country, tens of thousands of groups run feeding schemes, environmental projects, schools, clinics, and training centres, often built on passion rather than profit. But while “NGO” is the word most people use, it’s not actually a legal term in South Africa. Entrepreneurs who fund or collaborate with non-profits need to know what each term really means, because it affects compliance, governance, and whether your donation qualifies for a tax deduction. Alphabet soup: What does it all mean? NGO (Non-Governmental Organisation) NGO is a broad, informal term used for any group doing social good outside of government. It could be a community group, a youth initiative, or a local charity. There’s no single registration for an “NGO” in South Africa and literally anyone can use the label.  NPC (Non-Profit Company) Some charitable organisations register as NPCs with the Companies and Intellectual Property Commission (CIPC). This suits organisations that want a more formal company structure, complete with directors and a Memorandum of Incorporation.   NPO (Non-Profit Organisation) An NPO is a specific legal status created by the Non-Profit Organisations Act. You need to apply to the Department of Social Development (DSD) with your constitution or founding document. Once approved, you get an official NPO number and a certificate that opens doors which funders, corporates and even banks. Non-Profit Companies (see below) can also apply to be NPOs, in which case both sets of rules apply. PBO (Public Benefit Organisation) Both NPOs and NPCs must apply to SARS to become PBOs if they want to unlock the tax benefits available to charitable organisations (more info below).    What’s the point of registering? Many groups, particularly small ones, will run perfectly well without registering. Registering does, however, bring a number of real advantages. It shows funders and partners that the organisation is credible and accountable. It lets the operators open a business bank account in the organisation’s name. It qualifies the organisation for funding from government, corporates, and the National Lotteries Commission. It’s the first step toward tax exemption. Any entrepreneurs working with or donating to a cause should always ask for proof of registration as an NPO or NPC. When does “non-profit” mean tax-free? Here’s where many people get caught out. Just because an organisation is registered as an NPO doesn’t mean they are automatically exempt from tax. To enjoy tax benefits, like exemption from income tax and giving donors section 18A certificates, the organisation must also apply to SARS for Public Benefit Organisation (PBO) status. (Being granted Section 18A status requires a separate approval on top of PBO status.) That approval comes with conditions: funds must only be used for approved public-benefit activities, and annual returns must be filed. PBO status will always make an organisation more attractive to donors because their contributions can now become tax-deductible and exempt from donations…

Comments Off on NPO? NGO? NPC? PBO? What’s the Difference Anyway?

Outstanding Tax Debt? SARS’ Expedited Debt Compromise Ends 31 December 2025

“The South African Revenue Service is always ready to assist taxpayers to fulfil their legal obligations.” (SARS) Acknowledging that taxpayers often find it difficult to settle tax debt due to financial challenges, SARS has launched an expedited debt compromise process to help eligible taxpayers settle outstanding tax debts swiftly and on more favourable terms. The normal debt compromise process remains available to all taxpayers, and learnings from this expedited process will be used to enhance the broader system. What is a debt compromise? A compromise is a written agreement between SARS and a taxpayer in which SARS agrees to accept a reduced amount as full and final settlement of a tax debt. Once the taxpayer pays the agreed amount and complies with the terms, SARS waives the balance of the debt. However, if the taxpayer defaults or fails to remain compliant, SARS can reinstate the full debt. Expedited debt compromise eligibility criteria The process applies to non-disputed tax debts older than 12 months. You must be a client of a registered tax practitioner. Your tax returns must be up to date (even if payment is outstanding). The following exclusions apply: entities subject to specific legal processes (such as liquidations, estates, and business rescue cases), companies that are deregistered, cases subject to criminal investigation and audit, as well as cases within the write-off process, taxpayers who have had a compromise in the past three years, and taxpayers who have the means to pay but refuse to do so. Submission requirements Taxpayers applying for the expedited tax debt compromise process must provide comprehensive relevant supporting documentation with their applications, which must be submitted by 31 December 2025. These documents include: Latest Annual Financial Statements (not older than one year) Last six months' bank statements Cashflow forecast for 12 months List of Assets and Liabilities at market value Debtors’ age analysis Details of any connected persons Details of assets disposed of in the last three years Disclosure of future or contingent interests in assets Details of assets under the taxpayer's control (including through trusts) Current and projected income for the next three years Application letter with clear motivation, including the proposed settlement offer amount, and the source of funds to pay the offered amount Collection Information Statement (CIS) request with reasons and proof to compromise the debt. It is important that disclosures are accurate – if they aren’t SARS might not even consider the application. SARS has committed to resolving qualifying applications within four weeks, using dedicated teams and enhanced workflow management. Approved compromise settlements may be paid either in full (once-off payment), or in instalments as agreed by SARS. Act now to avoid escalation From 1 January 2026, SARS will escalate enforcement against taxpayers who remain non-compliant and have not applied for compromise. Such enforcement may include civil judgments against the taxpayer, writs of execution, collection of money from third parties such as banks, attachment of taxpayer assets, holding directors or members personally liable for the debt, sequestration or liquidation of the…

Comments Off on Outstanding Tax Debt? SARS’ Expedited Debt Compromise Ends 31 December 2025

Moving from Freelancer to Employer: The Complete Guide

“You can dream, create, design and build the most wonderful place in the world, but it requires people to make the dream a reality.” (Walt Disney) Faced with rising demand, every successful solo-business person or freelancer will start wishing they had someone around who could help. But deciding to hire means planning for ongoing salary costs, statutory contributions, written contracts and record-keeping. Do it deliberately, with preparation and you will gain capacity and potentially, increased profit. Do it without preparation and you can pick up expensive legal and tax problems. When’s the right time? First, make a list of tasks you believe you could hand over. Then look for areas that could be improved if you had someone to help with them. For example, if admin, scheduling or basic service work is stopping you from completing billable hours, then that’s a clear sign that something needs to change. You may want to consider hiring if you find yourself regularly turning away clients, or when your quality slips because you are over-stretched. You should also consider whether you have a steady pipeline that has areas of potential growth. If the need is temporary, a contractor might be a better bet. Taking that next step If you have decided to hire, then the next step is calculating just how much you can afford to pay. A salary is not just the monthly wage. You need to include a budget for additional costs you may need to carry, like equipment, training and the chance that the hire won’t be productive from the outset. Who to hire first When choosing who to hire, you should closely examine just where you’re getting stuck and then look for an employee who removes the biggest bottleneck. Common first hires include an administrative assistant to help with invoicing, scheduling and emails and a junior specialist or apprentice who can do the routine parts of your core service.  Your job advert should cover that bottleneck and list the main tasks and skills required. You should avoid the temptation of writing vague or overloaded job descriptions in the hope of finding a jack-of-all-trades. While these people may exist, they won’t be looking at entry-level jobs. Key registrations as an employer Before the first payday, you will need to register as an employer with SARS so you can withhold PAYE (pay-as-you-earn) tax. You will also need to register with: The UIF (Unemployment Insurance Fund) where both employers and employees contribute 1% of pay The Compensation Fund (COIDA), which covers workplace injuries If your annual payroll exceeds R500,000 you must register for and pay the Skills Development Levy (SDL) – 1% of payroll After that, you should set up your payroll processes as these need to be in place before the first pay run. Payroll mistakes are common and costly and your accountant (that’s us) can help you to set these up correctly. Contracts and labour law basics Every employee should ideally have a written contract that sets out salary, hours, duties,…

Comments Off on Moving from Freelancer to Employer: The Complete Guide

Your Tax Deadlines for December 2025

05 December – PAYE submissions and payments 24 December – VAT manual submissions and payments 30 December – Excise duty payments 31 December – VAT electronic submissions and payments & CIT Provisional Tax payments where applicable. Disclaimer: The information provided herein should not be used or relied on as professional advice. No liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions nor for any loss or damage arising from reliance upon any information herein. Always contact us for specific and detailed advice. © AccountingDotNews

Comments Off on Your Tax Deadlines for December 2025

Your Year-End Business Checklist: 10 Essential Tasks

“Christmas is a season not only of rejoicing, but of reflection.” (Winston Churchill) Can you believe November is upon us already? But instead of panicking about Christmas presents, it’s time to get strategic. The end of the year presents a crucial opportunity to settle outstanding matters, measure your business's progress, and establish a strong foundation for a prosperous new year.   This checklist can help you achieve this before December rolls around. Your 10-step checklist Back up your data: Back up essential files including accounting documents, client information, and emails. It’s a good idea to keep at least one copy on the cloud and another copy offline on an external hard drive in a secure location.  Stay on top of employee matters: Update all employee information as well as employee access and passwords to software programs and computer systems. Conduct constructive performance appraisals or feedback sessions and share rewards and recognition for notable contributions.  Connect with your customers: Send festive season wishes and details of your holiday operating hours, and invite your customers to give feedback about your company. Add an out-of-office notification on all your communication channels with specific dates as well as an emergency number. Understand your financial position: Management accounts or reports like the income statement, balance sheet, and cash flow statement provide insight into the expense patterns, profit margins, revenue trends and financial health of your business, enabling informed decisions.  Understand your tax position: Make sure you know your various tax obligations, liabilities and deadlines, and any tax deductions and credits you may qualify for before year-end.    Review marketing and sales efforts: Evaluate which strategies worked, which didn't, and why.  Collect outstanding invoices: Get your December invoices out as early as possible and don't let unpaid invoices carry over into the new year. Follow up on overdue payments now to boost cash flow and start fresh in January.   Verify supplier information: Update your supplier database by confirming contact details, while also evaluating supplier relationships and negotiating better terms.  Take stock: Take a physical inventory of all equipment, supplies and stock to better meet customer demand, identify any discrepancies in your records, prepare tax returns and insurance proposals, and effect necessary repairs, maintenance and upgrades. Set a specific day for the count, organise the space, record quantities, and calculate total value.  Audit your digital presence: Test every link on your website, check your contact forms, review your social media profiles and call your business number to ensure everything works. Start 2026 off on the right foot Once you’ve ended the year right, you can start focusing on what’s to come. Use your financial statements, marketing and sales reviews, customer feedback and team input to evaluate progress on last year's goals and to set new ones.  Create a high-level action plan for each goal to guide your progress throughout the coming year. Please contact us if you need any help with this. Disclaimer: The information provided herein should not be used or relied on as professional advice. No liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions nor for any…

Comments Off on Your Year-End Business Checklist: 10 Essential Tasks

Surviving Trust Tax Season 2025 – And Beyond

“Trustees remain accountable for all tax matters of a trust, regardless of the economic activity of the trust.” (SARS) The official trust filing season for the 2025 year of assessment is now open for both provisional and non-provisional taxpayers – and SARS has issued stern warnings to trustees to fulfil their tax obligations.  Who must file trust tax returns?   A trust is included under the definition of a “person” in terms of the ITA (Income Tax Act no.58 of 1962) and is therefore regarded as a taxpayer.  All South African trusts, including resident and non-resident trusts, that are registered for income tax, must file a tax return annually, even if the trust is not economically active.  A trustee is the representative taxpayer of a trust. Trustees or representatives must register the trust for income tax and file the required tax returns annually. Alternatively, a registered tax practitioner can be appointed as the representative taxpayer. What must be done?  Taking into account recent changes to the legislation, trustees must submit their returns for the 2025 year of assessment and file the mandatory supporting documents listed further below.  Recent legislative changes The “flow-through” principle is now limited to resident beneficiaries, so all amounts vested to non-resident beneficiaries are taxable in the hands of the trust. This also affects the submission requirements for provisional tax (IRP6). Foreign tax credits for taxes paid on income or capital gains earned in a foreign jurisdiction can now be used to prevent double taxation. From the 2025 tax year onwards, unused foreign tax credits will be carried forward automatically to the subsequent years of assessment, up to a maximum of six years. The Section 12H Learnership Agreement is extended to 31 March 2027. The definition of a trust is updated to include collective investment scheme portfolios. SARS has issued new rules on how losses relating to distributions are limited under section 25B. Return submissions The final deadline for the submission of provisional and non-provisional Trust Income Tax Returns (ITR12Ts) is 19 January 2026. Mandatory supporting documents Required DocumentsDetailsTrust instrumentLatest deed or willCertain transactions and financial flowsIncome sources and distribution of income; proof of any tax creditsFinancial informationFinancial Statements/Annual Administration AccountParties connected to a trustBeneficial-ownership document, including detail per entity listedOther documentsLetters of Authority and Minutes and Resolutions of trustee meetingsForeign trust document (if applicable)Controlled Foreign Company (IT10)Mining document (if applicable)Mining Schedule A and B Source: SARS File on time! Trustees and administrators should take note that all the return submissions and supporting documents are due by 19 January 2026 – just days into the new year. Submitting within the deadlines is necessary to comply with SARS regulations. Late submissions can lead to administrative penalties, interest charges, and additional steps. What else must be done? Because a trust is also a provisional taxpayer, trustees should be aware that a trust is further required to submit provisional tax returns (IRP6) twice a year in August and February. In addition, trustees are also required to submit an IT3(t) third-party data return that provides details of amounts vested…

Comments Off on Surviving Trust Tax Season 2025 – And Beyond

Time Is Money: 8 Timesaving Tips Every Business Leader Should Utilise

“The key is not to prioritise what’s on your schedule, but to schedule your priorities.” (Stephen R. Covey, The 7 Habits of Highly Effective People) In business it’s too easy for an entrepreneur or business leader to mistake being busy for being effective. Working long hours with back-to-back meetings can look like productivity – but without clarity and boundaries, the important work, may not actually be getting done.  According to a study conducted by McKinsey, 61% of senior executives believe that at least half of the time they spend making decisions is unproductive. So how can you stop this happening to you?  Time-saving strategies are an essential tool for sustainable modern leadership. Streamlining processes, delegating effectively, and embracing automation can transform your day. Done right, these tactics free up energy for strategic thinking, innovation, and decision-making – all of which can lead to greater growth in your business. Here are some evidence-based tips every business leader should employ to better utilise their time.  1. Prioritise ruthlessly One of the most effective ways to save time is by focusing only on tasks that deliver real impact. The Eisenhower Matrix (dividing tasks into urgent vs. important) remains a powerful tool. Many leaders fall into the trap of handling urgent but low-value work, rather than carving out time for strategic priorities. The fix? Review your to-do list daily and cut or delegate anything that doesn’t directly move the business forward. Treat your time as an investment portfolio and put more into the high-return opportunities. 2. Delegate with trust Effective delegation is a skill, not just because it frees up your time, but also because it empowers your team. Too many leaders hoard responsibilities out of habit or fear that standards won’t be met. But this can bottleneck workflows and burn time on details that others are capable of handling. You should be clearly defining expectations, providing resources, and then stepping back. By learning to fully trust your team you free yourself up for higher-level thinking and decision-making. Just as importantly, you give staff room to grow, in the process increasing employee engagement and retention. 3. The algorithm is your friend Everyone’s talking about AI these days, and with good reason. Technology can be a business leader’s greatest ally. From scheduling tools to delivering automated reporting, letting technology take care of the smaller tasks can strip hours of repetitive labour from your week. The upfront effort and cost of setting up automation pays dividends quickly. According to a Deloitte survey, businesses using automation in finance and operations reported time savings of between 60% and 80% in some high volume, transactional finance processes. As your accountant, we can help you adjust budgets to cater for tech upgrades and installations, and the adjusted workflows that will surely follow. Leaders who resist these tools risk drowning in avoidable admin. 4. Guard your calendar Your calendar is a reflection of your priorities. Yet many leaders allow it to be hijacked by endless meetings. A practical fix is to…

Comments Off on Time Is Money: 8 Timesaving Tips Every Business Leader Should Utilise

How Your Payment Terms Could be Damaging Your Business

“Beware of little expenses; a small leak will sink a great ship.” (Benjamin Franklin) Extending 30-, 60- or 90-day payment terms may seem like a simple trick to help your sales teams convert sales, smooth negotiations and boost customer service. What you may not recognise, though, is that those terms are not neutral commercial niceties – they are a form of credit. When your business supplies goods or services today and accepts payment weeks or months later, it has effectively provided an unsecured loan to the buyer. That “invisible loan” has measurable costs: higher working-capital needs, lost interest income, distorted pricing decisions and elevated credit risk. When you sell on extended terms, “accounts receivable” grows and cash on the balance sheet shrinks until the buyer pays. That increases days-sales-outstanding (DSO) and raises the working-capital requirement. If you borrow to cover the gap (common for seasonal businesses or those with tight margins) the interest paid on that borrowing is a direct cost of the terms you offered. Even when you don’t borrow, the opportunity cost remains: cash not received cannot be used to reduce debt, invest in higher-return projects, or fund inventory when demand spikes. Over time the cumulative burden of routinely extended terms reduces agility and margins. Unfortunately, many clients demand extended payment terms, and your competition may be prepared to accede to their wishes. So how do you ensure you keep the business without going out of business yourself?           1. Price the finance Treat longer payment terms as a priced service. Build a transparent financing fee into orders that use 60- or 90-day terms, or publish two price lists: a net price for immediate payment and a financed price for deferred settlement. Customers accept explicit fees more readily than hidden margin increases, and your finance team can model return on capital precisely. 2. Offer structured early-payment incentives Instead of unconditional long payment terms, offer predictable early-payment discounts or dynamic discounting tied to actual payment date. A 0.5–1.0% discount for payment within 7–10 days often costs less than the buyer’s short-term borrowing and converts receivables into near-cash for you. 3. Underwrite and limit credit formally Move from ad-hoc allowances to formal credit applications and limits. Require a minimum credit assessment for extended terms, set credit lines tied to payment performance, and review limits at set intervals. For new or higher-risk customers, insist on shorter terms or staged delivery until a track record is established. 4. Design payment terms as part of commercial deals Make terms a negotiation item linked to value. Trade extended terms for commitments: volume guarantees, longer contract terms, staged milestones, or partial upfront payment. Where applicable, split deals into an upfront deposit and a deferred balance tied to delivery or performance to reduce unsecured exposure. 5. Use technology and supply-chain finance options Make payment easier with accurate, timely electronic invoicing, one-click payment links, and multiple payment methods. For larger B2B (business-to-business) accounts, consider invoice finance or supply-chain finance platforms. They enable buyers to settle invoices early and…

Comments Off on How Your Payment Terms Could be Damaging Your Business

Your Tax Deadlines for November 2025

07 November – PAYE submissions and payments 25 November – VAT manual submissions and payments 27 November – Excise duty payments 28 November – VAT electronic submissions and payments, & CIT Provisional Tax payments where applicable. Disclaimer: The information provided herein should not be used or relied on as professional advice. No liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions nor for any loss or damage arising from reliance upon any information herein. Always contact us for specific and detailed advice. © AccountingDotNews

Comments Off on Your Tax Deadlines for November 2025

This Halloween, Stay Safe From eFiling Profile Hijackings

“Profile hijacking points to pervasive cybercrime with global links.” (Edward Kieswetter, SARS Commissioner) The Tax Ombud has again warned South Africans about the concerning increase in eFiling profile hijackings, which has spurred the Office of the Tax Ombud (OTO) to launch a survey of taxpayers' experiences and a systemic investigation into SARS. What is eFiling profile hijacking?   eFiling profile hijacking involves cybercriminals gaining unauthorised access to taxpayers' SARS eFiling accounts. Once inside, they change the security details and banking information, and submit fraudulent tax returns to redirect the refunds into their own accounts.    Methods such as SIM swaps and phishing are commonly employed to get access to taxpayers’ eFiling profiles. Using calls and fraudulent SARS text messages, emails and letters of demand, scammers pose as SARS officials or tax advisors, often pretending to want to assist taxpayers to get their SARS refunds.  Concerns have also been raised about possible internal fraud and insider involvement at SARS and certain banks. SARS systemic investigation  While SARS acknowledges the rise in eFiling profile hijackings, it emphasises that although individual profiles have been compromised, the SARS system itself has not been breached.  SARS adds that additional security measures have been implemented and that it is collaborating with financial institutions and the OTO to combat the scourge of profile hijacking.  How to safeguard your eFiling profile  SARS has issued the following advice: Avoid sharing your eFiling login details. SARS will never request OTPs, passwords or bank details via calls, emails or text messages. Use strong and unique passwords and update them regularly. Enable two-factor authentication for an additional layer of security. Regularly check your eFiling profile and submitted returns for any unauthorised changes. Verify your bank account on eFiling before a refund is paid, even if there hasn’t been a change to the banking details. If you suspect your profile has been hijacked, change your login credentials promptly using another device, and report it immediately to SARS and to the SAPS as an identity theft case. Rely on the expertise of a SARS registered tax practitioner such as ourselves.  How we help keep your eFiling profile safe  As your accounting and tax partner, we help you to keep your eFiling profile safe by, for example, keeping abreast of all the latest scams, validating the status of your tax affairs and any SARS enquiries or requests, and by using only official channels for interacting with SARS, especially when making payments.  If you are concerned about the security of your SARS eFiling profile, or if you have been contacted by anyone offering assistance with obtaining a SARS refund, contact us immediately.  We are the ally you need in the fight against profile hijacking. Disclaimer: The information provided herein should not be used or relied on as professional advice. No liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions nor for any loss or damage arising from reliance upon any information herein. Always contact us for specific and detailed advice. © AccountingDotNews

Comments Off on This Halloween, Stay Safe From eFiling Profile Hijackings

Salary Sacrifice: Why Founders Should Always Pay Themselves

“Paying yourself isn’t selfish, it’s sustainable. The goal is to strike a balance that supports your personal life without compromising the growth of your company.”  (Salim Omar, CPA and serial entrepreneur) Many founders see skipping their own salary as a noble way to fund growth. In reality, underpaying yourself often backfires. Research shows that 82% of small business failures stem from cash flow problems and unpaid founders can mask true costs, distort margins, and create hidden financial pressure – and that’s just the start of it. What’s the real cost of your time? When founders refuse to take a salary, they are effectively treating their own time as free. In the scramble to conserve cash, they tell themselves they can wait to be paid until profits improve. But unpaid labour is not free. By not recognising this cost, you skew the economics of your business. Imagine you hire a manager to take over your duties. Their salary would immediately appear as a line item. By not paying yourself, you are masking a true expense. This can mislead investors, lenders, and even yourself about whether the business model is sustainable and prevent changes that need to be made. Pricing, margins, and growth targets all look healthier than they are, setting you up for shocks later.  This is why savvy investors prefer to see founders compensated fairly. An unpaid or underpaid founder may seem admirable in the short term, but it raises questions about whether they and the company can endure the demands of growth. Burnout is real Founders who delay setting a salary usually do so because they are waiting for a day when they feel the business has “earned it.” The problem is that this line keeps moving. There’s always another milestone, another round of investment, or another expense that feels more urgent. Meanwhile the founder is likely eroding personal savings, undermining their career advancement elsewhere and causing stress and sleepless nights in their own home. A survey by Kruze Consulting of over 200 venture-backed start-ups found that business owners who underpaid themselves for too long often burned out and quit before their companies reached key milestones. By paying yourself out, and minimising the financial risks at home, you can avoid the same fate. Tax benefits Not paying yourself a salary isn’t doing the company as many favours as you expect. All expenses put through the company (including salaries) reduce your company’s tax burden, meaning that the benefit you’re providing the company by not taking a salary is significantly smaller than you think.  As a general rule, it’s advised that you take 50% or less of the business’ net profits as compensation and save the rest for reinvestment, but each company is different. As your accountants, we can help you to structure the salary you pay yourself to ensure that the greatest benefit is achieved for all concerned – thereby lessening any guilt you may feel for taking a salary before the business is “ready”.  The effect on morale One…

Comments Off on Salary Sacrifice: Why Founders Should Always Pay Themselves

Adapt or Suffer: How to Keep Your Business Afloat in a Changing Climate

“Taking bold action on climate change simply makes good business sense. It's also the right thing to do for people and the planet.” (Richard Branson) Climate change impacts the fundamentals of business operations. Rising heat affects productivity, floods and storms damage infrastructure, droughts disrupt supply chains, and new regulations increase compliance costs. Many leaders still believe their sector will be spared, but no industry is truly insulated. Just as one-third of startups fail because they never properly defined their target market, businesses that fail to assess climate risks may find their models undermined by forces beyond their control. The message is clear: failing to future-proof your business, will result in extremely hard times ahead. Start with the risks you’re facing The first step is to identify which climate risks could most directly affect your operations.  These can be physical (think floods, wildfires, and extreme temperatures), or transitional, such as regulatory changes and shifts in customer expectations.  According to the latest prediction models, South Africans can expect a hotter, more erratic climate with the country warming at about twice the global average. This means more very hot days that will hurt worker productivity and equipment reliability. On top of this, the country is also experiencing heavier downpours with increased flood damage. These damaging floods, such as those seen KwaZulu-Natal in April 2022 and the Western Cape in September 2023, will result in enormous insurance and economic losses and prolonged business disruption. Despite the flooding, the country is also not in the clear when it comes to water stress. The 2015–2018 Cape Town “Day Zero” drought was devastating for car wash businesses but a boon for borehole drillers. Day Zero may have been avoided, but there will be more droughts in the future. All of these issues can lead to stock and agriculture failures, infrastructure collapse and process interruptions. A lack of water, for example, creates cleaning and hygiene issues as well as lower staff productivity. Insurers in SA have been reporting increasing weather losses and rising catastrophe claims, which will continue to feed through to higher premiums and excesses and tougher underwriting in high-risk zones. You can only build a realistic plan once you understand exactly where your exposures lie. Build a climate profile for your business Once you understand the risk categories, create a profile detailing how they intersect with your company. You need to consider your location, your sector, your suppliers and your employees. A warehouse on a floodplain carries different risks from a retail store in a heat-stressed city. Manufacturing firms may depend on inputs that are vulnerable to drought or fire, and employees may struggle in adverse weather conditions. Many exposures sit within the supply chain, where a small disruption upstream can ripple through global markets. For example, higher than usual temperatures may result in crops failing, or greater costs for HVAC and cold logistics services. Have you factored in these costs being passed on to your business?  This profile should be updated regularly, as conditions, regulations,…

Comments Off on Adapt or Suffer: How to Keep Your Business Afloat in a Changing Climate

Management Accounts: A Strategic Tool for Business Success

“Accounting is the language of business.” (Warren Buffett) Increasingly, banks and other organisations are requiring businesses to submit up-to-date management accounts when applying for finance. This is because these compact financial reports enable business analysis even when the latest annual financial statements are not yet available. Management accounts also offer owners and managers timely, accurate and actionable financial insights that facilitate performance evaluation, smart management decisions and informed planning – all of which can transform how your business operates and grows.  What are management accounts? Management accounts are a set of summarised financial reports. They’re similar to annual financial statements but they aren’t as formal, and they’re produced much more frequently – usually monthly or quarterly.  They’re all about providing relevant financial data for informed business decision-making. As such, there’s no fixed format. Instead, management accounts should summarise and combine the financial reports you need to make smarter decisions. These financial reports might include some or all of the following. What can be included in management accounts? Income Statement (Profit & Loss) Detailed breakdown of income and expenses Measures performance over a specific period Balance Sheet Provides a snapshot of the financial position (assets, liabilities, and equity) at a specific point in time Cash Flow Statement Tracks actual cash movements Monitors what funds are available, incoming, and required for outflows Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) Quick performance assessments Trend Analysis Comparisons with previous periods and industry standards Variance Analysis Compares actual figures against budgets Other Debtors and creditors reports Payroll reports VAT and PAYE reconciliations Departmental reports for individual business unit performance   What can management accounts tell you? Performance Comparisons with previous years and industry standards Results analysed against KPIs Are strategies working? Early signs of negative trends Areas for improvement Cash Flow Early warnings of cash flow pressures Avoid cash flow problems Profitability Where is profitability strongest? Where to boost margins or reduce costs New business opportunities Operational Insights Top-performing products and customers Guide decisions about pricing, resources, and reward strategies Control Monitor overheads and stock levels Early detection of irregularities / fraud Risk management and governance Accurate, current records reduce audit fees and enable smarter tax planning Planning & Decision-Making Up-to-date financial reports that support smart strategic decisions The right set of management accounts can do more than record numbers – it can provide meaningful insights that help your business to perform better, plan ahead, and stay in control. We can tailor your management accounts  We tailor management accounts to your company’s exact reporting requirements, turning your financial data into actionable insights that can not only improve operational efficiency but also create a solid foundation for sustainable growth in your company. Think your business could benefit from a management accounts overhaul? Drop us a line! Disclaimer: The information provided herein should not be used or relied on as professional advice. No liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions nor for any loss or damage arising from reliance upon any information herein. Always contact us for specific and…

Comments Off on Management Accounts: A Strategic Tool for Business Success

Your Tax Deadlines for October 2025

07 October – Monthly Pay-As-You-Earn (PAYE) submissions and payments 20 October – End of Filing Season 2025 for Individual taxpayers 24 October – Value-Added Tax (VAT) manual submissions and payments 30 October – Excise Duty payments 31 October – VAT electronic submissions and payments and CIT Provisional Tax payments. Disclaimer: The information provided herein should not be used or relied on as professional advice. No liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions nor for any loss or damage arising from reliance upon any information herein. Always contact us for specific and detailed advice. © AccountingDotNews

Comments Off on Your Tax Deadlines for October 2025

Wills Month 2025: How to Have the Last Word

“Life is short, there is no time to leave important words unsaid.” (Paulo Coelho, Author) Having “the last word” is defined as having “the final decision-making power or authority in a matter.” South Africans have the right to have the last word about how their assets are disposed after their passing – but exercising this right requires a well-drawn and up-to-date will … a job that is best left to the professionals. Sadly, estimates suggest that as many as 70% of South Africans do not have a will. This means that someone else – perhaps, even, a total stranger – will get the last word on important decisions that significantly impact those who are left behind. If you die without leaving a valid will… Unhappiness and conflict among family members are common when there are no clear instructions on how to distribute your assets. Your belongings and assets will instead be distributed according to our laws of intestate succession. This means that you have lost your opportunity to decide who will inherit what from you. For example, your spouse may inherit a lot less than you wanted them to. The Master of the High Court will appoint an executor without knowing your wishes in this regard. This takes a long time, may involve extra and unnecessary costs, and possibly leaves your family to deal with a stranger who has no insight into your family situation or your wishes. This only adds to your family’s burden in the aftermath of your death. If you have minor children, the assets you leave behind will be sold and the proceeds will be held by the Guardian’s Fund until they are 18. Not only are there concerns over the Fund’s resilience to cyber threats and general administration, but its generic investment strategy is unlikely to achieve anything more than minimal capital growth. Your children’s guardians will also have to justify withdrawal requests to fund expenses (living, educational, medical etc.) – a slow and bureaucratic process. How to draw up a will? While it is legally possible to draft your own will, we strongly urge you to consult us when preparing this vitally important document. Drafting your own will is fraught with danger. Not only may it be invalid, but it might result in your last wishes not being fully honoured. What’s more, there’s a strong chance of it risking estate planning and tax inefficiency. We can provide reliable advice regarding problems which may arise regarding your will. And we have the necessary knowledge and expertise to ensure that your will is valid and complies with your wishes. Got any questions about estate planning? Ask us! Disclaimer: The information provided herein should not be used or relied on as professional advice. No liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions nor for any loss or damage arising from reliance upon any information herein. Always contact us for specific and detailed advice. © AccountingDotNews

Comments Off on Wills Month 2025: How to Have the Last Word

What’s the Difference Between a Bookkeeper and an Accountant?

“Finance is effectively the rhythm section of a company. It creates the company cadence that every company needs.” (John Baule, CPA and ecommerce expert) You can’t grow a business without a clear handle on your numbers. But too many business owners still confuse bookkeeping and accounting. These roles do have some overlap, but they serve different purposes. Assigning tasks to the correct person means better insights, sharper decisions, and a clearer path to growth. In a nutshell A bookkeeper keeps your financial records accurate and current. They handle the day-to-day recording of transactions, issuing of invoices, reconciling of bank statements, and making sure everything lines up. Think of it as the hygiene of your business finances. If it’s not being done regularly, problems start to build up fast. Bookkeeping doesn’t involve complex analysis or forecasting – but without it, the numbers your accountant sees will likely be wrong, or missing entirely. An accountant works further up the chain. Using the data that bookkeepers maintain, they prepare financial statements, analyse performance, give tax advice, and help shape business strategy. A good accountant doesn’t just analyse tax obligations, they help you understand your business and shape strategy for the future. That could mean spotting ways to reduce your tax bill, warning you about cash flow risks, or helping you build the case for a bank loan or investment round. Why does this distinction matter? With margins so tight nowadays, many people are asking their bookkeeper to perform both roles. This may seem to make sense, but it’s like asking your mechanic to design your next car. When the work gets confused, important details fall through the cracks – and that confusion grows as your business does. When they’re starting out, many smaller businesses get by with only a bookkeeper. At that stage, the financial picture is usually simple: a few suppliers, a few clients, not too many moving parts. But as the numbers grow, so does the complexity. You start needing help with budgeting, forecasting, asset management, and tax structuring. That’s when your business begins to need financial insight. Hiring an accountant doesn’t mean replacing your bookkeeper. It means building a team where each role is clear, and the right questions get asked at the right time. To do that, businesses need to stop seeing the bookkeeper as a junior accountant, or the accountant as an expensive version of a data clerk. Bound by the law There’s also a regulatory edge. Bookkeepers aren’t usually qualified to give tax advice or submit signed-off financials. If they do, and it’s wrong, you can be held liable. Accountants, on the other hand, carry the qualifications, experience, registrations and liability cover to advise on matters that can make or break your year-end. Getting that wrong can mean more than just fines and tax penalties, it can lead to missed deductions, misreported income, or worse. So, how do you decide who you need? Start by asking what you’re struggling with. If you’re drowning in paperwork, if supplier…

Comments Off on What’s the Difference Between a Bookkeeper and an Accountant?

Top Complaints Against SARS – And How We Help You Avoid Them

“He said that there was death and taxes, and taxes were worse, because at least death didn’t happen to you every year.” (Terry Pratchett) In SARS jargon, a ‘systemic issue’ is the underlying cause of a complaint that affects many taxpayers. These systemic issues may have to do with the way SARS systems function, how SARS drafts and implements policies or procedures, or even how it applies or disregards legislative provisions. Over the years, collaboration between the Office of the Tax Ombud (OTO) and SARS has reduced the number of systemic issues from more than 20 to seven. 7 systemic issues at SARS Delays in payment of refunds. Non-adherence to dispute resolution timeframes and rules under the Tax Administration Act (TAA). Undue hardship caused to taxpayers resulting from the way the Tax Compliance System (TCS) is designed. Failure to respond to requests for deferred payment arrangements within the prescribed turnaround time (21 days). Failure to respond to requests for a compromise within the prescribed turnaround time (90 days). Failure to respond to requests for a suspension of payment within the prescribed turnaround time (30 business days). Repeat verification for reduced assessments or for cases with the same risk and supporting documentation. How do systemic issues affect my business? Delayed refunds – especially VAT and diesel refunds – create massive cash flow challenges for companies, inhibiting growth and increasing the risk of business failure, especially for small businesses. Similarly, the design of SARS’ Tax Compliance System has resulted in companies losing contracts or tenders, or not being paid by corporate or government clients. This is because the system may flag a company as non-compliant where payment arrangements or suspension of debt agreements are in place. The system also reflects non-compliance for immaterial transgressions – including, for example, minimal debt amounts such as R1 and outstanding returns or payments for which arrangements have been made with SARS; or even fraud committed by SARS or ex-SARS officials. SARS’ non-adherence to dispute resolution timeframes and rules, and its delayed response to requests for payment arrangements, not only infringe on taxpayer’s rights, but also expose taxpayers to prolonged periods of ‘non-compliance’, despite their efforts to become compliant. Repeat verification cases cost time and money, adding a further unnecessary compliance burden on taxpayers. How we protect your interests While these systemic issues are being addressed by SARS, and monitored by the Tax Ombud, SARS suggests that taxpayers rely on the expertise of a registered tax practitioner. As your SARS-registered tax practitioner, we protect your interests and rights as a taxpayer in the following ways: Careful compliance and excellent record-keeping are always the first line of defence when dealing with SARS – we help ensure that you have the correct processes in place to ensure both. Our team of tax experts can professionally and correctly represent your business in the event of a tax dispute with SARS. We understand the service levels and time frames outlined in the TAA and SARS’ Service Charter and we are experienced…

Comments Off on Top Complaints Against SARS – And How We Help You Avoid Them

The Emotion-Based Money Decisions That Could Be Costing Your Business

“Financial planning causes a struggle between the rational brain and the emotional brain.” (Michael C. Finke, author of Money Management Skills)  You didn’t start your business to become a psychologist. But understanding the way emotions creep into your decisions could be the difference between plain sailing and struggling to stay afloat. Entrepreneurs are often painted as rational, profit-driven operators. In reality, money decisions are rarely made in a vacuum. Stress, fear, pride and even guilt, can all shape your thinking. The danger is, emotional decision-making doesn’t feel emotional. It feels instinctive, even responsible. But it can erode cash flow, distort pricing, or block growth, while giving you the false sense that you’re doing the right thing. The goal isn’t to ignore emotion. It’s to recognise where it’s hiding, so it doesn’t quietly sabotage your progress. “We set prices by gut feeling” Pricing should be based on data, not personal sentiment. In reality, neither owners nor customers inherently “know” what a fair price is. Research on psychological pricing shows that people usually assess value by comparison, not by intuition. When owners set prices based on how they feel instead of cost and market demand, they often undercharge. In short, emotional pricing leaves money on the table. The fix is to base prices on costs, competition, and demonstrated customer value instead of just a hunch. “Raising prices will make customers revolt” Price increases make many owners nervous, but fear is often worse than reality. A report from the U.S. Small Business Development Centre found that, when questioned, owners commonly say “I’m afraid I will lose customers if prices go up.” In practice, customer loyalty depends on quality and service, not just on getting the lowest price. Studies note that some customers might switch if you raise prices – but most (or all) will stick around if value remains high. In fact, a modest price hike often increases profit more than it costs in lost sales. Raising prices at the right time (e.g. after adding value or amid industry-wide inflation) is usually safe and can strengthen a business. “Our sales will meet this forecast” Owners tend to be optimistic about sales, but wishful thinking skews forecasts. Sales teams frequently rely on “gut” when updating projections, which breeds overconfidence. In other words, they estimate sales based on hope rather than hard signals. Behavioural finance experts call overconfidence bias “one of the most common issues in financial decision-making”. The result is frequent forecasting errors: too much inventory, staffing overruns, or cash shortfalls when sales fall short. To counter this, successful owners use data and regular feedback loops. They treat projections as hypotheses to test, not guaranteed outcomes. “I can do the books myself” Many business owners feel they must handle all finances alone, but that can backfire. It’s common to believe nobody knows your business “as well as you do,” and thus avoid outside help. This reluctance to delegate leaves owners overworked and stressed. Bringing in an accountant frees up time and adds expertise. Trusting…

Comments Off on The Emotion-Based Money Decisions That Could Be Costing Your Business

Your Tax Deadlines for September 2025

05 September – PAYE submissions and payments 25 September – VAT manual submissions and payments 29 September – Excise duty payments 30 September – VAT electronic submissions and payments, CIT Provisional Tax payments and PIT top-up Provisional Tax payment where applicable. Disclaimer: The information provided herein should not be used or relied on as professional advice. No liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions nor for any loss or damage arising from reliance upon any information herein. Always contact us for specific and detailed advice. © AccountingDotNews

Comments Off on Your Tax Deadlines for September 2025

Busting the Accounting Myths That are Burying Your Business

“People with limited understanding of business think that it’s all about making profits. But those who actually run businesses know that it’s all about managing cash flows.” (Cedric Chin, entrepreneur and management training consultant) Most business owners aren’t careless with money. They obsess over profit margins and expenses, and carefully analyse their bank balances. Over time, however, many people fall for accounting myths that sound like common sense. These myths crop up in meetings, tax chats, and casual conversations – and they stick. The problem is, some of these ideas distort the way you see your business. They can make you feel more profitable than you are, hide looming cash problems, or cause you to delay decisions until it’s too late.  Busting these myths won’t only sharpen your numbers – it might unlock the growth that’s been out of reach for too long. “Depreciation is just a paper loss” Depreciation is often described as being a “non-cash” expense, which leads some to think it’s not a real cost. But depreciation is very real. It reflects the wear and tear on your assets, equipment, vehicles, and even your office fittings. (Buildings tend to be an exception to this rule.) Like it or not, that slow erosion of value is going to affect your business eventually. Ignoring depreciation can leave you thinking you’re operating at higher margins than you really are. This, in turn, can lead to decisions (like expanding your business or cutting prices) that the business may actually not be in a position to make. It’s therefore essential to treat depreciation as part of your real cost base, because sooner or later, you’ll need to replace what’s wearing out. “Profit equals cash” Because this one feels so intuitive, it can trip up even the most astute entrepreneurs. Your business is profitable, so there should be money in the bank. The thing is, profit is an accounting measure while cash is what you actually have on hand. And the two often travel on different timelines. Unpaid invoices, stock that hasn’t moved, loan repayments … these can all put pressure on your cash position, even when your income statement says you’re in the clear. Profit without cash flow can land you in hot water fast. It’s often the reason otherwise “profitable” businesses go under. Don’t get caught only watching your bottom line. “If there’s money in the account, we’re doing fine” That moment of checking the bank balance and breathing a sigh of relief? We all do it. But a healthy balance today doesn’t mean all your bills are paid, or that your tax obligations aren’t just around the corner. It certainly doesn’t mean you can afford that new delivery van without checking the books first. A snapshot of your bank balance is just that – a snapshot. It says nothing about what's coming in, what’s going out, and what’s already spoken for. Operating without a cash flow forecast is like driving with your eyes locked on the rear-view mirror. “Tax is…

Comments Off on Busting the Accounting Myths That are Burying Your Business
Read more about the article SARS’ Crypto Crackdown Intensifies with Dedicated Crypto Unit
a bitcoin coin is clamped in a vice

SARS’ Crypto Crackdown Intensifies with Dedicated Crypto Unit

“Transactions or speculation in crypto assets are subject to the general principles of South African tax law and taxed accordingly.” (SARS) A staggering 5.8 million South Africans hold a crypto asset, with Southern Africa boasting the largest uptake of Bitcoin in the world.  SARS has not failed to notice the phenomenal growth of various digital currencies and crypto assets and is now dedicating substantial resources to ensure that crypto assets and trades are declared on taxpayers’ tax returns. How are crypto assets taxed?  While crypto assets are not considered legal tender, transactions or speculation in crypto assets are subject to the general principles of South African tax law.  Normal income tax rules apply and affected taxpayers need to declare crypto assets’ income, and gains or losses in the tax year in which it is received or accrued. Income from crypto assets transactions can be taxed under “gross income” or it can be seen as a capital gain (and subject to CGT). Whether an accrual or receipt is revenue or capital in nature is tested under existing tax law, of which there is plenty. Taxpayers are also entitled to claim expenses associated with crypto assets accruals or receipts, provided such expenditure is incurred in the production of the taxpayer’s income and for purposes of trade. Base cost adjustments can also be made according to the CGT rules. Gains or losses in relation to crypto assets can broadly be categorised with reference to three types of scenarios, each of which potentially gives rise to distinct tax consequences: Crypto assets can be acquired through so called “mining” – the verification of transactions in a computer-generated public ledger through the solving of complex computer algorithms. Investors can exchange local currency for a crypto asset (or vice versa) through crypto asset exchanges (which are essentially markets for crypto assets) or through private transactions. Goods or services can be exchanged for crypto assets. Such transactions are regarded as barter transactions and the normal barter transaction tax rules apply. The onus is on taxpayers to declare all income and gains related to crypto assets. Stricter enforcement  SARS has intensified its focus on crypto asset trading recently, significantly improving its capacity to detect crypto activity and non-compliance. They have done this by: Making greater use of advanced analytics, artificial intelligence, machine learning and algorithms Entering into data-sharing arrangements with crypto exchanges Establishing a dedicated Crypto Asset Unit Since last year, SARS has been sending Audit and Request for Relevant Material Notices to taxpayers who have traded, invested or even used crypto assets for purchases. This is possible because SARS now has access to trading data directly from crypto exchanges. This includes information on taxpayers who have traded in crypto assets but may not have disclosed these activities on their tax returns. In addition, through multilateral agreements, SARS is exchanging information with other tax authorities globally, in line with global tax enforcement trends. What’s more, the establishment of SARS’ specialised Crypto Asset Unit is a clear indication that crypto…

Comments Off on SARS’ Crypto Crackdown Intensifies with Dedicated Crypto Unit
Read more about the article 6 Ways to Maximise Your Revenue Through Smarter Networking
Full length motivated millennial african american colleagues employees managers communicating in small groups, enjoying break time in modern office room, networking enjoying teambuilding activity

6 Ways to Maximise Your Revenue Through Smarter Networking

“Networking is not about just connecting people. It’s about connecting people with people, people with ideas, and people with opportunities.” (Michele Jennae, business coach and author) Most entrepreneurs know they should be building a network, but not many know this should be a core business strategy. Building and maintaining the right relationships can lead to improved contracts, revenue gains and business growth, provided you know how to use them. The good news is, we aren’t asking you to go out and become a natural networker. You just need to put a few key habits in place and start treating networking as a long-term business investment. Here are six common misconceptions that, when remedied, can help turn handshakes into business growth. 1. “I go to networking events, but I never see any benefits” This is a common complaint, but it’s seldom the event that’s at fault. Many people see no benefits because they approach networking events passively. They show up, have a few chats, hand out business cards, and hope someone follows up. That’s not networking. That’s exposure.  To make events pay off, you need to arrive with a goal, and steer conversations intentionally. Then afterwards, you need to follow up promptly. This doesn’t mean that you need to sell to everyone in the room. Often it’s far better to listen to people’s needs and identify just where you might be useful. A short, personalised follow-up message, the next day could then unlock a real business opportunity. 2. “I simply don’t have time to network” Networking doesn’t have to be a drain on your time. If you’re chatting to the right people, just one or two strategic conversations a week might be all you need. The key is to start thinking of networking as business development – everyone has time for that. If you can carve out 30 minutes a week to check in with past contacts, make introductions for others, or send a useful article to someone in your network, you’re already doing more than most. The results won’t be instant, but it all adds up. 3. “My industry doesn’t work like that” Whether you're in logistics, consulting, construction, or retail, your next deal could still come from a friendly introduction. The channel might differ, but the principle is the same. People do business with people they trust. That old saying, “it’s not what you know, but who you know” has never been truer. No industry is too technical or regulated for word-of-mouth not to matter. 4. “I’ve already got a good network” Knowing people isn’t enough. That network of people needs to be activated. This means that you need to make yourself visible, helpful, and memorable. Stay top-of-mind by making introductions, sharing your insights, or simply checking in without hoping to make a sale. The goal isn’t to extract value, it’s to keep yourself fresh in their minds so you’re the first person they think of when they do need something. And remember: relationships decay over time, so make…

Comments Off on 6 Ways to Maximise Your Revenue Through Smarter Networking

Company Directors Take Note: Complying with Your Duties is a Big Deal

“A director must… act in good faith and for a proper purpose; in the best interests of the company; and with the degree of care, skill and diligence that may reasonably be expected…” (Companies Act of 2008) The first Guideline for 2025 issued by the CIPC (Companies and Intellectual Property Commission) aimed to “sensitise directors on the consequences for non-compliance with their duties to a company.” Here’s a quick overview of these duties and what could happen if directors don’t comply.  What are the duties of directors? A director must exercise the powers and perform the functions of a director:  In good faith and for proper purpose In the best interest of the company Without using the position to knowingly cause harm to the company With the degree of care, skill and diligence that may reasonably be expected of him/her This means that directors should carefully understand the provisions of the Companies Act that relate to the governance of companies, including, but not limited to: Section 75: Directors’ personal financial interests Section 76: Standards of directors’ conduct Section 77: Liability of directors and prescribed officers Section 78: Indemnification and directors' insurance Section 213: Breach of confidence Section 214: False statements, reckless conduct and non-compliance Section 215: Hindering administration of the Act Recent amendments In the last few months, amendments to the Companies Act have introduced significant new changes that have further increased the responsibility and risk that directors shoulder. Focusing on accountability, transparency, and alignment with international governance standards, the changes include stricter fiduciary duties to prioritise company and stakeholder interests, mandatory transparency in director appointments, and new director criteria disqualifying individuals with a record of insolvency, criminal convictions, or prior misconduct from serving as directors. Consequences of non-compliance: Civil liability The Companies Act emphasises that a director of a company in his/her personal capacity may incur civil liability for loss or damage incurred by the company due to the director: Acting on behalf of the company without the necessary authority Trading recklessly or under insolvent circumstances Being a party to an act or omission by a company calculated to defraud Being a party to false and misleading financial statements Being a party to a prospectus or written statement that contains an untrue statement Failing to vote against an unauthorised or inconsistent provision of the Companies Act during a meeting or decision-making process In a recent High Court case, the court found that directors of a property fund had grossly abused their positions and engaged in reckless conduct that severely harmed the company. The judge declared these directors delinquent and ordered them to compensate the fund for losses incurred due to their actions, including the costs of forensic investigation and reputational harm. A delinquency declaration can also result in a ban from holding directorships for a specified period or even permanently, as it did for SAA’s Chairperson Duduzile Myeni.  Consequences of non-compliance: Criminal liability A director may be also held criminally liable in his/her personal capacity in terms of various…

Comments Off on Company Directors Take Note: Complying with Your Duties is a Big Deal
Read more about the article Your Tax Deadlines for August 2025
Clock with"Taxes" folder on busy office desk.

Your Tax Deadlines for August 2025

07 August – PAYE submissions and payments 25 August – VAT manual submissions and payments 28 August – Excise duty payments 29 August – VAT electronic submissions and payments, Corporate Income Tax Provisional payments where applicable, and Personal Income Tax Provisional payments.  Disclaimer: The information provided herein should not be used or relied on as professional advice. No liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions nor for any loss or damage arising from reliance upon any information herein. Always contact us for specific and detailed advice. © AccountingDotNews

Comments Off on Your Tax Deadlines for August 2025

The 2025 Tax Filing Season Opens on 7 July

“My sincere gratitude goes to the compliant taxpayers and traders who have continuously played their part in building our country. Ndza khenza.” (SARS Commissioner, Edward Kieswetter) Tax Filing Season 2025 officially opens on 7 July this year. This covers the 2024/2025 year of assessment: the period between 1 March 2024 and 28 February 2025. During filing season, taxpayers complete and submit their tax returns, declaring their income and deductions to allow SARS to determine their final tax liability for the period under assessment.  This year, for the first time, the majority of non-provisional taxpayers will be automatically assessed. Dates to diarise Auto assessed? Here’s what to do… If you have been auto assessed, you will receive notification by SMS and/or email directly from SARS after 7 July. (Be sure to check with us that the notification you receive is legitimate!) Access your auto assessed income tax return through any of SARS’ channels, such as the SARS MobiApp or SARS eFiling, to review and verify the completeness and accuracy of the information it contains. (Be sure to check with us if you are uncertain of any aspect of the auto assessment!)  If you are satisfied with the auto assessment, and there is money owing to SARS, it must be paid to SARS by the stipulated date. If there is a refund due to you, it will be paid directly to your bank account within 3 working days, if your details with SARS are correct.  If there is missing and/or inaccurate information on the auto assessed tax return, pertaining to either income or expenses which may affect the outcome of the auto assessment, it must be declared to SARS by submitting a ITR12 tax return by the 20 October 2025 deadline. Not auto assessed? Here’s what to do… Non-provisional taxpayers who are not auto assessed can start filing their tax returns from 21July 2025 until 20 October 2025.  Provisional taxpayers (certain individual taxpayers and all companies) as well as trusts can start filing returns from 21July 2025 until 19 January 2026. Top tips to streamline your tax filing season  Verify all SARS communications received to protect yourself from scams.    Check that all taxpayer and banking details are correct and updated with SARS to facilitate refunds and prevent identity theft and fraud.  Prepare all required documentation early to avoid last-minute delays and to expedite a possible SARS verification or audit.  Claim every tax rebate available to you to avoid paying more tax than required.  Ensure that your tax return submissions comply with current regulations. Be certain to meet the submission deadlines to avoid penalties.   Fortunately, our team of seasoned tax professionals is ready to ensure you tick all these boxes. Let’s make this filing season an easy one!    Disclaimer: The information provided herein should not be used or relied on as professional advice. No liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions nor for any loss or damage arising from reliance upon any information herein. Always contact us for specific and…

Comments Off on The 2025 Tax Filing Season Opens on 7 July

Don’t Let Your Best Ideas Go: Why You Must Protect Your Intellectual Capital

“Too many businesses only realise the value of intellectual capital when a key person leaves – or a competitor copies what they’ve built.” (Alicia Mendes, author of Futureproofing Through People) In the rush to raise capital, improve profitability or streamline efficiency, business owners often miss what truly drives their success: the knowledge, relationships, and systems that power everything behind the scenes. Whether you're a one-person start-up or a growing enterprise, your intellectual capital is the secret key to your future triumphs. It is therefore vital that this intangible resource is protected before it vanishes. Doing so could be the most profitable decision you ever make. Understanding intellectual capital Intellectual capital is grouped into three categories: human capital (skills and experience), structural capital (systems, intellectual property (IP), databases) and relational capital (customer relationships, brand reputation and partnerships).  A recent study by Ocean Tomo revealed that intellectual capital now constitutes approximately 90% of the S&P 500's market value – a significant increase from 68% in 1995. That includes patents, know-how, trade secrets, brand equity, and team knowledge. With numbers like this, it’s absolutely essential that you audit your intellectual capital just as you would your balance sheet. What processes are unique to you? Who on your team holds key relationships or institutional memory? Are your best ideas captured anywhere, or do they leave when someone resigns? Culture and contracts You have to understand that your people are the carriers of knowledge. Their experience, relationships with clients, and systems know-how can be invaluable. Unless you plan carefully, when someone leaves they often take that intellectual capital with them.  Retention doesn’t just come from compensation. It comes from fostering a culture of recognition, curiosity, and inclusion. The 2023 Gallup “State of the Global Workplace Report” stated that, “employees who have had opportunities to learn and grow are 2.9 times more likely to be engaged.” It is therefore essential that you ask your accountant to make space in your budget for learning programs, and other leadership developing initiatives.  But culture alone isn’t enough. It’s important to also back up your culture with a legal framework that protects you. This includes NDAs (non-disclosure agreements), IP assignment agreements, and clear clauses in employment contracts covering confidentiality and ownership of work. Capture knowledge before it walks Most businesses operate through a web of undocumented processes from verbal know-how, to “we’ve always done it this way” workflows. That’s risky. Developing internal playbooks, knowledge bases, and SOPs (standard operating procedures) is one of the most effective ways to turn intellectual capital into something transferrable and scalable. Use tools like Notion, Confluence, or even simple shared drives to document repeatable knowledge. Then embed this into your onboarding and training cycles. Nurture innovation and learning Intellectual capital isn’t static. Like any asset, it can appreciate or depreciate. One of the best ways to nurture it is by creating space for learning, experimentation, and cross-pollination of ideas.  Encourage teams to attend industry events, run internal hackathons, and allocate budget to learning and development.…

Comments Off on Don’t Let Your Best Ideas Go: Why You Must Protect Your Intellectual Capital

How Funding Budget 3.0 Will Impact You: Project AmaBillions

“We accept the responsibility to achieve the 2025/26 revenue estimate presented by the Finance Minister Mr Enoch Godongwana.” (SARS Commissioner Edward Kieswetter) Removing the contentious proposed VAT increases from Budget 3.0 led to a shortfall in revenue that necessitated new revenue sources.  One of these is the inflation-linked fuel levy increases of 16c for petrol and 15c for diesel, which became effective on 4 June and will impact all individuals and entities in the country. Another alternative revenue source is going to come from SARS’ upping its collection of outstanding tax debt – with Treasury expecting an additional R20 billion to R50 billion per year from intensified debt collection efforts. The tax measures contained in Budget 3.0 will raise an additional R18bn in 2025/26. A further R20bn in as-yet-unknown tax measures are postponed to Budget 2026 – unless SARS collects an extra R35bn in outstanding taxes.  SARS has accepted the challenge and Budget 3.0 allocated a further R4 billion to SARS to fund the debt recovery. (In addition to the R3.5bn previously allocated to the cause.) ‘Project AmaBillions’? In what the media refers to as “Project AmaBillions” and what SARS calls its “compliance programme”, an intensified effort will be made to collect a greater slice of the estimated R800 billion in unpaid taxes – the so-called “tax gap”.  SARS reported that just over R400 billion of the tax gap consists of undisputed uncollected debt. The rest is made up of a further R100 billion in debt currently under dispute, more than 54 million returns outstanding dating back several years, and 156,000 South Africans with substantial economic activity who are not registered taxpayers, or are not filing their tax returns. SARS says that it will focus on the undisputed debt, while accelerating work on collecting all debt by dutifully implementing its compliance programme.  In the last financial year SARS recruited and trained more than 800 new employees to collect debt, mainly via telephone calls and legal instruments. These efforts, says SARS, must result in a minimum collection of R20 billion. To meet its revised revenue estimate this year, SARS is: Closing the tax gap, with a focus on undisputed debt.  Broadening the tax base, targeting hard-to-tax sectors in the informal economy, particularly small enterprises and self-employed individuals. Using advanced data analytics and artificial intelligence to detect tax-compliance risks and improve overall compliance rates.  Combating the illicit economy.  How does it affect me?  As SARS significantly steps up its revenue collection efforts, those eligible to pay tax – whether registered taxpayers or not – can expect less lenience and more SARS queries, verifications, audits and collection efforts.  In fact, the South African Institute of Chartered Accountants (SAICA) has been quoted in the media warning that the pressure on SARS to collect significantly more tax this year may result in “heavy-handedness” by SARS in its treatment of taxpayers. SARS confirms that it upholds the rights of taxpayers to exercise their rights in law, which include among others, asking for payments to be deferred or…

Comments Off on How Funding Budget 3.0 Will Impact You: Project AmaBillions
Read more about the article Business Hack: How to Better Define Your Target Market
Customer research for marketing, study user behavior or analyze target group for advertising and marketing concept, businessman looking at big magnifier with customer group to see data hyper realistic --ar 16:9 --v 6.1 Job ID: f6049751-2980-4d6f-8aec-aad6797e0926

Business Hack: How to Better Define Your Target Market

“Defining your target market is about understanding motivations, challenges, and goals. Without this, your messaging falls flat and your marketing budget burns fast." (Elena Kwan, Founder of MarketLens Consulting) Fundamentally, businesses start because business owners believe they see a gap and aim to fill it. Their target market is built into the essence of the business. And yet, statistics show that at least one third of those business owners were wrong all along. Many entrepreneurs think their product or service is for “everyone”, but trying to serve everyone usually means you end up serving no one well. Identifying and refining your real audience is critical to creating effective marketing campaigns, building better products, and sustaining long-term growth. Here are five practical tips to help you better define and refine your target market. 1. Start with the problem you're solving As a business owner, the first thing you need to do is identify the specific problem your product or service addresses. Ask yourself: Who has this problem? Who is actively looking for a solution? The more precisely you can answer these questions, the closer you are to identifying your core market. Once you understand the problem, look at existing customer data or run surveys to determine the people most likely to benefit from your solution. Don’t make assumptions. Focus on the why behind their purchasing decisions. 2. Build a customer persona (and revisit it often) A customer persona is a semi-fictional profile of your ideal customer based on research, data, and interviews. Include details like age, job title, income, goals, frustrations, preferred social media platforms, and buying behaviours. Giving your customer a name and a story will help you recall the important aspects of the person you are serving. But remember, a persona isn’t static. As you grow and collect more data, revisit and refine this profile. According to Sales For Startups, companies that use updated personas achieve 73% higher conversion rates than those that don’t. 3. Segment your audience Not every customer will have the same needs or behaviours – and just because someone falls into your target market, doesn’t mean they are automatically going to buy from you. Audience segmentation allows you to create more tailored marketing strategies. Start with basic segments like age, location, or purchase behaviour. Then drill down into psychographics such as values, attitudes, and lifestyle. For example, two people buying your eco-friendly cleaning product might do so for different reasons: one for health reasons, the other out of environmental concerns. Understanding these motivations enables you to craft more resonant messaging. 4. Use analytics to refine your focus Data should drive your decisions. Use website analytics, social media insights, email open rates, and CRM (customer relationship management) data to understand who’s engaging with your content, who’s buying, and who isn’t. Look for patterns: Which landing pages convert best? Which demographic clicks through the most? Your accountant can help you lift accurate sales data for different periods. This can be used to track the success or failure of special…

Comments Off on Business Hack: How to Better Define Your Target Market
Read more about the article Your Tax Deadlines for July 2025
Tax Calculator with Red Button

Your Tax Deadlines for July 2025

07 July – Monthly PAYE submissions and payments 25 July – Value Added Tax (VAT) manual submissions and payments 30 July – Excise duty payments 31 July – VAT electronic submissions and payments, Corporate Income Tax (CIT) Provisional Tax payments where applicable. Disclaimer: The information provided herein should not be used or relied on as professional advice. No liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions nor for any loss or damage arising from reliance upon any information herein. Always contact us for specific and detailed advice. © AccountingDotNews

Comments Off on Your Tax Deadlines for July 2025
Read more about the article Tax Avoidance vs Tax Evasion: Toeing the Line
Written inscription tax evasion vs tax avoidance on a piece of paper.

Tax Avoidance vs Tax Evasion: Toeing the Line

"The difference between tax avoidance and tax evasion is the thickness of a prison wall." (Denis Healey, former UK Chancellor of the Exchequer) The line between tax avoidance and tax evasion can sometimes appear blurry, especially in complex transactions or fierce tax planning strategies. The comparison below is a good starting point: What is tax avoidance? Tax avoidance refers to legal arrangements or transactions designed to reduce or eliminate tax liability, without breaking the law. Examples of tax avoidance include: Moving a company into a special economic zone for the sole reason of achieving a lower corporate income tax rate. Timing the sale of capital assets to control the timing of capital gains and losses. Getting your company to pay for a motor vehicle or other expenditure as it may, depending on the circumstances, be taxed at a lower rate.  Placing a large amount of your income into a retirement fund to obtain the highest deduction possible. Investing in tax-free savings accounts (this applies to individuals only). Often termed “permissible tax planning”, tax avoidance is legal and accepted. However, when tax avoidance becomes overly aggressive or artificial (i.e., lacking commercial substance), it may cross into what tax authorities consider “impermissible” or “abusive” tax avoidance. This, while not necessarily criminal, may be challenged under anti-avoidance rules such as the General Anti-Avoidance Rule (GAAR). South Africa employs GAAR to counteract tax avoidance strategies that exploit loopholes. These rules allow tax authorities to disregard or re-characterise transactions that have the primary purpose of avoiding tax. What is tax evasion? Tax evasion is characterised as the illegal act of deliberately and intentionally avoiding paying taxes, either by avoiding paying tax entirely, or by illegally reducing or deferring taxes payable. It can involve hiding or ignoring one's tax liability by making false representations or statements, or hiding income or information that would otherwise be subject to taxation. Examples of tax evasion include: Failing to file required tax returns  Making false statements on tax returns  Failing to declare income or deliberately underreporting income Claiming personal expenses as business expenses Over-declaring expenses, which may include falsifying invoices Using multiple entities without legitimate business purpose Moving money through multiple accounts to obscure its source SARS uses data-driven insights, self-learning computers, and artificial intelligence to combat tax evasion, and is empowered to conduct criminal investigations into tax offences and work with the criminal justice system to prosecute offenders. Tax evasion can result in severe penalties of up to 200% of the shortfall in tax, plus interest, and even jail sentences of five years or more. Best practices for legal tax avoidance Stay updated with ever-changing tax legislation to make informed decisions. Structure your business operations or transactions in a manner that legally minimises taxes – for example, operating as a sole proprietorship or a private company have different tax implications.    Engage in permissible tax planning by adhering to all tax laws and regulations, and avoiding abusive tax schemes designed to exploit loopholes in the tax laws. Utilise all tax deductions, credits, exemptions…

Comments Off on Tax Avoidance vs Tax Evasion: Toeing the Line

5 Tips for Helping Your Employees Through a Crisis

“When people are financially invested, they want a return. When people are emotionally invested, they want to contribute.” (Simon Sinek) Employee engagement. It determines so much about the direction of a company, its staff productivity and how likely it is to succeed. According to a Gallup poll just 23% of South African employees are actively engaged, and the support offered by your company during difficult times is a key predictor of whether your employees are doing better or worse than that. Ignoring a personal crisis or mismanaging it can result in diminished trust, high turnover, and costly legal complications. On the other hand, getting it right can transform a tough moment into a team-building exercise that drives loyalty across your enterprise. Here are our five tips for handling an employee's crisis with care, compassion, and professionalism. 1.  Listen without judgement The first step in supporting someone through a crisis is simply to listen. Not all employees will be forthcoming, and many will fear repercussions or shame if they do share. By creating a psychologically safe environment where they feel heard and respected, you allow the conversation to unfold in a way that will allow you to help.Listening does not mean solving. Ask what they need. Avoid overpromising or reacting too quickly. This is their experience, not yours, and your job is to provide space for them to express it. 2.  Tailor your support to the individual There is no one-size-fits-all approach. While one employee might benefit from time off, another may prefer flexible hours or a change in responsibilities. Consider what reasonable accommodations can be made, in accordance with HR policies and employment laws. What’s important is that the support feels personal and meaningful, not generic or performative. You will likely want to speak to HR or, in a smaller business, ask for outside advice. 3.  Communicate clearly (and privately) When an employee’s going through emotional turmoil, one of the most challenging aspects is managing the line between transparency and confidentiality. While you may need to inform certain stakeholders about changes in workflow or responsibilities, the nature of an employee’s crisis should never be discussed openly or speculated about in the office. Establish clear, private channels of communication and check in regularly. Let the employee know what’s being shared and with whom – and always ask for their consent where appropriate. Trust is fragile and you need to protect it. 4.  Support your other employees too It’s not just the employee in crisis who needs help – often their direct manager, or co-workers will also be feeling overwhelmed, overworked or unsure how to proceed. Offering management training on crisis response, mental health first aid, and compassionate communication can improve outcomes for everyone involved.Managers are on the front line of employee wellbeing, and giving them the right tools helps avoid missteps that could escalate the situation. 5.  Make room in your budget for empathy There’s no denying that crisis support can come with financial implications, from offering extra leave to making…

Comments Off on 5 Tips for Helping Your Employees Through a Crisis

Youth Day: How Businesses Can Benefit from the ETI

“Trust the young people; trust this generation's innovation. They're making things, changing innovation every day.” (Jack Ma, Co-Founder Alibaba Group) South African businesses are always looking for ways to foster growth and innovation while still reducing costs.    One way to achieve both is to employ young people. Young workers bring unique advantages that can transform your organisation. What’s more, the government subsidises part of the employment costs for qualifying young employees through SARS’ Employment Tax Incentive or ETI.  What young employees can bring to your business Tech savvy: More comfortable with new technologies, young employees can accelerate digital adoption in your business. Fresh perspectives: Young employees often introduce innovative approaches and creative solutions. Adaptability: Young people tend to be more flexible and better equipped to respond to sudden changes and unexpected circumstances. Fast learning: Fresh out of formal education, young people often learn more readily and are eager to apply their skills. Energy and enthusiasm: The energy and optimism of younger workers can positively impact team dynamics and workplace morale. Future-proofing: Young employees help businesses keep up to date with technological developments, emerging trends and the millennial and Gen Z markets. How the ETI benefits local companies The ETI makes it more cost-effective for companies to employ young people and to harness all the benefits mentioned above. Essentially, this incentive subsidises part of your employment costs for qualifying young employees for two years. There is no limit to the number of qualifying employees that an employer can hire. The young employees’ wages are paid by the employer in full, and the ETI is claimed by reducing the employer’s monthly Pay-As-You-Earn (PAYE) liability by the calculated ETI amount. This creates immediate positive effects on your cash flow. It goes without saying that hiring more employees at a lower cost – and the boost of youthful energy they bring – will positively impact productivity and innovation in any company. Many South African businesses use the ETI to create a competitive advantage, build a talent pipeline for the future, and enhance their Corporate Social Responsibility credentials. How the ETI works   * Adapted from SARS  Common ETI pitfalls Claiming for non-qualifying employees Incorrectly calculating ETI amounts Failing to adjust claims after the 12-month threshold Not maintaining proper payroll records  Overlooking the ‘monthly remuneration’ definition and required adjustments. How professional assistance makes a difference The ETI offers significant benefits, but it also comes with considerable compliance requirements and potential penalties for incorrect implementation. Our team of experienced accountants and tax professionals stays up to date with the ever-changing regulations, uses professional systems to identify qualifying employees, accurately calculate claims, and keep proper records, and is ready to assist if any issues, compliance checks or audits arise.  In this way, we ensure your business can maximise the ETI benefits – and the benefits of having young employees - while minimising compliance risks. Speak to us if you need help taking advantage of the ETI. Disclaimer: The information provided herein should not be used or relied on as professional advice. No liability can…

Comments Off on Youth Day: How Businesses Can Benefit from the ETI
Read more about the article How to Untangle Your Personal and Business Finances
Unrecognizable woman holds receipts pencil uses laptop plans budget manages expenses calculates financial reports checks internet banking service poses at desktop with papers around. View from above

How to Untangle Your Personal and Business Finances

“Mixing personal and business finances might seem harmless, but it’s a costly mistake that can lead to tax headaches, legal risks, and financial chaos.” (Amanda Painter) Mixing personal and business finances is so easy, particularly at the beginning. The company needs something, but money hasn’t come in, so you extend a small loan. You pay yourself back, by paying for the groceries on the company card.  A recent report by the US Federal Reserve on economic wellbeing has revealed that 39% of small business owners use personal funds to cover business expenses. This creates unnecessary risk and could expose both parties to potential audits, bankruptcy and even criminal prosecution. So, how do you untangle personal and professional spending without creating more chaos? These are our five tips. 1.  Open a separate business bank account The first step is getting a separate bank account for your business. This small step already makes it so much simpler to keep all income, expenses, and taxes distinct from your personal finances – giving you clarity and protection in case of an audit. Once your account is open, ensure all business payments go in and out of it exclusively. Resist the temptation to make personal purchases on your business card even just once. 2.  Apply for a business credit card A business credit card can be a powerful tool to keep finances clean and establish credit history for your company. It allows you to track spending, earn business-relevant rewards, and build a credit score separate from your personal one. According to a 2022 Nav Small Business Survey, 45% of business owners didn’t even know they had a business credit score. This is a missed opportunity – strong business credit can help with financing, insurance, and vendor relationships down the line. 3.  Pay yourself a salary (or draw consistently) Many business owners pay themselves sporadically or in large lump sums, depending on how much is left over each month. This creates cash flow chaos and a personal dependence on the business that’s hard to manage. Instead, create a set payment structure, either paying yourself a salary or a set amount on certain dates. This structure will help you plan personally and track business performance more accurately. 4.  Use accounting software Manual spreadsheets can work in year one, but as soon as your business gains momentum, you’ll need robust tools. Software like QuickBooks, Xero, or Wave allows you to categorize expenses, reconcile accounts, and prepare for tax season with confidence.A study by Intuit QuickBooks showed that 69% of small business owners who used accounting software reported greater clarity over their finances and fewer tax-related errors. Automating your bookkeeping and syncing accounts ensures your records are always up to date and SARS-ready. 5. Work with a bookkeeper or accountant from the outset It’s tempting to wait until tax time or a cash flow crisis to call in a pro. But a good accountant is a strategic partner, not just a compliance necessity. They can help you optimise deductions, structure your…

Comments Off on How to Untangle Your Personal and Business Finances

Budget 3.0: VAT Increase Out, Fuel Levy Hikes In

Last month’s Budget 3.0 withdrew the contentious proposed VAT changes. This resulted in inflation-linked fuel levy increases of 16c for petrol and 15c for diesel, from 4 June. Other tax proposals from March’s Budget – including static personal tax thresholds, reduced transfer duties, and sin tax increases – remain unchanged. The tax measures contained in Budget 3.0 will raise an additional R18bn in 2025/26. A further R20bn in tax measures are postponed to Budget 2026 – unless SARS collects an extra R35bn in uncollected taxes, for which Budget 3.0 allocated an additional R4bn in funding. Disclaimer: The information provided herein should not be used or relied on as professional advice. No liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions nor for any loss or damage arising from reliance upon any information herein. Always contact us for specific and detailed advice. © AccountingDotNews

Comments Off on Budget 3.0: VAT Increase Out, Fuel Levy Hikes In

Your Tax Deadlines for June 2025

06 June – PAYE submissions and payments     25 June – VAT manual submissions and payments     27 June – Excise duty payments  30 June – VAT electronic submissions and payments, & CIT Provisional Tax payments where applicable. Disclaimer: The information provided herein should not be used or relied on as professional advice. No liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions nor for any loss or damage arising from reliance upon any information herein. Always contact us for specific and detailed advice. © AccountingDotNews

Comments Off on Your Tax Deadlines for June 2025

Mind The Tax Gap! Here’s How…

“In 2025/26, SARS will focus on addressing the tax gap to improve revenue collection.” (National Treasury Budget Review) With additional funding from National Treasury, SARS will now be better positioned than ever to collect the estimated R800 billion in unpaid taxes which SARS Commissioner Edward Kieswetter has identified as a better alternative than a VAT hike to balance the South African Budget.  Much of the estimated R800 billion in unpaid taxes consists of the so-called “tax gap” – the difference between how much tax is legally due to SARS and the amount that is actually paid on time. SARS has reported the following:  Just over R400 billion in undisputed uncollected debt Over R100 billion in debt currently under dispute More than 54 million outstanding returns dating back several years 156,000 South Africans with substantial economic activity who are not registered taxpayers, or are not filing their tax returns.  The remainder of the R800 billion unpaid taxes is made up by “aggressive tax planning” such as base erosion, transfer pricing, and other means of tax evasion, as well as unpaid excise duties, unpaid VAT, and illicit trade flows. Kieswetter said R2 billion of the additional R2.5 billion that SARS will receive for 2025/26 will be used for “a massive debt recovery programme”, while R500 million will be used to modernise SARS’ systems.    Given SARS’ enhanced capabilities and focus on collecting outstanding debt, our tax expertise will be crucial in ensuring you and your business maintain complete compliance and react immediately and correctly should your tax affairs become the subject of SARS’ scrutiny.  Tax compliance tick box  Maintaining compliance starts with:✔ Being registered for all applicable tax types within the stipulated time frames ✔ Making accurate declarations ✔ Filing returns and other required documentation on time ✔ Paying the correct amount of tax on time ✔ Promptly responding to SARS communications ✔ Paying penalties and interest for non-compliance, such as late submissions or under-declared income. How we can help you mind the tax gap   We can help you to comply with your specific tax obligations with up-to-date tax expertise and best practices.  We promptly and professionally respond to communications from SARS, such as notices of demand for unfiled returns, requests for information, or notifications of penalties levied. We take immediate and correct action following demands for outstanding tax debts. Taxpayers have ten business days after receiving a Final Demand to either pay, arrange deferral of payment or make a payment arrangement, file a suspension of payment with an objection, or enter into a compromise agreement. What’s more, our expertise and experience enable us to monitor that SARS is following the correct legal procedures. This ensures that your taxpayer rights are protected and preventing illegal collection measures such as unauthorised SARS withdrawals from bank accounts.  Bottom line SARS says it will be relentless in its efforts to collect the billions of rands in uncollected taxes, and that it is ready to act against those who wilfully and defiantly ignore their legal tax…

Comments Off on Mind The Tax Gap! Here’s How…

The 5 Cognitive Biases That Could Sink Your Business

“Too often we hold fast to the clichés of our forebears. We subject all facts to a prefabricated set of interpretations. We enjoy the comfort of opinion without the discomfort of thought.” (John F. Kennedy, former US president) Humans are creatures of habit. We form opinions and sets of actions that we use as shorthand for all future decisions. We become trapped in loops of our own making and fall prey to common human ways of thinking that may save time, but ultimately hurt us. In business, these sorts of cognitive biases can damage relationships, and lead companies down dangerous paths. The sad thing? Most of us don’t even realise they exist. Here are five cognitive biases that could sink your business if you’re not careful. 1.  Favouring evidence that backs our beliefs Back in the days of VHS, video rental behemoth Blockbuster was offered the opportunity to buy a start-up that distributed their videos by mail, and were building the infrastructure to stream videos online. Convinced that the video store model was the only way to go, the board rejected the opportunity to purchase Netflix and over the next few years Blockbuster went bankrupt. While it’s tempting to see this as a sign of foolishness, the reality is that all of us are prone to undervaluing data which contradicts our beliefs and favouring that which reinforces it. These confirmation biases can only be overcome by actively seeking out disconfirming evidence and encouraging a culture of robust debate among your employees. 2.  Doggedly holding the line In 2008, signs began to leak out across the American economy that a large collapse was coming. Banks were overextended and the money from loans was not being returned fast enough – but many large businesses held the line and did not prepare for failure. The information they’d been given for years suggested the loans model worked and they did not adjust their behaviour as the data first trickled, and then thundered in. The result? An economic collapse for the ages. A 1974 study by Tversky and Kahneman explains their decision making with the anchoring bias. This study showed that even when presented with later information, people's numerical estimates were significantly influenced by irrelevant initial figures. The first information is given much more weight than later information, even if the later information comes from stronger sources. Luckily this bias is easy to overcome, by simply distrusting the early data – always compare it carefully with what comes later. 3.  Too much self-belief Convinced their market dominance would carry them through, and unimpressed with the new digital cameras, photographic film manufacturer Kodak continued business as usual in the early 2000s. Despite their position as market leader and an early pioneer, these decisions lead to their eventual complete collapse. Kodak is a clear example of the overconfidence bias, which Bazerman and Moore detailed in their book Judgement in Managerial Decision Making.  Overconfidence bias is our very human tendency to overestimate one's own knowledge, skills, or the accuracy…

Comments Off on The 5 Cognitive Biases That Could Sink Your Business

This Workers’ Day, Look After Your Business’ Greatest Asset

“Clients do not come first. Employees come first. If you take care of your employees, they will take care of the clients.” (Richard Branson) Whether you call it May Day, Labour Day or International Workers’ Day, 1 May is an opportune time for businesses to consider and prioritise their workers.  Here's why happy workers are a business's greatest asset (and some ways to foster a happier workforce).   Business benefits of happy workers  Increased productivity. Various studies have shown that happy workers are more committed to company goals and up to 13% more productive. Improved customer service. People who are happy at work provide better customer service, leading to higher customer satisfaction and loyalty.  Reduced costs. Lower absenteeism and improved worker retention mean substantially reduced labour costs. Enhanced creativity and innovation. Happy workers buy into the big picture, offer creative solutions, take thoughtful risks, collaborate and are more likely to experiment.  Superior business performance. Gallup research shows that companies with happy workers can outperform competitors by up to 200%, and achieve up to 22% higher profitability.   5 ways to increase happiness in your workplace Create a supportive work environmentEssential for employee wellbeing is a safe and supportive work environment in which diversity is valued and everyone is included and treated respectfully. This is also the foundation for a company culture that’s centred around teamwork, collaboration, job satisfaction, and accomplishment. Balance job demands with resourcesProviding sufficient and appropriate resources to ensure staff can meet their work demands means the work gets done efficiently and on time. It is also important that workers’ roles and responsibilities are clear and aligned with company goals, and that issues like time pressures and overwhelming workloads are addressed quickly. Offer competitive compensation and benefitsBe sure to offer fair compensation packages as well as benefits that add value to employees, such as flexible scheduling and work arrangements, extra paid time off or even an onsite canteen, gym, or creche. Maintain this competitiveness through annual compensation reviews. Recognise and appreciate all workersIt can be a really good idea to implement a formal recognition programme. After all, over 70% of employees say “feeling unappreciated” is the biggest driver of dissatisfaction. It’s equally important to make health and wellbeing a priority in your workplace and to encourage workers to share their feedback, ideas and concerns. Nobody likes to feel ignored! Invest in professional developmentContinuously provide the necessary training and tools for employees to perform effectively. Complement this by investing in professional development, and offering workers at all levels opportunities for upskilling and career advancement. The bottom line  There is a real return on an investment in happy workers – and many easy ways to increase the level of happiness and engagement among your workers. Call on us to assist with calculating optimal compensation packages and to provide financial and tax advice as you invest in your workforce’s wellbeing and happiness. Disclaimer: The information provided herein should not be used or relied on as professional advice. No liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions nor for…

Comments Off on This Workers’ Day, Look After Your Business’ Greatest Asset

Zen and the Art of Fostering Job Stability in an Uncertain World

“The more tranquil a man becomes, the greater is his success, his influence, his power for good.” (James Allen)  The world of work has never felt less stable. Between high unemployment rates, a quicksand political environment, the gig economy and the introduction of new disruptive technologies (and tariffs!) almost daily, it’s no surprise that recent studies are showing people in 9-to-5 jobs no longer feel stable. A study by MyPerfectResume in 2024 found that four out of every five workers were afraid they may lose their jobs in 2025 due to technological advancements such as automation, artificial intelligence, and outsourcing. This was reinforced by the pandemic, when vast numbers of people were retrenched or otherwise lost their jobs.  This uncertainty is affecting the mental health of modern workers. And it’s lowering productivity and impacting businesses, creating a vicious cycle of instability. According to the Journal of Occupational Health Psychology, workers who feel insecure about their jobs report higher levels of burnout, less job satisfaction, and lower engagement levels. When workers are constantly worried about being let go, it typically affects their focus, creativity, and long-term commitment to their employer.  But does it have to be this way? Here are our tips for making your employees comfortable, more stable and ultimately, happier. Honesty is the best policy A little communication has been shown to go a long way to keep a workforce happy. Regular updates about company performance, future prospects, and any potential restructuring plans can help employees feel more in control and less fearful of unexpected layoffs. The Harvard Business Review (2020) found that organisations that maintain open lines of communication during times of uncertainty are able to reduce employee anxiety and build trust. Teach a man to fish Even if things are uncertain for your company, you should do your best to help upskill your employees and train them in new and exciting technologies. Focusing on continuous learning sends a strong signal that your company understands the modern environment and is planning for it. This doesn’t just lessen stress it also helps employees to feel that even if they are retrenched, they will still be well positioned to find new work.  Your business will benefit too: the World Economic Forum suggests that employers who provide opportunities for skill development, including training in new technologies and leadership, are more likely to retain talent and maintain higher levels of employee morale. What’s more, training staff can lead to tax incentives. Speak to your accountant (that’s us) if you aren’t already taking advantage of these breaks. B is for balance It may sound counter-intuitive, but hybrid work models are repeatedly being shown to be an effective way to boost employee morale and lower the stress related to job loss. A 2022 report by Gallup found that employees who have more flexibility in how, when and where they work are more satisfied with their jobs and feel more secure in their roles. A quantum workplace study found that 89% of employees were looking…

Comments Off on Zen and the Art of Fostering Job Stability in an Uncertain World

Your Tax Deadlines for May 2025

07 May – PAYE submissions and payments 23 May – VAT manual submissions and payments 29 May – Excise duty payments 30 May – VAT electronic submissions and payments, & CIT Provisional Tax payments where applicable. Disclaimer: The information provided herein should not be used or relied on as professional advice. No liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions nor for any loss or damage arising from reliance upon any information herein. Always contact us for specific and detailed advice. © AccountingDotNews

Comments Off on Your Tax Deadlines for May 2025

Budget 2025: How It Affects You and Your Business

“… the economy needs to grow much faster and in an inclusive manner. This is the central objective of the current administration.” (Finance Minister Enoch Godongwana – Budget 2025) The tabling of Finance Minister Enoch Godongwana’s fourth Budget in February was marked by an unprecedented three-week postponement, following a deadlock around the original Budget proposal to increase VAT by 2%. A revised Budget, finally tabled on 12 March, proposed a 0.5% increase from 1 May 2025, with a second 0.5% VAT increase from 1 April 2026 – but the proposal was still not enough to satisfy most other political parties. In his Budget Speech, the finance minister called the Budget proposals “a bold and pragmatic approach” to ensure the economy grows “much faster and in an inclusive manner”. He admitted that the economy has stagnated for over a decade, with GDP growth averaging less than 2%, while forecasts for medium-term GDP growth are a dismal 1.8%. While the powers that be attempt to reach consensus on the Budget 2025 proposals, businesses and individuals in South Africa will find little support from the fiscus to survive these low-growth economic conditions.  This is evident from our overview below of the most pertinent Budget 2025 proposals. In a nutshell, the finance minister is trying to cover another substantial Budget shortfall by directly and indirectly increasing the tax burden on corporate and individual taxpayers. Budget proposals that will impact you  The 0.5% VAT increases proposed for 2025 and 2026 will impact every South African, while disproportionately affecting lower-income households strained by high electricity costs, inflation and interest rates in a weak economy. To alleviate their impact on poor households, the list of zero-rated food items is extended to include canned vegetables, dairy liquid blends, and organ meats from sheep, poultry and other animals. Personal income tax brackets will not be adjusted for inflation for a second year running. This means that, like last year, individuals who receive a salary increase will again pay more tax, and could be pushed into a higher tax bracket. No inflation adjustments were proposed for tax rebates or medical tax credits – which once again translates into more tax payable by individuals. Above-inflation increases in the excise duties on alcohol (6.75%) and tobacco (4.75 – 6.75%) are no surprise. This means that with immediate effect, the duty on: a 340ml can of beer increases by 16c a 750ml bottle of unfortified wine goes up by 29c a 750ml bottle of fortified wine goes up by 48c a 750ml bottle of spirits will increase by R5.97 a 23g cigar goes up by R8.49 a pack of 20 cigarettes rises by R1.04 vaping products increase by 14c per millilitre. Changes to the rules regarding the tax treatment of cross-border retirement funds are proposed.  A one-year extension in the R370 social relief of distress (SRD) grant and above-inflation increases ranging from R30 to R130 per month in other social grants will provide minimal relief to the poorest South African households. SARS has…

Comments Off on Budget 2025: How It Affects You and Your Business

Budget 2025: Your Tax Tables and Tax Calculator

Budget 2025, if adopted by Parliament,  will effectively bring about an increase in personal income tax by not adjusting the tables for tax rates, rebates and credits, while also implementing substantial increases in ‘sin’ taxes and introducing a 0.5% VAT increase on 1 May 2025 and another 0.5% increase effective 1 April 2026.   This selection of official SARS Tax Tables and other useful resources will help clarify your tax position for the new tax year.  Individual taxpayers: Tax tables unchanged since 2023Source: SARSSource: SARSSource: SARS Sin taxes raisedSource: Adapted from Budget 2025 People’s Guide Businesses: Corporate tax rates unchangedSource: Adapted from SARS Budget Tax Guide 2025 Proposed VAT increasesSource: Adapted from Budget 2025 People’s Guide Transfer duty: 10% upward adjustment from 1 AprilSource: SARS’ Budget Tax Guide 2025 How much will you be paying in income, petrol and sin taxes? Use Fin 24’s four-step Budget Calculator here to find out the monthly and annual impact on your income tax, as well as what you will be paying in fuel and sin taxes. Bear in mind, however, that the best way to fully understand the impact of the proposals in Budget 2025 on you and your business is to reach out to us for professional advice. Disclaimer: The information provided herein should not be used or relied on as professional advice. No liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions nor for any loss or damage arising from reliance upon any information herein. Always contact us for specific and detailed advice. © AccountingDotNews

Comments Off on Budget 2025: Your Tax Tables and Tax Calculator

Why Use a Registered Tax Practitioner? Here’s What SARS Says…

"A tax professional is someone who solves a problem you didn't know you had in a way you don't understand." (Carl Ally, adapted from a quote about architects) With tax compliance scrutiny intensifying and SARS increasing its detection capabilities with “the latest technology, artificial intelligence, and data science”, South African businesses face mounting pressure to keep their tax affairs 100% in order. To achieve and maintain this compliance, the expertise of a tax practitioner is invaluable – provided you are using a correctly registered practitioner. Do I even need a tax practitioner?  The specialised knowledge that registered tax practitioners offer greatly benefits businesses and individuals to navigate more complex tax matters, including:  multiple income streams  multiple tax obligations (income tax, VAT, PAYE, SDL, UIF) optimisation of complex deductions industry-specific tax considerations capital gains calculations strategic tax planning opportunities. Businesses that attempt to navigate tax matters alone or with unregistered help face significant risks like:  missed opportunities for legitimate tax efficiency exposure to penalties and interest charges for errors or oversights increased likelihood of verifications and audits reputational damage potential criminal liability in cases of serious mistakes and omissions. Using a registered tax practitioner can significantly reduce these risks, free up time to focus on your core business, and eliminate the stress of tax-related challenges. Why must a tax practitioner be registered?  Section 240(1) of the Tax Administration Act mandates that anyone who provides tax advice or completes tax returns on behalf of others must be registered with both SARS and a Recognised Controlling Body, such as SAIPA, SAICA, SAIT or CIBA. To provide clients with assurance that their tax affairs are in capable hands, these professional bodies impose stringent criteria on registered tax practitioners, ensuring they are:  qualified according to stringent industry-recognised criteria up-to-date with current tax legislation and professional development bound by professional codes of conduct or ethics accountable to a professional regulatory body able to provide recourse for substandard service or fraudulent activities covered by Professional Indemnity insurance supported by a technical support team for resolving complex tax issues. More benefits of using a registered tax practitioner Tax clarity and tailored tax advice: As SARS updates requirements and introduces new compliance measures, a registered practitioner can expertly advise your business in the evolving tax landscape. Strategic advice on legitimate tax efficiency measures like tax planning and structuring, industry-specific tax opportunities for your business, and additional services to streamline tax compliance.  Critical protection is provided by ensuring accurate and compliant tax calculations and returns, maintaining documentation for potential audits, and proactively identifying and addressing potential compliance issues. Direct representation during SARS engagements including lodging and managing disputes, and experienced negotiation capabilities.  Insurance cover: A registered tax practitioner carries Professional Indemnity insurance – providing an additional layer of protection should errors occur.   Maximise value from our tax team  As SARS intensifies its compliance efforts, the guidance and protection offered by our professional tax team will become increasingly valuable. Employing a registered tax practitioner is about much more than meeting a compliance requirement – it's…

Comments Off on Why Use a Registered Tax Practitioner? Here’s What SARS Says…

5 Tips for Using Reviews to Boost Your Business

“Reviews aren't just about feedback, they're about building a relationship with your customers." (Oprah Winfrey) According to a recent survey, 91% of people regularly or occasionally read online reviews, and 84% trust online reviews as much as a personal recommendation from a friend. There’s no doubt that reviews are having a moment.  The challenge comes when you learn that it can take as many as 20 good reviews to overcome a single bad one. Little wonder, then, that many companies try to focus on encouraging unhappy customers to remove their bad reviews, while generally neglecting the good ones, save for a short thank you message. This may, however, be short-sighted as using reviews correctly, can change the entire good vs bad formula, strengthen your company, improve sales and improve your bottom line. Here are our tips for maximising those good reviews.  1. Maximise your visibility online Gone are the days when search engine optimisation (SEO) was purely about the words on your website. Google is now working tirelessly to ensure that good companies with great customer service are more visible online. Customer reviews can be used in your online content to add credibility and “expertise” and therefore improve the way Google views your content. But reviews can’t simply be shoe-horned into your site – they must be incorporated in a way that’s justifiable and organic. Remember, you can no longer simply write your own reviews as Google tracks which reviews are left when and by whom. Real people leaving reviews in a believable way boost rankings – but fake ones hurt them. 2. Boost your conversion rates Conversion rates are probably the single most important stat for an online business and your reviews can be used to make a significant impact. Research conducted by the Medill Spiegel Research Center has revealed that displaying reviews across your website has the potential to boost conversions by as much as 270%. Because of the weight users give to the views of others, simply seeing a good review boosts credibility and trust and encourages users to take the next step. 3. Don’t hide bad reviews, use them to boost trust Earlier we spoke about how many companies try to remove their bad reviews. This is not necessary. Everyone’s going to get a bad review from time to time, and your customers know this. Leaving your bad reviews up – along with your clear responses to try and fix the issues – has actually been shown to boost customer confidence. People like to know that if something goes wrong, you’ll do whatever you can to fix it. These bad reviews help them to see that far better than if you simply sweep them under the carpet.  4. Good reviews can lead to better hires Your reviews can also be used to attract better staff. A 2024 study by Deloitte showed that 44% of millennials and 49% of Gen Zs consider a company's values before accepting a job. People want to work for likeable companies. Including…

Comments Off on 5 Tips for Using Reviews to Boost Your Business

Your Tax Deadlines for April 2025

01 April – Start of the 2025/26 Financial Year          07 April - PAYE submissions and payments             25 April – VAT manual submissions and payments             29 April – Excise duty payments       30 April – VAT electronic submissions and payments, & CIT Provisional Tax payments where applicable. Disclaimer: The information provided herein should not be used or relied on as professional advice. No liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions nor for any loss or damage arising from reliance upon any information herein. Always contact us for specific and detailed advice. © AccountingDotNews

Comments Off on Your Tax Deadlines for April 2025

6 Signs it Might be Time to Pivot

“The measure of intelligence is the ability to change.” (Albert Einstein)  Change can be uncomfortable and often we humans love to avoid it. In business, however, being brave enough to embrace change could be the difference between going under and thriving. All business owners should be constantly on the lookout for opportunities to improve their products, services or offerings.  A good pivot into a new area, technology or even target customer base could be just the ticket your business needs to position itself for a very bright future. But how do you know when it’s time to change tack? Look out for these six signs… 1. These are not the results you were looking for Achieving results takes time. But if you’ve held the line consistently for a year and the business isn’t expanding – or worse, is in decline – it’s probably time for a change. Don’t let emotions take over – now is the time to be honest with yourself and take a long, hard look at your marketing plans, and your product. Most good pivots don’t come from hard shifts but from subtle changes to products and offerings. If the customers aren’t biting, now is the time to ask them why.  2. The market has changed We live in an era of technological advancement and massive change. If you’re still doing things the way you did them five years ago (or perhaps even a year ago, depending on the industry) it might be time to start looking at changing. As a business owner, you need to constantly make adjustments to your service or product to suit changing market conditions. If a new technology or way of doing business has popped up, you need to understand how it impacts your business and develop a plan to match the new conditions. If you can’t, then it may be time to think about moving into an entirely new industry or shutting down entirely. 3. People can’t see your vision In business, we often speak about the elevator pitch – the quick two-minute description of what your business does and how it does it differently. If your elevator pitch is generally met with blank stares, and you never get enthusiastic responses, then you either need a new elevator pitch or a new business model. 4. You’re constantly exhausted Working hard to get a new business going is par for the course, but if you’re putting in the hard hours and it’s not catching on, then something is going wrong. The pivot you need may be something as simple as better marketing, or a slight adjustment to your product – but it’s important to act sooner rather than later. 5. You’ve got cash flow issues Temporary cash flow issues are one thing, but if you’re permanently battling, then something has gone wrong. Perhaps your pricing structure is wrong, or perhaps you are in the wrong game altogether. Persistent cash flow issues are a sign that you need to rethink your business model.…

Comments Off on 6 Signs it Might be Time to Pivot

Disagree with SARS? Here’s How we Can Assist You

“When taxpayers are aggrieved by an assessment or a decision that is subject to objection and appeal, they have a right to dispute it.” (SARS) As a taxpayer in South Africa, you have the right to dispute tax assessments, if you have valid reason to disagree with SARS on the interpretation of either the relevant facts involved, or the laws that apply to the facts, or both. SARS has a well-established dispute resolution process – but it is also time-consuming and often complex, with strict deadlines and a substantial amount of administration. Here’s how we can help you manage the timelines and process for a (hopefully) successful dispute against a SARS assessment, including those that create unmanageable tax liabilities. A solid foundation is paramount Before lodging an objection, it’s crucial to make a Request for Reasons for a SARS assessment, which will detail SARS' findings of fact and the law it applied. You need this to build a solid objection. All substantiating documentation required for the objection must be collated, as it must be submitted with your objection within the objection period. It’s also important to ensure your other tax affairs are compliant, as your overall tax compliance status can influence SARS’ decision-making process. Maintaining updated contact details with SARS, checking your compliance status regularly, and reacting promptly to notification emails or SMSes from SARS are all vital – but we can take care of this for you. Pay now, argue later Where a disputed assessment involves a tax debt, the debt must be paid even if you are submitting an objection, thanks to SARS’ “pay now, argue later” principle. This is often a substantial challenge for taxpayers.  If you want to avoid paying immediately, a “Request for Suspension of Payment” must also be submitted timeously, in a separate process. If granted, this will prevent SARS from commencing collection proceedings on the outstanding amount until the objection is finalised. Ducks in a row Submitting a tax objection is a serious business. The validity and strength of the arguments and evidence to be presented in the objection should be carefully – and objectively – evaluated. The objection must detail the grounds on which the assessment is disputed, set out the parts or amounts in dispute and, depending on the nature of the dispute, address penalties and interest incurred. Substantiating documentation that provides evidence for the objection must be collated and submitted to SARS within the objection period. The bottom line: professional tax expertise is highly recommended when drafting an objection. Keep to tight deadlines Meeting the tight timelines is crucial for protecting your right as a taxpayer to dispute an assessment. By acting quickly and meeting deadlines, we can help you to ensure the best chances of resolving the dispute favourably. Important deadlines include: You have 30 business days after the date of assessment to make a Request for Reasons, which will extend the period within which an objection can be lodged.  The law allows 80 business days to file a Notice of…

Comments Off on Disagree with SARS? Here’s How we Can Assist You

How to Save Big on Corporate Travel in 2025

“He who buys what he does not need, steals from himself.” (Swedish Proverb) Many think of corporate travel expenses as being a non-negotiable, and expensive part of doing business. The thing is, it is possible to cut back on travel expenses without cutting out the necessary requirements and little luxuries. Here are our four top tips for saving money on your corporate travel account. 1. Plan ahead Most corporate travel is not an emergency. Whether you need to pitch to new clients in London, attend a conference in Los Angeles or visit a supplier in China, proper planning can save a great deal of money. All travel expenses increase the closer you get to the departure date. Simply looking at the necessary travel for the year ahead, scheduling it in advance and booking comfortably ahead of time will save you a significant amount. Flights are generally at their cheapest between 30 and 60 days before departure.  Taking this one step further, you can also make sure you aren’t travelling during peak times. If you need to visit your clients every second month, make sure your trips don’t coincide with large conferences or entertainment events as these can drive up hotel costs.  For domestic travel it makes sense to try and fly on Tuesday, Wednesday or Thursday, as flights are generally cheaper than on other days. Early morning or early afternoon flights (before 3 PM) are not only cheaper, but also tend to have fewer delays and cancellations – which means there’s less chance of additional accommodation or car hire charges. 2. Set up a travel policy In order to effectively plan ahead and book all that’s needed, you need to implement a company-wide travel policy. This policy should cover all aspects of travel including:  The booking process for accommodation, flights, transfers, vehicle rentals and everything else. Expenses and meal allowances. The approval and reimbursement process. 3. Be as loyal as possible Hotels and airlines offer loyalty programs that reward their most frequent travellers with perks like airport lounges and dining discounts, but they also offer important benefits for the business. Airline loyalty members often get to cancel their bookings or change dates at a reduced fee, and the frequent flyer miles and rewards can add up to other free travel benefits. Hotels are much more forgiving on loyalty members when it comes to late and early check-ins and room upgrades. And they typically offer a guaranteed discount on their room rates. 4. Use an agent Travel agents are basically a free (or at least very cheap) service for the people who use them. Often the prices are the same whether you book yourself or do it through an agency because the agent commissions are already built into the prices of the rooms, flights and car rentals. Booking with an agent can save your HR, receptionist or PA valuable hours that could be put into something more productive.  Agents are already experts so paying them a small service fee (if required)…

Comments Off on How to Save Big on Corporate Travel in 2025
Read more about the article 5 Things to Consider When Buying vs Leasing Equipment
Builder choosing heavy machinery for construction with a sales consultant on the open ground of a shop with special vehicles

5 Things to Consider When Buying vs Leasing Equipment

“I do not gather things, I prefer to rent them rather than to possess them.” (Jerzy Kosinski, Polish-American writer) Deciding whether to buy or lease equipment can sometimes seem like an impossible choice. There are so many factors at play that it can feel like whatever you do will be wrong. We’ve put together a short list of five things to consider that should make the process a little easier. 1. When do you need the money? Leasing has lower up-front costs than buying, but in the long term could end up costing your company more. Leasing can make it easier to conserve working capital and maintain a stronger cash flow, especially in the early days. However, if you buy, you will eventually pay the equipment off meaning your long-term costs will drop. 2. Are you going to need to upgrade? Will the equipment you are looking for need to be upgraded? Or is it something you can use, as is, for years? Leasing equipment often comes with the option of upgrading it on the spot when newer versions come out. This gives companies more flexibility and the chance to be fully up-to-date at all times. If you’re sure of the long-term efficacy of a machine, however, it may make more sense to buy. 3. Are there tax benefits? Some products will provide more benefits come tax time than others with deductions on offer for both leasing and buying. As your accountants we can help you to understand the exact implications of renting/buying your particular equipment and the amount and timing of tax relief that is available. 4. Do you want to pay for maintenance? Leasing equipment can often mean that you don’t have to worry about maintaining it. While this will undoubtedly be built into the cost of your leasing contract, there’s great comfort in knowing that the maintenance is taken care of – and that if something goes really wrong you can get an immediate replacement. Do just check your lease agreement for any exclusions or restrictions – there is often an exclusion for “damage due to client negligence,” for example. 5. Do you need to customise your equipment? If you lease your equipment, you probably won’t be able to customise it. It makes sense that the rental company needs to be able to lease the equipment to someone else when you’re done with it. If you own a machine you can generally do with it as you like, meaning you can take care of your special requirements.  The bottom line Choosing between leasing and buying ultimately depends on your business’ unique set of circumstances. To get the best advice please consult with your accountant – we’ll be able to lay out all the financial repercussions of your decision. Disclaimer: The information provided herein should not be used or relied on as professional advice. No liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions nor for any loss or damage arising from reliance upon any information herein. Always contact…

Comments Off on 5 Things to Consider When Buying vs Leasing Equipment
Read more about the article Your Tax Deadlines for March 2025
Tax Calculator with Red Button

Your Tax Deadlines for March 2025

07 March - PAYE submissions and payments 25 March – VAT manual submissions and payments 28 March – Excise duty payments 31 March – End of the 2023/24 Financial year, VAT electronic submissions and payments, & CIT Provisional Tax payments where applicable. Disclaimer: The information provided herein should not be used or relied on as professional advice. No liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions nor for any loss or damage arising from reliance upon any information herein. Always contact us for specific and detailed advice. © AccountingDotNews

Comments Off on Your Tax Deadlines for March 2025

Are You Ready for the Next Provisional Tax Deadline?

“Death, taxes, and childbirth! There’s never any convenient time for any of them.” (Margaret Mitchell) What is provisional tax? Provisional tax allows corporate and individual provisional taxpayers to pay their annual income tax in advance by making two or three payments during a tax year. The aim is to prevent taxpayers from facing large income tax liabilities that are only revealed at the end of the year of assessment, when the annual personal income tax (PIT) return ITR12 or the annual corporate income tax (CIT) return ITR14 is filed in January. While provisional tax payments can assist taxpayers by spreading their income tax liability over the tax year, they also create additional administrative obligations such as completing and submitting a provisional tax return (IRP 6) on time, twice or thrice a year. What’s more, they increase the risk of penalties, most notably under-estimation penalties. Luckily you have us in your corner. Are you a provisional taxpayer? Companies are automatically provisional taxpayers. Individuals who receive income other than a salary may also be provisional taxpayers, depending on various criteria. Because SARS places the onus on you to determine if you are liable for provisional tax, it’s best to check your provisional tax status with us. The 3 provisional tax payments The first compulsory provisional tax payment is due within six months of the start of the year of assessment. So, if your or the company’s 2025 tax year commenced on 1 March 2024, the first provisional tax payment was due on 31 August last year. This forward-looking payment is based on half of the total estimated tax for the full year, less employees’ tax already paid and any applicable tax credits and rebates.  The upcoming second compulsory provisional tax payment deadline is the last working day of the year of assessment (on 28 February if your tax year started on 1 March). It works somewhat differently, and the rules are far stricter – with harsh penalties for under-estimating taxable income for the year. A third optional payment can be made after the end of the tax year, but before the issuing of the annual income tax assessment by SARS each year. Crunch time! The provisional return for the second period to 28 February is retrospective and based on the total estimated tax for the full tax year (less the first period provisional tax and employees’ tax already paid, and any applicable tax credits and rebates). The second estimate must be quite accurate as heavy under-estimation penalties apply. Where the taxable income is less than R1 million; and the second period estimate is less than 90% of the actual taxable income and less than the ‘basic amount’ (taxable income assessed for latest preceding year of assessment), a 20% penalty is imposed on the difference between the employees’ and provisional tax already paid and the lesser of normal tax on 90% of the actual taxable income or normal tax on the basic amount, after deductible rebates. Where the taxable income is more than…

Comments Off on Are You Ready for the Next Provisional Tax Deadline?
Read more about the article Building a Business: Should You Bring in Funders or Go it Alone?
Group of business people assembling jigsaw puzzle and represent team support and help concept

Building a Business: Should You Bring in Funders or Go it Alone?

“As an entrepreneur, one of the biggest challenges you will face will be building your brand. The ultimate goal is to set your company and your brand apart from the crowd.” (Ryan Holmes, Founder and CEO of Hootsuite) Trying to get a business off the ground is challenging. Every step of the process requires a mountain of time and investment. Choosing between going it alone or involving others as partners or investors is a decision that should not be taken lightly. In this article we’ll break down the options available and take a look at the pros and cons of each. 1. Going it alone Self-funding, also known as bootstrapping, is when a business owner goes it alone, providing all funding, time and energy themselves. Pros of bootstrapping Whether you’re finding the money from savings, or your monthly pay cheque at another job, bootstrapping is perfect for the entrepreneur who wants full control over their business. With no partners on board, all decisions are yours to make, and all the profits, achievements, and losses are yours alone. Apart from the independence it offers, bootstrapping can also be easier. There’s no time spent filling in application forms or putting together pitch decks to impress would-be investors. There is also no accrued interest on the debt involved and no loss of equity in your own business. This makes running the business far simpler. Cons of bootstrapping On the downside, bootstrapping can be much slower. Each cent spent on the business needs to come from your own pocket and so necessary investments need to be prioritised from month-to-month. Things that are essential for success may need to wait another month – and this can mean your break-even point takes longer to arrive. Bootstrapping also increases your chances of failure, as some expenses simply can’t wait if you want to make money. Bootstrappers are also more likely to become frustrated with the slow pace and give up.    2. Tapping into venture capital Venture capital (VC) is one of the most popular routes for finding funding in entrepreneurship. This is where a company or an individual provides funding to your business in exchange for a percentage of ownership. Pros of VC Venture capitalists are able to offer significant investment in the company and can often provide all the funding necessary to take the company from start-up to established business. What’s more, venture capitalists likely come with significant experience in business and a strong network of contacts. Cons of VC Working with venture capitalists requires that you give up some control of your business. This new partnership can create friction if the person who pays the bills doesn’t share your ideas of where the company should be headed. In some instances, their investment may even give them a majority stake and the dream you had of being your own boss might now be a thing of the past. 3. Touched by an angel (investor) Angel investors are also happy to provide the financing necessary for…

Comments Off on Building a Business: Should You Bring in Funders or Go it Alone?

What Your Balance Sheet Says About Your Business

“It sounds extraordinary, but it's a fact that balance sheets can make fascinating reading.” (Mary Archer) A balance sheet reveals a company’s “book value” by showing what assets it owns, what liabilities it owes, and the equity or net worth attributable to its owners, at a specific point in time.  Because all resources or assets are either funded by borrowing (liabilities) or owner investments (equity), the fundamental accounting equation that underpins the balance sheet is:  Assets = Liabilities + Equity.  Key components of a balance sheet Assets are resources controlled by a company that are expected to generate future value. These include current assets, such as cash, accounts receivable, and inventory; and non-current or long-term assets such as property, equipment, trademarks, and patents. Liabilities are obligations the company owes to external parties. These include current liabilities, such as accounts payable, payroll and short-term loans, and non-current or long-term liabilities like bonds, leases and deferred tax liabilities.  Owners’ equity represents the net worth of a company after liabilities are deducted from assets and includes retained earnings and contributed capital, among others. What your balance sheet says about your business The balance sheet is an important tool for evaluating your company’s financial health and operational efficiency.  By providing an overview of the assets and liabilities of the company and how they relate to each other, the balance sheet can help answer questions such as whether your company has a positive net worth, whether it has enough cash and short-term assets to cover its obligations, and how indebted it is compared to its peers.  The balance sheet will show when a company is borrowing too much money, if the assets it owns are not liquid enough, or if it has enough cash on hand to meet current liabilities.  For this reason, balance sheets are also used to secure capital, private equity funding, business loans or bank finance, as they allow stakeholders to assess the financial health of a company, its solvency, and its ability to repay short-term debts. Using your balance sheet for better management Business owners and managers, as well as other stakeholders such as lenders or investors, can leverage the balance sheet alongside other financial resources to enhance decision-making and performance.   When analysed over time or comparatively against competing companies, a balance sheet can reveal ways to improve the financial health of a company. Financial ratios are important tools that draw data directly from the balance sheet and other sources and are used for fundamental financial analysis. Some common ratios include: Liquidity and solvency ratios show how well a company can pay off its debts and obligations using existing assets. They also allow for monitoring long-term liabilities to maintain sustainable debt levels. Financial strength ratios, such as debt-to-equity ratios, measure the relative proportion of debt and equity used to finance a company’s assets. A higher debt-to-equity ratio shows that a company is more heavily financed through debt, showing an increased leverage. These ratios indicate how financially stable a company is and how it is financed. Activity…

Comments Off on What Your Balance Sheet Says About Your Business
Read more about the article The Enormous Benefits of Non-Profit Collaborations
charity, donation and volunteering concept - happy smiling male volunteer with clipboard and woman taking box of food at distribution or refugee assistance center

The Enormous Benefits of Non-Profit Collaborations

“The unfortunate need people who will be kind to them; the prosperous need people to be kind to.” (Aristotle) Strategic business partnerships are an integral part of any successful business and yet very few entrepreneurs think of the opportunities which arise from partnering with non-profit organisations. Collaborating with NGOs and charities has been shown to offer many of the same benefits achieved through regular business partnerships – as well as a few additional, and perhaps unconsidered ones. Here’s why helping others may also end up helping you. Make the circle bigger Like any other business partnership, aligning with a non-profit gives businesses shared access to one another’s contacts and opens up doors that previously may have been locked, or not considered. By hosting combined events you’re sure to not only meet the leaders of other companies in your position, but may also uncover new talent, enthusiastic and empathetic leaders and creative mentors and volunteers. Greater brand exposure By moving into these new areas, brands stand to not only make valuable business allies but are also likely to expand their own customer base. By partnering on events or activities with a non-profit, your brand immediately becomes exposed to the non-profit’s audience in a way that’s real, and likely to generate a warm first impression. According to research conducted by Consumer Goods, 82% of shoppers want a brand’s values to align with their own. When a charity’s audience sees you offering your support, they know you care about the same things they care about. Improve employee happiness In a survey commissioned by former Unilever CEO Paul Polman in 2023, a whopping 76% of respondents said that they want “to work for a company that is trying to have a positive impact on the world”. The study further found that more than half of employees said that “they would consider resigning from their job if the values demonstrated by their employer did not align with their own”, while 35% of respondents claimed to already have quit a job for this reason. Improve your image How your business is presented in the media impacts consumers, current and potential employees, and prospective partners. Good press is therefore vital for business expansion – and assisting a non-profit is a great way of ensuring that what’s being said is positive. When you help a charity, you put your brand values and ethics front-and-centre for people to see and admire. This goes a long way toward fostering goodwill toward your company and building positive brand association. Reap the tax benefits There can also be tax benefits to assisting charities and non-profit organisations. The donations made can be in cash or kind, and must be made to qualifying public-benefit organisations (PBOs). These organisations are registered with SARS and will issue donors with a certificate in terms of section 18A of the Income Tax Act. The total deduction must comprise no more than 10% of your taxable income for the given year of assessment and must be made with no…

Comments Off on The Enormous Benefits of Non-Profit Collaborations

Your Tax Deadlines for February 2025

07 February – Monthly PAYE submissions and payments 25 February – Value Added Tax (VAT) manual submissions and payments 27 February – Excise duty payments 28 February – VAT electronic submissions and payments, Corporate Income Tax (CIT) Provisional Tax payments where applicable, and Personal Income Tax (PIT) Provisional Tax payments.  Disclaimer: The information provided herein should not be used or relied on as professional advice. No liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions nor for any loss or damage arising from reliance upon any information herein. Always contact us for specific and detailed advice. © AccountingDotNews

Comments Off on Your Tax Deadlines for February 2025

3 Things You Have to Do to Position Your Business for Growth in 2025

“There are no secrets to success. It is the result of preparation, hard work and learning from failure.” (Colin Powell, United States Secretary of State) Of course you plan for your business to grow. But in an environment of constant change, it can be hard to know where to place your energy. These three focus areas will help you position your business for growth, regardless of the external circumstances. 1. Clean up your finances A business that’s ready for growth is one that understands its finances. How much money can you afford to spend on advertising? What investments need to be made to maintain infrastructure or hire the right staff? And can you afford to keep going if there’s a disruption in your supply lines? Businesses with tidy finances are able to answer all of these questions and more.  If you can’t answer every conceivable question about your finances, then you need to ask your accountant (that’s us) to help you get them in order. Here are a few pointers: Separate business and personal financesBusiness finances that are intermingled with personal ones create confusion and make it difficult to get a clear picture of just where the business is headed. Introduce bookkeeping softwareYou may not have the time to stay on top of your finances when you’re running the business – but that’s okay. Using bookkeeping software can keep you one step ahead of the game, and it will definitely save your accountant time. Regularly update your financial statementsAsk us to keep a set of financial statements up-to-date and on hand at all times. Financial statements can open doors, allowing you to get necessary funding, apply for awards or government incentive programs and/or build an accurate business strategy. 2. Optimise your client base Improving company finances doesn’t have to mean introducing new products or expanding into new territories. It’s far simpler to maximise the benefit you’re getting from your current market. Do this by ensuring your sales and marketing teams are functioning at the best possible level, getting the right information to your clients, and then maximising the impact they have on those clients. Focus on building genuine relationships with your customers by engaging with them and their needs, providing top-level service and offering value beyond the sale. If you truly care for your customers they will care for you, and you will find yourself at the front of the queue when it comes to new market information and advice on how your product could be improved. Your sales team should also be encouraged to follow up with potential new clients to ensure opportunities aren’t being missed.  3. Analyse your existing offering Growth can also be generated by making sure you’re offering the products your clients need at the right price. It’s no good pouring money into a product that’s not right, or which isn’t as good as its competitors. The first step to finding out if you’re on the right track is to ask yourself the question, “If we stopped…

Comments Off on 3 Things You Have to Do to Position Your Business for Growth in 2025

Tax Compliance in 2025: Help Is at Hand

"Being tax compliant and ‘paying your fair share’ is not just good for you, but also contributes to the positive growth of our country’s economy which in turn benefits all South Africans." (SARS) Being tax-compliant is a legal requirement for all South Africans.  SARS says it will be unrelenting in driving voluntary compliance in pursuing the 2024/25 tax revenue target of R1,840.8 billion.  To expand the tax base, detect dishonest taxpayers, deal with tax avoidance, expand debt collection, and improve service levels, SARS will:   Deploy more data science and artificial intelligence (AI). Broaden the tax base via third-party data sources (banks, medical schemes, fund administrators etc. Use predictive modelling to ensure all taxpayers and traders are registered, filing returns and paying dues.  Build detection capability using machine learning models and AI.  Enforce Customs and Excise trade laws against the illicit economy. Focus on dispute prevention and resolution. Importantly, SARS is ready to act against those who willfully and defiantly ignore their legal obligations by misrepresenting their true economic status. SARS will impose significant legal and administrative costs on taxpayers and traders who deliberately fail to meet their obligations.   What does tax compliance look like? Your company needs to: Be registered with SARS for all the tax types applicable to your company. Have either merged or declared all registered tax reference numbers on eFiling. Timeously submit all tax returns and other documentation requested. Keep all registered particulars updated. Pay all tax debt on time, or timeously secure a payment arrangement or suspension of payment. Deregister the business if it is liquidated or closed. Remember that your tax compliance status is not static: it changes according to your continued compliance with tax requirements month after month. Also remember that SARS can impose both monetary and criminal sanctions to enforce compliance. This is a significant business risk, because the burden of proof, should a taxpayer disagree with a decision taken by SARS, lies with the taxpayer. In the event that the taxpayer fails to argue their case successfully, they may find themselves in a position where penalties are suffered even if the error was unintentional or administrative in nature. Benefit from the advantages of tax compliance When you comply with your tax obligations, you give your business some compelling advantages. Eliminate the costs of non-compliance, like penalties, interest, and additional accounting and admin fees. Avoid the risk of criminal offences, which may result in a fine, imprisonment or both. Common offences include not registering for a tax type, or simply not submitting tax returns.  Proof of tax compliance is considered an indicator of good company management and legal good standing.  Good standing tax clearance certificates are often required for tender applications, bidding processes or prequalification as a supplier. They can also be needed to receive payment, or for foreign investment allowances.  Compliance enables companies to gain the confidence of clients, stakeholders and investors; take advantage of business opportunities; and prevent reputational damage. Help is at hand Now more than ever before, professional…

Comments Off on Tax Compliance in 2025: Help Is at Hand

Starting a New Business? Here Are the Tax Implications…

“A goal without a plan is just a wish.” (Antoine De Saint-Exupery, author of The Little Prince) Want to start a business? SARS warns you to be aware of the tax obligations of running a business, whether it’s in the form of a legal entity or in your personal capacity.  Considering the tax implications before starting a business will result in substantial benefits down the line. These include better budgeting and cash-flow planning, cost savings, and easier administration and compliance. Pound of flesh Depending on the type of business entity you establish, different tax rates and rules apply. On the flip side, certain tax incentives and opportunities to reduce the administrative burden may be available.  Legal entities like private companies, close corporations (CCs) and non-profits are automatically registered with SARS for corporate income tax when they register with the Companies and Intellectual Property Commission (CIPC).  This is not required for a non-legal entity like a sole proprietorship or partnership. In these cases, the owner or partners are taxed in their individual capacities on their share of taxable profits. Certain tax rebates and credits apply, which can reduce overall tax liability. Legal entities may qualify for different tax incentives and preferential rates like the turnover tax system, the small business corporation (SBC) incentive, or accelerated deprecation relief available in Urban Development Zones. Corporate Income Tax (CIT)  Every business (legal entity or individual) is liable for income tax. But the rates of taxation – and the rules – can vary widely.  For companies (including CCs) the standard corporate tax rate is 27%. In addition to filing an annual return, companies are required to submit provisional tax returns twice a year – and to make the required payments on time. Turnover tax is a possible alternative for sole proprietors, partnerships, CCs and companies with a qualifying annual turnover not exceeding R1 million. This simplified annual tax, calculated on your turnover, replaces income tax, provisional tax, VAT, capital gains tax and dividends withholding tax (if the annual dividend does not exceed R200,000). This substantially reduced administrative burden is a significant benefit for small businesses. The first R335,000 of annual turnover is tax exempt – and the highest tax rate is just 3%. Qualifying companies may register as a small business corporation (SBC) for additional tax incentives, including a tax exemption for the first R95,750 of annual taxable income, and a reduced corporate tax rate up to a taxable income of R550,000. Employee taxes Every employer must register for pay-as-you-earn (PAYE), deduct it from remuneration paid to employees (along with Unemployment Insurance Fund contributions) and pay it over to SARS. Once annual salaries, wages and other remuneration exceed R500,000, the Skills Development Levy (SDL) also becomes payable. As an employer, you must submit monthly returns and payments to SARS. There are also two compulsory reconciliations during the year.  Some relief is available through the Employment Tax Incentive (ETI), allowing for a reduction in PAYE for qualifying companies that employ young people. VAT (Value Added Tax)   VAT registration becomes compulsory if…

Comments Off on Starting a New Business? Here Are the Tax Implications…

Why Email is Destroying Your Business (And How to Stop it)

“There's life and death in every email.” (Bill Gates) Over the past 25 years, email has become synonymous with office life: a recent study found that the average worker sends between 9,000 and 15,000 emails a year. All of this is happening despite email being fundamentally flawed in multiple ways that choke businesses and, in some cases, even kill them off. Here are four reasons why email needs to go. It thwarts productivityThe first thing most employees do in the morning is to check if they have any important emails. Undoubtedly, they do – but these are often buried among a slew of customer queries, spam emails, company newsletters, messages from business partners, employee announcements, HR updates and IT memos. According to one study, wading through these emails to find the vital pieces of information can take employees up to two-and-a-half hours every day.The need to constantly check emails can interrupt employee thinking processes and break the vital concentration they need to keep their workflow going. This can slow down projects at every step with the hours adding up dramatically over each project’s lifetime. Worse, the need to be permanently online can mean this is happening with personal emails too. It slows down collaborationFor one-to-one communication, email retains a powerful role. But in groups, it’s seldom efficient. Email threads where some are always included, and others seldom lead to email dead-ends, lost information and uninformed team members. Even if you are kept in the loop, it can still be confusing. Is the version of the document in your inbox the latest one? Or has it been updated by someone else on another thread?  It’s damaging staff mental healthThe two challenges above lead directly to a third, perhaps more dangerous one – an attack on employee mental health. The need to constantly be available, connected and ready-to-reply is exhausting and can lead some employees into anxiety or depression. Humans simply aren’t wired to have their attention constantly divided. No wonder email overload can lead to a notable decrease in our ability to function, with one study suggesting this to be the equivalent of a 10-point drop in IQ.  It’s a threat to your safetyThe internet is full of scam artists, criminals and opportunists – all of whom are trying to find a way to steal your data and/or your cash. While antiviruses and firewalls may offer protection from many forms of attack, they can’t protect from everything. According to Seacom, 40% of cyber events that result in loss are Business Email Compromise (BEC) scams. BECs – emails designed to trick staff into giving up vital information or downloading malicious software – result in an estimated R53bn in global company losses each year.  So, what can you do? Train your staff  Email isn’t going anywhere. All enterprises, no matter their size, need to find the budget to adequately train their staff in the correct, most efficient way to use emails to reduce the burdens on themselves and their colleagues, while also reducing the…

Comments Off on Why Email is Destroying Your Business (And How to Stop it)

Your Tax Deadlines for January 2025

07 January – PAYE submissions and payments. 20 January – End of Filing Season 2024 for Provisional taxpayers & Trusts. 24 January – VAT manual submissions and payments. 30 January – Excise duty payments. 31 January – VAT electronic submissions and payments, & CIT Provisional Tax payments where applicable. Disclaimer: The information provided herein should not be used or relied on as professional advice. No liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions nor for any loss or damage arising from reliance upon any information herein. Always contact us for specific and detailed advice. © AccountingDotNews

Comments Off on Your Tax Deadlines for January 2025

To Host or Not To Host a Year-End Party?

“If you can laugh together, you can work together” (Robert Orben) There’s no requirement or obligation for companies to host a year-end party for employees, clients or suppliers. This is true even if there’s a company tradition of an end-of-year bash, or where there may be expectations of a year-end party for clients or suppliers in certain industries. Read on for the lowdown on the pros, cons and tax implications of hosting a year-end party (or parties). The benefits of year-end functions For many, a year-end party is a highlight. A great meal, free drinks and the opportunity to mingle socially with your colleagues. It can even be a motivator when linked to company performance over the year. Here are a few other benefits: By creating shared memories that are talked about throughout the year, these functions can create a sense of belonging. Employees get to know each other better, making connections, building trust and helping to improve communication and collaboration. In the same way, functions for clients and suppliers are a chance to make professional connections and even new friends. A company-sponsored celebration offers a change of scenery, routine and pace that can boost employee productivity when you get back to the office. Among clients, it can increase levels of customer satisfaction and loyalty. A dedicated function makes people feel valued. For employees it can boost morale, build loyalty and reduce turnover, while for clients and suppliers it can create long-lasting relationships and generate qualified referrals. A party is also a great opportunity to share company achievements, like sales figures, special projects completed, or client video testimonials, in the process inspiring staff, clients and suppliers with your company’s vision and offering. The possible drawbacks of year-end functions The first step in arranging a corporate event should be setting a budget. Consider the costs – and the potential rewards – carefully. A boring or cookie-cutter party could nullify all the benefits – even if it’s not lavish. That’s why you need to make sure you host a thoughtful event that creates a positive and lasting impression of your company. There’s also always a risk that staff, suppliers and even clients might conduct themselves inappropriately. This can cause reputational damage and sour working relationships. In extreme circumstances your businesses could even be held legally liable for employee behaviour. Is it tax deductible? A company year-end party for staff can be a tax-deductible expense where it’s regarded as a non-taxable occasional meal. Where clients or suppliers are entertained at a year-end function, expenses such as meals, venue hire and live entertainment can be claimed as a tax deduction, but only if you can prove the expenses were incurred “in pursuit of business”. This means keeping a comprehensive schedule of the entertainment expenses along with the date, the venue, the company and people entertained, and the purposes of that entertainment (for example, prospecting for a new client) to prove to SARS that the expenses were genuinely business-related. A claim for entertainment expenses is…

Comments Off on To Host or Not To Host a Year-End Party?

Why Aren’t You Hitting Your Revenue Targets? 4 Hard Truths

“The only real mistake is the one from which we learn nothing.” (Henry Ford) Without revenue targets, businesses are unable to measure their performance against past years, reward employees, or accurately forecast and plan. Targets set by leaders for individuals or teams can shape morale and expectations for employees and bring accountability to team actions. But it doesn’t always work like this. You might have found yourself in the unenviable position where your targets are consistently being missed – despite your team leaders reporting that their teams are giving it everything they’ve got. Here are four reasons why this may be happening – and what you can do about it. Reason 1: You set the wrong goals For many leaders, revenue targets are calculated by simply adding a percentage to the previous year’s turnover to show growth. While this system may seem sensible, it’s actually very wrong. When setting revenue targets, you must consider a number of factors that go beyond the achievements of the previous year (or quarter), and the current inflationary environment. Consumer behaviours change; sometimes overnight. The market adjusts and new competitors are always springing up. What’s more, a new technology could arise, bringing new challenges or rendering one of your products or services obsolete. The first step to setting accurate revenue targets is gathering all the data. Once you’ve done a thorough analysis of the market, competition, and consumer behaviour, you should look at each product or service you offer and evaluate its existing sales and potential for new sales. Setting individual targets should result in much more realistic numbers. Reason 2: Short-term thinking Pressure to show growth can cause you to rely too much on channels that deliver speedy growth. It’s easy to fall into the trap of doing things for short-term benefit, rather than building your business one brick at a time. Loads of things that are time-consuming and have no obvious short-term gain could eventually reap huge rewards – things like building an organic online presence or nurturing a business community. The demand for short-term growth can also lead you to abandon strategies that do work simply because they don’t show immediate success. There’s almost always a lag between implementing a new strategy and seeing an impact on your bottom line – often a little patience is all it takes. Reason 3: Failing to plan Having a revenue target is not the same as having a plan. At the end of the day, it’s your staff who will convert the proposed numbers into a reality. Your teams must be given the tools they need to meet your revenue targets. Have your numbers factored in a new competitor? Then your staff need to know how to market around that new competitor, and your sales teams need to know how to answer the questions they’re going to get about the competitor’s products. If it’s growth you’re after, will your current team be able to handle the extra hours needed to achieve it? Or do you…

Comments Off on Why Aren’t You Hitting Your Revenue Targets? 4 Hard Truths

Can You Afford to Work Overseas? How Double Taxation Agreements Work

“The hardest thing in the world to understand is the income tax.” (Albert Einstein) With an increasing amount of business being conducted online, it’s perfectly possible to live in one country and earn an income in another. If you are conducting services for global corporations and earning foreign income in another country, you could get caught up in a world of tricky tax situations. Under these circumstances, you can find yourself being taxed twice, both in the country where the business is conducted and here at home in Mzansi. To prevent this scenario and encourage South African residents to bring valuable foreign income into the country, the government has enacted Double Taxation Agreements (DTAs) with 79 foreign powers. If applied correctly at tax time, a DTA should mean you don’t pay tax twice. But how does this work, and just where are the pitfalls? Check your residency status Many people incorrectly believe that DTAs mean that income earned in a foreign country is taxable in that country. While the exact terms of each DTA are different, most DTAs actually give taxing rights on employment income to the residential country, unless the services are rendered elsewhere. This means that if you live in South Africa, you should pay all of your taxes in South Africa. On this basis, any taxes also paid to the government of the country in which the income was earned might qualify you for tax relief in South Africa. Surprisingly though, in some cases, and depending on the domestic legislation in the particular country, an individual may find themselves tax resident in both South African and the other country, regardless of where you live. This can have enormous implications on your legal obligations and the taxes you end up paying. Luckily, all DTAs cater for such instances, with a set of rules to apply to determine which of the two countries you will ultimately be deemed tax resident in. That’s why it’s vital to ask your accountant to first examine the laws and determine just where you are officially resident and how the specific DTA applies in your case. Do you need a tie-breaker? Some South African residents working in foreign countries should normally be given tax residency certificates by the country where they make their income. But don’t fall into the trap of assuming this means you’re not a South African tax resident. More likely you now have dual residency for tax purposes and will be required to apply a tie-breaker test under the specific terms of the relevant DTA to determine just where and how you need to pay taxes. For something that was supposed to make things simpler and decrease the tax burden on residents earning money overseas, DTAs can actually be somewhat onerous. Does the DTA even apply? The fact that there’s a DTA between South Africa and the country of your income may fool you into thinking you’re automatically exempt from paying taxes in one of the two countries, but this is…

Comments Off on Can You Afford to Work Overseas? How Double Taxation Agreements Work

Unlock the Benefits of an End-of-Year Company Review

“In the business world, the rearview mirror is always clearer than the windshield.” (Warren Buffett) Every business should conduct an extensive review of its business operations at least once a year. Doing a review allows you to track your company’s progress towards achieving its goals, to evaluate current strategies, practices and operations, and to determine what’s working and what isn’t. Think of it like going to the doctor for an annual checkup. The benefits of a year-end review A year-end review enables you to evaluate business performance across business functions and to identify trends and issues before these become serious problems. It requires checking progress on goals, objectives and key performance indicators (KPIs). This will reveal what is already working well (these processes can be enhanced and replicated), as well as what is not working – prompting you to realign the team or change tactics. All of this empowers you to chart a well-informed plan of action for the year ahead. What should be included in an annual business review? For a big-picture understanding of your business’ performance across the various business functions over the last year, a multitude of factors should be reviewed. Luckily, we can help with putting everything together. Financial reports, including: Annual financial statements and management accounts Profit and loss (P&L) statement comparing total income to total expenses Cash flow statement to identify cash flow problems and inform budgeting and spending decisions Debtors’ reports enabling proactive management of current and overdue invoices for improved cash flow Budget vs actual spending report to identify areas over or under budget Balance sheet summarising total assets and liabilities, shareholders’ equity, investments and retained earnings Company vision, mission and values Business plan covering: Market conditions, industry changes and competition Client base, changing client needs and client satisfaction Goals, objectives and KPIs (Key Performance Indicators) Current and pipeline projects, new opportunities Human resources, key roles and employee satisfaction Customer acquisition cost and lifetime value Products/services, value proposition, quality, prices and fees Sales, advertising, marketing and branding Costs and expenses, including tax liabilities Internal systems and processes, equipment, and resources Statutory documents, registrations, certifications and contracts The smartest way to benefit from a year-end review Collating all this information may seem overwhelming, but with our professional assistance it can be done quickly and efficiently. Our team will also assist you to understand the numbers and what the data says about your business. This insight will enable you to enhance or duplicate the processes that are already generating good results and to identify the changes necessary to obtain better results in other areas. It’s all about creating a solid plan for the upcoming year, so you can set your business up for greater success in 2025. Disclaimer: The information provided herein should not be used or relied on as professional advice. No liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions nor for any loss or damage arising from reliance upon any information herein. Always contact us for specific and detailed advice. © CA(SA)DotNews

Comments Off on Unlock the Benefits of an End-of-Year Company Review
Read more about the article Your Tax Deadlines for December 2024
Clock with"Taxes" folder on busy office desk.

Your Tax Deadlines for December 2024

06 December – Monthly Pay-As-You-Earn (PAYE) submissions and payments 24 December – Value-Added Tax (VAT) manual submissions and payments 30 December – Excise Duty payments 31 December – Corporate Income Tax (CIT) Provisional Tax payments 31 December – End of the 3rd fiscal quarter 31 December – Value-Added Tax (VAT) electronic submissions and payments Disclaimer: The information provided herein should not be used or relied on as professional advice. No liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions nor for any loss or damage arising from reliance upon any information herein. Always contact us for specific and detailed advice. © CA(SA)DotNews

Comments Off on Your Tax Deadlines for December 2024

6 Ways to Make the Most of Your Employees’ Performance Reviews

“Always treat your employees exactly as you want them to treat your best customers.” (Stephen R. Covey, author of ‘7 Habits of Highly Effective People’) Good business leaders recognise that regular employee performance reviews play a vital role in improving transparency, identifying talent, and enhancing performance – yet often this process is handled in a casual fashion or even not implemented at all. In fact, a recent study revealed that only 13% of employees and managers, and only 6% of CEOs, think their organisation’s performance appraisal system is useful. Even worse, 88% of respondents said their current performance review negatively impacted their opinion of the HR department. Here are six tips for turning those opinions around and getting maximum value from your performance reviews. Tip 1: Really listen During a review it’s vital that the employee feels truly understood. Data shows that leaders who come to reviews with preconceived notions and a list of complaints are more likely to have unhappy teams. A massive 85% of employees would consider quitting if they thought their review to be unfair – and there is no surer way of making someone feel unfairly treated than to brush off their side of the story and make them feel unheard. Companies should therefore focus on getting their leaders to: actively listen to employees during reviews avoid making assumptions ignore distractions such as phone calls pay attention to verbal and nonverbal cues. Tip 2: Be transparent Because performance reviews are often linked to raises and other benefits, it’s extremely important that the employee understands exactly why certain decisions were made. Giving clear, fair, specific and actionable feedback allows the employee to see how they can get a better raise next year and what they need to do to gain a promotion. Vague or unclear feedback only leads to distrust of the system – and of the company’s HR and leadership. Tip 3: Keep looking forward While the very name “performance review” suggests a look back over the course of the past year, it’s also the ideal time to project forward into the future. By using the review to set new goals and speak about career progression, your leaders will be able to motivate employees to do well. Knowing that you’re being considered for promotions or that there are rewards at the end of the tunnel is motivational. Little wonder, then, that forward-looking performance reviews have been shown to improve employee productivity by 13%. Tip 4: Your employee’s opinion matters A decent performance review is a conversation between employer and employee. It is a chance to listen as well as to speak, and this dynamic should be carried through to the very design of the review. Speak with both managers and employees about the reviews. Ask them what works and what doesn’t and encourage them to suggest things that would make the process more useful. Then actually adjust the review to accommodate these requests where possible. Employees who feel they have power and buy-in over the review…

Comments Off on 6 Ways to Make the Most of Your Employees’ Performance Reviews

What More Can We Do for You This International Accounting Day?

“Accounting is the bridge between financial chaos and structured prosperity.” (Amanda Green) International Accounting Day is celebrated on November 10 every year. The day is all about acknowledging the role of accountants in supporting businesses and the economy – at local, national and global levels. Accountants supporting the economy Accountants are integral to any economy, as they: Enable strong, sustainable, and inclusive global economic growth through quality financial reporting, auditing, and ethical behaviour. A greater number of accountants correlates to better economic performance in each measure reviewed in IFAC research. Accountants who are members of professional accountancy organisations (like SAICA), make an even more meaningful contribution, correlating to even stronger performance on the economic indicators. Source: The International Federation of Accountants (IFAC) Accountants supporting businesses At the risk of tooting our own horns, now seems a good time to remind you of the many ways that we help businesses to not only survive but also thrive. We can do this by: Translating companies’ financial data, so all stakeholders can “understand the numbers”, using accounting, aka the “language of business”. Monitoring, recording and reporting business performance. Keeping track of finances to help you manage cash flow. Enabling accurate budgeting. Ensuring compliance with laws and regulations to help you avoid penalties. Managing payrolls. Optimising your tax affairs. Facilitating informed, data-driven decisions by providing understandable financial reports that help you to: identify the most profitable products or services optimise spending allocate resources to high-growth areas. Enabling accurate forecasting of revenue and expenses, and informed financial planning. Detecting and preventing fraud by identifying red flags and investigating suspicious transactions. Reap all the benefits available! This International Accounting Day is a great opportunity to ensure that you and your business are reaping all the benefits of having a professional accountant in your corner. Simply reach out to us, and we will gladly identify areas where our expertise and experience could add further value to your business…Be it ensuring compliance, optimising tax or enabling strategic planning. Disclaimer: The information provided herein should not be used or relied on as professional advice. No liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions nor for any loss or damage arising from reliance upon any information herein. Always contact your professional adviser for specific and detailed advice. © CA(SA)DotNews

Comments Off on What More Can We Do for You This International Accounting Day?

Not Another Lanyard! How To Make the Most of Promotional Gifts

“Many companies have forgotten they sell to actual people. Humans care about the entire experience, not just marketing, sales, or service.” (Dharmesh Shah, CTO and co-founder, HubSpot) Brand awareness is at the heart of building a successful business. If your target customers, and the public at large don’t know who you are, you might as well close your doors. Promotional gifts have long been a powerful and effective element of successful marketing. But recently companies seem to be forgetting this and instead are offering their customers the cheapest thing they can stick a logo on. This attitude lowers the effectiveness of the brand campaign, and risks making your promotional gifting a total waste of money. Here are five reasons you should ask your accountant to free up the budget for a proper campaign, rather than handing out something your client is just going to put in the bin. Build a real connection By giving your customer a cheap, nearly useless gift you inadvertently send them the signal that they are unimportant to you. A well-thought-out gift that they can actually use does the opposite. This doesn’t mean you need to break the bank (although spending big for high-end clients can be well worth it). Think of items that they may need such as a torch, measuring tape, or small kitchen implement. Another great option is experiential gifting. Depending on the customer, this might be a round of golf at a sought-after course, or a bungee jumping voucher. By giving customers something they might really use (or an experience they will never forget), you make them feel like you value them as more than just a source of income. In a recent report, 58% of respondents said that they kept useful promotional gifts for more than a year, and many of them for a lot longer. Your customer becomes the advert If you’re really crafty, you’ll give people something they can actually use outside of their home. By giving folks a gift they’ll go out with, you turn them into a walking billboard for your business. An umbrella, backpack, or warm jacket that is built to last will give you many years of value as your brand will be subtly showcased at events and venues you haven’t even dreamed of. Love at first sight Many companies first meet new customers at events or expos. By giving potential customers a gift before they have even bought anything, you stand out from the horde of other companies vying for their business. Once again, you need to make your gift useful – if everyone else is doing pens and lanyards, your bottle opener, snack or kids’ toy can be the difference between blending into the crowd and being remembered when the time comes to make an enquiry. According to Giftsenda’s Customer Gifting Report for 2024, almost 85% of people who receive a promotional item remember the advertiser, with 82% of recipients saying it gave them a more favourable perception of that brand. What’s more,…

Comments Off on Not Another Lanyard! How To Make the Most of Promotional Gifts

Global Corporate Tax Changes: Advice Is More Crucial Than Ever

“Over the next few years, we are also implementing a global minimum corporate tax to limit the negative effects of tax competition.” (Enoch Godongwana, Minister of Finance, Budget 2024) There have been significant shifts in the corporate income tax landscape in South Africa and globally. Recent trends noted by the OECD and The Tax Foundation include: Statutory corporate income tax rate changes in 13 countries in 2023 A reversal of a two-decade downward trend in corporate tax rates An increase in the average global CIT rate from 20% to over 21% in the last year. Corporate tax rates have declined from the highs of an average 40% in 1980 and 28% in the early 2000s to around 21%. South Africa has also reduced its CIT rate over the years, from 30% in 2000 to 27% in 2022 – but it is still substantially above the international average. A new global tax treaty Dubbed “an historic step towards changing the financial landscape”, 110 UN Member States, including South Africa, recently voted in favour of the terms of reference for a new global tax treaty. The UN says that all 193 UN Member States could vote on a finalised UN global tax treaty as early as 2027. In the meantime, more than 140 countries have already agreed to this global minimum tax, and some have already implemented this tax reform, including South Africa. Finance Minister Enoch Godongwana announced in his 2024 Budget Speech that South Africa will be implementing the global minimum tax with effect from years of assessment commencing on or after 1 January 2024. Why a minimum global tax? Multinational companies use tax planning strategies, like moving profits to low-tax jurisdictions, to minimise their tax liabilities. A global minimum tax aims to ensure that these multinationals pay their fair share of taxes, regardless of where they operate. This limits the race to the bottom of effective corporate tax rates for large multinationals, with countries competing to attract income by offering low tax rates and tax incentives. On a social responsibility level, it goes without saying that companies should contribute fairly to the financial stability of the countries they operate in. Who is affected? A global minimum tax will ensure that any multinational enterprise group with annual revenue exceeding €750 million (+-R15 billion) will be subject to an effective tax rate of at least 15%, regardless of where its headquarters, operations, sales or profits are located. Implementation in South Africa Government plans to introduce two measures to effect this change for qualifying multinationals: The income inclusion rule applies to multinational entities headquartered in South Africa and requires a tax top-up if the effective rate in the jurisdictions the multinational entity operates in is lower than 15%. This tax is payable to SARS as opposed to the relevant jurisdiction. The domestic minimum top-up tax applies in situations where the multinational entity’s effective tax rate in respect of its South African profits is lower than 15%. In such circumstances, the South African constituent entities…

Comments Off on Global Corporate Tax Changes: Advice Is More Crucial Than Ever
Read more about the article Your Tax Deadlines for November 2024
Clock with"Taxes" folder on busy office desk.

Your Tax Deadlines for November 2024

07 November – Monthly PAYE submissions and payments 25 November – Value Added Tax (VAT) manual submissions and payments 28 November – Excise duty payments 29 November – VAT electronic submissions and payments, Corporate Income Tax Provisional Tax payments where applicable. Disclaimer: The information provided herein should not be used or relied on as professional advice. No liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions nor for any loss or damage arising from reliance upon any information herein. Always contact your professional adviser for specific and detailed advice. © CA(SA)DotNews

Comments Off on Your Tax Deadlines for November 2024

Business Owners: Have You Tried These Money-Saving Hacks?

“Beware of little expenses; a small leak will sink a great ship.” (Benjamin Franklin) When a company is struggling with cashflow, or simply looking to improve profitability, the directors will often consider making grand sweeping changes like retrenching staff, slashing the marketing budget or even selling off resources. While this kind of kneejerk reaction can provide instant gratification, it may not be the solution to your long-term struggles. Cutting back on marketing might impact future sales, for example, and end up making things even worse. That’s why it’s often a good idea to eliminate small expenses and wasteful expenditures, when you’re looking to streamline cash flow. Here are five simple ways to save money that you may not have considered. 1. Beware bank charges How did your company open its first bank account? Why did you choose that particular bank? If you haven’t thought about these things in a while, now’s a good time to start. The first step would be comparing bank charges – how much are you being charged to transact, and could you be paying less? Your accountant can help you to break down your company’s needs and find the best solution. Do you need to transact every day, or can you save money by paying off your creditors in scheduled payment runs? Would bundled services work better than transacting at will? How many credit cards do you need? Do you use overdraft facilities? The bottom line: stop paying for services you don’t need. 2. Trim the tech costs Technology is essential for running a business, but do you need (or even use) everything you currently have? Costs such as software subscriptions, fibre lines and cell phone contracts should all be looked at closely. Do you need a 200Mb/s download or will a 50Mb/s work just as well? Which of your employees really uses their company phones to generate profit? Small businesses will even benefit from looking at their software licences. Many popular work solutions have free, open-source counterparts that work very well and don’t require a monthly payment. Even if you decide you do need to pay for licences, you might be able to cut down on the number of licences. 3. Exercise office efficiency Monthly utilities may seem like something you can’t go without, but it might be wise to reconsider. Have a look at your work arrangement. Could you operate a shared desk situation for hybrid workers? Have you considered installing flow restriction nozzles on bathroom taps, and LED bulbs in the light fittings? Reducing the size of your office space and then maximising the savings attained on the utilities can save thousands each month – money that could be spent on attracting new clients. 4. Commit to your favourite vendors In business, commitment can be a cost-saving. If you have regular suppliers you’re happy with, why not speak to them about longer-term arrangements for cheaper monthly charges? Small business owners are particularly guilty of accepting supplier prices without considering the various ways these…

Comments Off on Business Owners: Have You Tried These Money-Saving Hacks?

How To Avoid an eFiling Profile Hijacking

“…it is vital that all stakeholders in the digital ecosystem, including the taxpayers, SARS, and the banks, work together to prevent and combat profile hijacking.” (SARS) The recent spike in the number of SARS eFiling profiles being hacked by cybercriminals should raise red flags for every taxpayer. It’s got so bad that the Minister of Finance has given the Office of the Tax Ombud (OTO) approval to conduct a review of SARS’ service failures in assisting taxpayers timeously with eFiling profile hijacking. This is a type of cybercrime in which fraudsters use phishing, malware, or social engineering to access and modify your personal or professional profile on a digital platform like SARS’ eFiling without your knowledge or consent. Has this ever happened to you? You receive an email, SMS, or WhatsApp, seemingly from SARS, asking you to click on a link or attachment to update your profile, verify your information, or claim a refund. It appears legitimate, and not realising it’s a fake, you just do as the message says… You receive a call from someone pretending to be a SARS official, asking you to confirm your personal details or to click on a link, and you do, not realising that it will install malware on your device… You are contacted by someone pretending to be a SARS official, offering you tax assistance or advice, and asking you to share your login credentials, OTP, or personal information with them, and you do… Fraudsters use methods like these to trick you into revealing your login credentials. An alarming number of taxpayers have fallen victim to these unscrupulous predators, despite continuous system enhancements to secure and strengthen the security of SARS’ channels. What could happen if my SARS eFiling profile is hacked? Fraudsters can access and modify your details (e.g. contact number, password) without your knowledge or consent – with serious consequences for your tax compliance and financial security. They can then also change the bank details to divert a SARS refund due to you into their own accounts. And they can even submit fraudulent returns on your behalf to claim refunds! How can I prevent profile hijacking? Prevention is far better than cure. Here are a few pointers, direct from SARS. Use a strong and unique password for your eFiling profile. Change it regularly. Don’t use the same password for other online accounts or services. Never share your login credentials, OTP, or personal information with anyone, even if they claim to be from SARS. If you hear about a security compromise at any organisation you deal with, immediately log in to your account and update your password. Always access eFiling through the official website (https://www.sars.gov.za) or the SARS eFiling mobi app. Do not click on any links or attachments in emails, SMSes or WhatsApps that claim to be from SARS, and never “confirm” or submit your login details after clicking on a link. Keep your computer and mobile devices updated with the latest security software and antivirus programs. Activate multi-factor or…

Comments Off on How To Avoid an eFiling Profile Hijacking
Read more about the article Five Signs It’s Time for a Rebrand
A stunning visual representation of transformative growth, depicting a cocoon cracking open to reveal a majestic butterfly, symbolizing personal evolution and metamorphosis.

Five Signs It’s Time for a Rebrand

“Your brand is what other people say about you when you’re not in the room.” (Jeff Bezos) You have a great product or service that fills a need. You are doing your marketing. Your accountant has helped you streamline your cashflow and provided you with your financial forecasts. You are well aware of the risks and challenges, but you are still not connecting with your customers. What could possibly be going wrong? There’s a strong chance you may need a rebrand. Here are five signs that it’s time to think of a brand refresh. 1. Your business has changed Growth is generally considered a good thing, but if you have grown too much you might have left behind the little brand you once were. Merging with competitors, bringing in new products and moving into new areas to seize opportunities can all result in your brand becoming muddled. If you’ve morphed into a jumble of different products, services and merged divisions it can become hard for your customers to work out exactly what you do. Now might be the time to bring everything under one new banner – or, alternatively, to split your brand into clearly identifiable offerings. 2. You don’t stand out from the competition If you look up your services and see a multitude of similar companies, chances are your brand is not defined well enough. If your company looks just like the others in the same sector, then how will your customers know to choose you over anyone else? You need to show the market that you are different – and a well-articulated brand offering can do just that. 3. Your business has suffered reputational damage This is a tough one for leadership to admit. Did you get off to a bad start? Did something happen that put your company in the news for the wrong reasons? Were you caught up in something unsavoury that maybe you had nothing to do with? Or were the previous owners simply incompetent? If you answered yes to any of these questions, then it’s definitely time for a brand refresh. Casting off the old image and adopting a new one is the quickest way to leave the past in the past – and it needs to happen urgently. 4. Your poll results are confusing The best thing you can do if sales aren’t living up to expectations is to start asking people why. A simple poll that asks your clients, employees, friends and family what your company does and how it could do things better could be just what the doctor ordered. If the results are inconsistent, then you have your answer: it’s time for a rebrand. Your brand narrative needs to be strong and focused if you want your audience to recognise your value. 5. You have high employee turnover We live in an age where employees want to work for companies they believe in. It follows, that companies with weaker brands and undefined missions can find it hard to hang…

Comments Off on Five Signs It’s Time for a Rebrand
Read more about the article Ready to Submit Your Interim EMP501 Reconciliation By 31 October?
Business woman putting hourglass on digital tablet closeup. Deadline concept

Ready to Submit Your Interim EMP501 Reconciliation By 31 October?

“The interim reconciliation process has become an integral part of the employer reconciliation and assists employers…” (SARS) Employers are assisted by the interim EMP501 reconciliation, says SARS, because it makes it easier to: make more accurate annual reconciliation submissions maintain an up-to-date employee database register employees for income tax purposes Of course, there are other benefits, such as maintaining your compliant tax status, and avoiding wasting money on stiff penalties and interest. It goes without saying that you want to reap all these benefits for your business. Allow us to help you to understand what needs to be done. We will be able to assist in ensuring a smooth, hassle-free submission process – even with the next deadline right around the corner. EMP501 Reconciliation fast facts All employers are required to submit an EMP501 Reconciliation There are two deadlines in each tax year. For the 2025 tax year the deadlines are: 31 October 2024 – 2025 Interim Reconciliation (for the period 1 March 2024 – 31 August 2024) 31 May 2025 – 2025 Annual Reconciliation (for the period 1 September 2024 – 28 February 2025) Potential pitfalls The EMP501 Reconciliation is an intricate process which creates many opportunities for errors: Payroll information must be verified Correct deduction of employees’ tax (PAYE), Skills Development Levy (SDL), and Unemployment Insurance Fund (UIF) contributions must be verified Deductions must reconcile with IRP5 / IT3(a) tax certificates Employment Tax Incentive (ETI) values claimed must be reconciled EMP201 returns must be reconciled with actual payments made to SARS EMP201 returns must be reconciled with EMP501 statements Employee information needs to be updated on eFiling Employees without tax numbers must be registered Employer’s Reconciliation Declaration (EMP501) needs to be submitted via the eFiling website or the e@syFile application This is an intricate and time-consuming process, and, as SARS puts it, “accuracy and timely filing are critical”. Consequences of non-compliance This is serious business. Inaccuracies or late submission can result in severe consequences. Calculating PAYE liability incorrectly will result in the imposition of both penalties and interest. This includes corrections made on the EMP501 reconciliation, as any shortfall is attributed to the last month of the reconciliation period. If an employer submits their EMP501 late, administrative penalties will be charged. The penalty will equal 1% of the year’s PAYE liability, increasing each month by 1% (up to a maximum of 10% of the year’s PAYE liability). An employer who wilfully or negligently fails to submit an EMP201 or EMP501 return to SARS is guilty of an offence and could face a fine or imprisonment for a period of up to two years. The bottom line The penalties are stiff, and the submission process is fraught with opportunities for inaccuracies and errors. We understand the importance of tax compliance to your business. And we have the expertise and experience to help ensure a smooth and stress-free submission for you.  Disclaimer: The information provided herein should not be used or relied on as professional advice. No liability can be accepted for…

Comments Off on Ready to Submit Your Interim EMP501 Reconciliation By 31 October?

Tax Deadlines

07 October – Monthly PAYE submissions and payments 21 October – End of filing season for individual taxpayers (non-provisional) 25 October – Value Added Tax (VAT) manual submissions and payments 30 October – Excise duty payments 31 October – VAT electronic submissions and payments, Corporate Income Tax Provisional Tax payments where applicable, and Personal Income Tax Top-up Provisional Tax payments. Disclaimer: The information provided herein should not be used or relied on as professional advice. No liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions nor for any loss or damage arising from reliance upon any information herein. Always contact your professional adviser for specific and detailed advice. © CA(SA)DotNews

Comments Off on Tax Deadlines

Beware the Taxman When Accessing Your Three-Pot Retirement Savings!

“The two-pot system is meant to support long-term retirement savings while offering flexibility to help fund members in financial distress.” (National Treasury) With two new pots added to what used to be the one-pot South African retirement system, fund members can now access a portion of their retirement savings before retirement, while still preserving savings for retirement. There are, however, immediate and long-term tax and other implications that should be carefully considered! The three pots of the new retirement system Tax and other issues Withdrawing from any of the pots should be approached with caution. In addition to the fees that will be charged, and the potentially devastating impact on your eventual retirement savings, there are also tax implications that must be carefully considered. It’s significantly more expensive from a tax perspective to withdraw retirement funds before retirement age (normally 55), because the Withdrawal Benefit Tax Table or Individual’s Tax Table will apply. Instead, waiting until retirement to access savings – when the Retirement Fund Lump Sum Benefits or Severance Benefits Tax Table applies – is a far better tax option. Up to R550,000 drawn as a cash lump sum at retirement may be tax free. However, this R550,000 is a cumulative withdrawal total over your lifetime. That means this tax benefit could be eroded by pre-retirement withdrawals. Transfers from the Vested and Savings pots into the Retirement pot are also tax-free. Employer contributions are still treated as taxable fringe benefits. Early withdrawals from your Savings pot are considered income and are subject to income tax as per the tax directive the fund manager will request from SARS. What’s more, any outstanding taxes you owe SARS will automatically be deducted if you make a withdrawal. Depending on your annual income and the amount withdrawn, a pre-retirement withdrawal from your Savings pot – taxed at your individual marginal tax rate – could also push you into a higher tax bracket. This would mean paying more tax on all your income for the year. Here’s an example of the potential impact of withdrawing R80,000 from your Savings pot. Waiting until retirement age to withdraw the same amount could be tax-free. Hidden costs of early withdrawals Your full retirement fund contribution (one-third Savings pot; two-thirds Retirement pot) is still tax deductible up to 27.5% of annual income, up to a maximum R350,000 per tax year. This remains one of the biggest tax breaks out there, but is effectively cancelled out by the tax payable on an early withdrawal. Early withdrawals also have another cost – the loss of tax-free growth that could have been earned on your savings. Continuing with the example above, if the R80,000 is not withdrawn, but instead left to grow at an average annual return of 10% for 25 years, the projected returns are R866,776 (equivalent to R201,958 in today’s terms assuming 6% inflation). This means you could lose tax-free growth of R121,958 by withdrawing just R80,000! Help is at hand! Understanding the tax and other implications of early retirement fund withdrawals in…

Comments Off on Beware the Taxman When Accessing Your Three-Pot Retirement Savings!
Read more about the article 5 Top Tips for Managing Debt in Your Startup
Debt Management Plan - linear text arrow concept with notebook, smartphone, pens and coffee mug on desktop - 3d render illustration.

5 Top Tips for Managing Debt in Your Startup

“There are no shortcuts when it comes to getting out of debt.” (Dave Ramsey, finance journalist and author) Most businesses have debt of some kind or another. Whether you need help to buy stock, maintain equipment or even fund a property, it’s likely that at some stage in your business’ life you will need to take out loans. The challenge comes in balancing the needs of your business with the debt you’ve taken on in a way that ensures growth. Here are our five tips for managing debt in your startup. 1. Understand your debt In order to successfully manage debt, you first need to fully understand it. As your accountants, we can help you create a complete spreadsheet of your debts detailing everything from the amounts owed, to interest rates, repayment schedules, and even penalties that may be triggered by late payments. This information will be critical for making the right choices. 2. N is for negotiate Provided you have a good relationship with your lenders, your next step should be to try to renegotiate all your loans. Asking for lower interest rates, extended repayment terms or consolidation of debts could make the whole process of debt repayment simpler. 3. Not all debts are created equal With your debts now in their healthiest place, it’s important to recognise that some debts are more important than others and thus need to be paid off first. Generally, you should aim to pay off high-interest loans first as these will cost you the most in the long run. Next you need to cover any debts which are secured by collateral – this will stop you from losing your assets in the future. Tax debts should also be prioritised as these can come with severe penalties and even criminal prosecution. Sometimes the choices are not immediately obvious, so don’t be afraid to ask us for a debt repayment schedule which factors in your business’ operating conditions, cashflow and ultimate goals. 4. Improve cash flow If you want to make sure your debt never becomes a problem, it’s vital that you improve the cash flow in your business to the point where you can meet your obligations. This can happen either through increasing sales, decreasing costs, or optimising operations – or from a combination of all three. For example, any money you can save on unnecessary expenses can go towards repaying your debt, lowering your interest payments and ultimately increasing the likelihood of success. It’s therefore essential that you work with us, your accountants, to optimise your inventory, cut costs, improve sales opportunities and chase your debtors and invoices to ensure prompt payment. 5. Monitor your debt carefully Your repayment schedule should not be set in stone. It needs to be reviewed and adjusted regularly to account for any changes in your business condition. The goal here is not to be entirely free of debt, but rather to leverage debt for improved business growth. Managing debt is an ongoing process that could very likely…

Comments Off on 5 Top Tips for Managing Debt in Your Startup

Is it Possible To Run a Successful Ethical Business?

“It takes 20 years to build a reputation and 5 minutes to ruin it. If you think about that you will do things differently.” (Warren Buffett) During tough economic times it can be tempting to illegally cut corners, hire staff at lower salaries, or avoid paying taxes you know you should be paying. The unethical approach can be very tempting if you find yourself battling to keep your business going. Taking the low road, would, however, be the wrong choice. An ethical business is one that’s transparent and honest about everything from its accounting practices, to its treatment of employees, interactions with the public, and the information it shares with shareholders. Truly ethical companies put the wellbeing of their customers and employees on par with profits. Now, backed by repeated studies, the financial experts agree that running a business ethically isn’t just better for a business’ short-term success, it’s also far more profitable in the long run. But why? Consumers demand ethical management With climate change at the forefront of every modern consumer’s thinking, the demand for sustainable, and ethical business practices has never been higher. Company business practices are now easier to scrutinise and more consumers are taking an active interest in the ethical aspects of the companies they deal with. In short, customers want to buy from ethical businesses. A recent study into consumer intent carried out by OpenText found that 88% of global consumers surveyed would rather buy from companies with ethical sourcing structures in place and that 83% of global respondents said they’d be willing to pay more for products they could be sure were ethically sourced. The trickle-down effect Moral and ethical business leadership has also been shown to reduce friction in teams and allow employees to better focus on their jobs. In a recent study, researchers at the University of Lahore revealed that supervisors who act ethically are more trusted by their employees and that this trust translates into boosted productivity from staff who are both more engaged and less emotionally exhausted. According to Gallup, teams which are highly engaged are, on average, 21% more productive and 28% less likely to steal from the company. Big Brother is watching When Volkswagen was ordered to pay back R201-billion to customers in the US who had been sold cars with falsified emissions data in 2015, the writing was on the wall for companies hoping to save money through unethical behaviour. In South Africa, you don’t need to look far for examples of large companies being brought to their knees by the unethical finance decisions of the boards. Steinhoff and Telkom have suffered for their questionable finance decisions and abusing their industry dominance respectively. And a R4.1-billion fine was issued to global software company SAP around bribes paid to South African and Indonesian officials to obtain valuable government business. The truth is, regulators are looking at companies harder than ever before, and those who think they can slip through the legal cracks are increasingly finding themselves coming…

Comments Off on Is it Possible To Run a Successful Ethical Business?
Read more about the article How to Survive Trust Tax Season 2024
Business negotiation, male partners arguing, funny easygoing man keeping calm in stressing situation, meditating with composed smile, dealing with emotional angry customer, stress management concept

How to Survive Trust Tax Season 2024

“A Trust is a ‘person’ for tax purposes and is therefore a taxpayer in its own right.” (SARS) With Tax Season 2024 for trusts opening on 16 September, there’s no better time to draw trustees’ attention to SARS’ continued emphasis that all trusts must register for income tax purposes, including dormant trusts. Once registered, trusts are obligated to submit income tax returns that are aligned with other trust reporting requirements from SARS and substantiated by extensive supporting documents and information. Trustees are held responsible for non-registration of trusts for income tax, and they will not be able to evade enforcement actions by blaming third parties for failing to file returns. “But I didn’t know I was meant to,” is not a valid excuse. Trust tax returns can be filed from 16 September 2024 (much later than the usual June/July opening) until 20 January 2025. Along with the new filing season dates, trusts also face several onerous compliance requirements – and some stiff potential penalties. Onerous requirements SARS introduced changes to the Income Tax Return for Trusts (ITR12T) last year, with additional probing questions, and even more mandatory supporting documents. The range of mandatory and supporting documents that must be submitted with the ITR12T depends on the trust type, and may include: All certificates and documents relating to income and deductions Trust Deed and Letters of Authority Resolutions/minutes of trustee meetings Details of the ‘Main’ Trustee (the SARS registered representative) Financial statements and/or administration accounts Particulars of assets and liabilities Confirmation of banking details Proof of payment of any tax credits Supporting schedules Detailed disclosure of the beneficial ownership, including the submission of identity documents of all beneficial owners. This information will be checked against the beneficial ownership register lodged with the Master of the High Court. Non-compliance could result in a trustee receiving a fine of up to R10 million, a prison sentence of up to 5 years – or both. To provide SARS with a clearer understanding of the assets, income and activities within trust structures, trust returns now feature additional questions such as any local or foreign amounts vested in the trust as a beneficiary of another trust. Information reported on the trust tax return must also align with the IT3(t) reporting of prescribed information by trusts, now also mandated by SARS. It includes trust distributions and their beneficiaries, trust and beneficiary demographic information, trust financial flows, and amounts vested in a beneficiary, including net income, capital gains and capital amounts. The first IT3(t) certificates are due to be submitted at the end of September 2024 for the 2023/24 tax year, and then on an annual basis. Despite the above reporting deadline, SARS confirmed that trust beneficiary income tax returns will not be pre-populated with IT3(t) data for the 2024 year of assessment. This means trustees must also provide details of trust beneficiaries’ 2024 trust earnings timeously to the beneficiaries for inclusion in their personal income tax returns, for which the submission deadlines remain unchanged despite the change…

Comments Off on How to Survive Trust Tax Season 2024

Your Tax Deadlines for September 2024

06 September – Monthly Pay-As-You-Earn (PAYE) submissions and payments 16 September – Start of Filing Season 2024: Trusts 25 September – Value Added Tax (VAT) manual submissions and payments 27 September – Excise duty payments 30 September – VAT electronic submissions and payments, Corporate Income Tax Provisional Tax payments where applicable, and Personal Income Tax Top-up Provisional Tax payments. Disclaimer: The information provided herein should not be used or relied on as professional advice. No liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions nor for any loss or damage arising from reliance upon any information herein. Always contact your professional adviser for specific and detailed advice. © CA(SA)DotNews

Comments Off on Your Tax Deadlines for September 2024

Do You Qualify for These Tax Rebates? Let Us Check!

“The hardest thing in the world to understand is the income tax.” (Albert Einstein)  Tax rebates, deductions and incentives provide relief to taxpayers by reducing the amount of tax payable to SARS, resulting in welcome tax savings. But how do you figure out which rebates, deductions or incentives apply to you – and what’s the procedure for claiming them? This is where we come in. Chances are we’ve already applied a number of these rebates, deductions or incentives to your tax returns. But here’s a list of some of the tax rebates, deductions and incentives that could make a substantial difference to your SARS bill for the 2024 Tax Season. Some of them are fairly wellknown, but others are pretty obscure. If you think you qualify for additional rebates, deductions or incentives, please do get in touch. We are committed to ensuring that you don’t pay more tax than you should. For individuals Tax threshold: You only start paying tax when you earn more than R95,750 (under 65 years); or R148,217 (65 - 75 years); or R165,689 (75 and older). Tax rebates: Taxpayers also qualify for a R17,235 primary rebate; an additional secondary rebate of R9,444 if over 65, and a further tertiary rebate of R3,145 if over 75.   Medical tax credits for medical scheme contributions can be deducted from your tax payable at R364 each per month for you and your first dependent, and R246 for each subsequent dependant. The additional medical expenses tax credit allows qualifying out-of-pocket medical expenses to be deducted from the normal tax payable. This applies to medical expenses that were not recovered from your medical aid.  Retirement fund contributions to a locally-registered pension, provident, or retirement annuity fund are deductible subject to certain maximum limits. Amounts received/accrued from tax-free investments are exempt from tax, subject to limitations. Donations to certain approved public benefit organisations are allowed as deductions, up to a maximum of 10% of taxable income. A solar energy tax credit of 25% of the cost of the solar PV panels (maximum R15,000) is available for new and unused solar PV panels acquired and used for the first time between 1 March 2023 to 29 February 2024. Home office expenditure: Employees who have a dedicated area used regularly and exclusively for “trade” in their home may be allowed to deduct, pro-rata, certain expenses like rent, repairs, utilities, phones and internet.  The foreign tax credit is a rebate against income tax for foreign taxes paid on foreign-sourced income.  Taxpayers carrying on a business in their individual capacity or in partnership may deduct business expenditure or losses on the same basis as companies. For businesses Tax relief measures for small business corporations (SBCs) allows for a progressive tax rate, immediate write-off of new plant or machinery, and a wear-and-tear or accelerated allowance on depreciable assets. Tax relief for qualifying micro businesses involves a simplified turnover tax, instead of the usual taxes (income tax, provisional tax and Capital Gains Tax) payable by companies. Energy efficiency savings incentive provides a deduction for savings from implementing energy-efficient methods in the production…

Comments Off on Do You Qualify for These Tax Rebates? Let Us Check!

When Should Your Company Be Cautious of AI?

“Artificial intelligence is just a new tool, one that can be used for good and for bad purposes and one that comes with new dangers and downsides as well.” (Sarah Jeong, information and technology journalist) Using powerful data analytics and pattern recognition, Artificial intelligence (AI) has become the latest buzzword in every business on the planet. If you looked hard enough, you could probably find an AI solution for every application a business could need (and a few no business could ever need!). Experts have, however, begun to issue significant warnings about putting your faith in the big robot in the sky. Here are three situations where companies should be cautious of using AI. When expertise is neededDon’t be fooled by the name: AI is not truly intelligent. Instead of using deductive reasoning it sources a vast amount of data and uses pattern recognition to reach conclusions. This means that AI is only as good as the data it’s given. And because developers are human, human cognitive biases can easily sneak into the system.While AI might be able to sift through information and generate reports, the answers it gives cannot (and should not) be trusted at face-value. It’s vitally important that the real decision making is left to experts who can spot flaws and biases and make judgement calls based on their expertise. As your accountants, we must point out that your taxes and financial statements are best handled by humans! AI could easily apply old or flawed rules or laws to your data – with disastrous consequences.Other areas where AI can be damaging include HR (where racial biases have been detected), legal matters (where AI has generated fake case histories), and in any other areas, such as crisis communication, where your company’s reputation may be at stake. When dealing with confidential dataAI tools are public and no matter what protections are put on them there’s no guarantee that the information you enter won’t find its way back into the public space. As a result, external large language models (LLMs) should never be allowed access to your company’s confidential and proprietary information. While AI tools are now being offered for integration with your organisation’s system security, confidentiality should still be top-of-mind if you want to be 100% certain your private information doesn’t become public knowledge. This is a classic case of better safe than sorry.  When a decision calls for ethics or contextAI makes decisions with no consideration of emotions or morals, so it goes without saying that it’s a bad idea to leave ethical or moral decisions in the hands of the machine. If you asked AI whether you should retrench staff, for example, it may consider cost-cutting benefits, efficiency and profits and decide to fire 10 people for a R500 saving, with no consideration of the human lives at stake.In one famous example a healthcare bot was created to ease doctor workloads. During testing, a fake patient asked the bot whether it should kill itself and was told,…

Comments Off on When Should Your Company Be Cautious of AI?

Top Tips for a Hassle-Free Tax Season 2024

“We urge taxpayers to be transparent and accurate when filing their tax returns to enable a constructive relationship with SARS.” (Edward Kieswetter, SARS Commissioner) July 15 marked the start of the 2024 Filing Season for provisional and non-provisional taxpayers who were not subjected to auto-assessments, covering the tax period 1 March 2023 to 29 February 2024. As part of our quest to simplify your life, we’ve compiled a list of the timelines and the changes since last year. But first, here are five ways we can help you this tax season. 5 ways we’ve got your back We can help you avoid non-compliance. SARS has warned that the use of technology and data has enhanced its ability to detect non-compliance such as, for example, not including rental income in a return, which could potentially make you guilty of fraud. Our team is up to date with the many changes in tax legislation introduced each year and our understanding of the complexities and intricacies will streamline your filing season. We ensure all the boxes are ticked on every tax return you need to submit. This will help you to avoid a SARS audit where possible, and to ensure any verification or audit can be concluded quickly and cost-effectively. We make sure that you claim every tax rebate, deduction or incentive available to you, so you don’t under-claim and pay more tax than required. We protect you from scams. Sadly, filing season is also scamming season. We are alerted about all the latest scams and keep your information with SARS updated to prevent fraud and identity theft. Dates to diarise Changes to take note of Various changes have been made since last year – the quickest way to find out if any of these apply to you or your business is simply to contact us. The pool of auto-assessed taxpayers increased to about 4.8 million this year, compared to around 3.8 million taxpayers last year. A solar energy tax credit of 25% of the cost of the solar PV panels (maximum R15,000) is available for new and unused solar PV panels acquired and brought into use for the first time by individuals between 1 March 2023 and 29 February 2024. Pro rata retirement fund contribution deductions are now allowed if an individual taxpayer’s year of assessment is less than 12 months. Exemption of tax-free investment amounts received or accrued: if your year of assessment is less than 12 months, the applicable contribution limit (currently R36,000) will be applied pro rata. Deductions in respect of buildings in Urban Development Zones – the allowable deduction has been extended until 31 March 2025. There’s a redesigned renewable energy tax deduction for certain machinery, plant, implements, utensils and articles used in production of renewable energy. ITR12 Form changes affecting the foreign employment income exemption and Beneficial Owner (BO). The bottom line If this is all a tad confusing, fret not! Our team of seasoned tax professionals will make all the difference this filing season. We are…

Comments Off on Top Tips for a Hassle-Free Tax Season 2024

Five Foolproof Tips for Onboarding Remote Employees

“Employee orientation centres around and exists to help the individual employee, but it is the company that ultimately reaps the benefits of this practice.” (Michael Watkins, author of “The First 90 Days”) Onboarding a new employee is always a delicate task. And it’s a whole lot trickier (and arguably more important) if your new hire is going to be working remotely. Here are our tips for getting your new remote employee – let’s call her Sharon – up-and-running with minimal fuss. Plan ahead Remote onboarding starts long before you click the link for your first online meeting. By the time Sharon’s first day at the company dawns, you should already have sent her a package containing everything she needs to do her job. This package might include a laptop, cell phone, webcam and headphones – all set up and ready to use with your chosen software. It’s also a nice idea to include a personalised welcome letter, a small gift like a coffee mug, and an employee handbook containing useful contacts and company procedures. Go digital It goes without saying that all your onboarding material now needs to be digital – both for you to use during online meetings and to send to Sharon for her own reference. If you have the resources, consider making each learning section into a small video, which you can put online (it doesn’t have to be Hollywood standard). As your accountants, we can provide you with the information you need to create a digital FAQ on all matters regarding payment, taxes, bonuses and raises. You can also create a digital checklist for employees to complete that includes items like “Set up email address” and “Fill in medical aid details”. Tell them a thousand times The key to any successful onboarding is to make sure the important information has been properly understood. Don’t be afraid of telling Sharon something twice, or even ten times if that’s what it takes. If possible, assign her an experienced co-worker who can act as a buddy to answer questions in a friendly and accessible way. This is handy when she wants to know something simple and doesn’t want to bother you. Show them around Make sure you schedule at least one meeting for Sharon to meet her team. Everyone should be there to introduce themselves and give Sharon a friendly virtual tour of your office or facilities. This warm, face-to-face introduction will help her feel at home. Encourage ongoing communication Working remotely, it’s easy to forget there are others around you. In the first few weeks, schedule regular meetings with Sharon simply to see how she’s settling in. Ask her if she’s having any challenges and give her feedback on her progress. Addressing concerns and correcting errors early on will ensure they don’t become entrenched – but be careful not to dent Sharon’s confidence. You can also use her feedback to improve your own onboarding process. We’re here to help Onboarding a remote employee is usually a new experience,…

Comments Off on Five Foolproof Tips for Onboarding Remote Employees

Your Tax Deadlines for August 2024

07 August – Monthly Pay-As-You-Earn (PAYE) submissions and payments 23 August – Value Added Tax (VAT) manual submissions and payments 29 August – Excise duty payments 30 August – VAT electronic submissions and payments, Corporate Income Tax Provisional payments where applicable, and Personal Income Tax Provisional payments. Disclaimer: The information provided herein should not be used or relied on as professional advice. No liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions nor for any loss or damage arising from reliance upon any information herein. Always contact your professional adviser for specific and detailed advice. © CA(SA)DotNews

Comments Off on Your Tax Deadlines for August 2024

7 Effective Business Lessons Inspired by Madiba

“We can in fact change the world and make of it a better place.” (Nelson Mandela) Rolihlahla Mandela was born into the Madiba clan in Mvezo, Transkei, on 18 July 1918. He was given the name Nelson by a teacher on his first day at school. Affectionately known as Tata, grandfather of the Rainbow Nation, Mandela is best remembered for successfully leading South Africa’s transition from apartheid to a multiracial democracy. Mandela is the only person honoured by the United Nations with his own international day: Nelson Mandela Day on 18 July each year. On this day people around the world honour Mandela’s contributions and humanitarian work by following the example he set. He donated half of his presidential salary and part of his Nobel prize money to help street children. And he established the Nelson Mandela Children’s Fund which continues his legacy by focussing on education, HIV/AIDS and ‘peace and reconciliation’. Nelson Mandela’s life and words of wisdom provide inspiration that can help you lead your business to greater success. 1. “Everyone can rise above their circumstances and achieve success if they are dedicated to and passionate about what they do.” Passion and dedication are crucial to successful business: passion drives innovation and creativity, and dedication keeps you going when things get tough. 2. “Vision without action is just a dream, action without vision just passes the time, vision with action can change the world.” As an entrepreneur or business owner, vision is vital. But it doesn’t count for anything if you and your team don’t take action to make it a reality. 3. “The mark of great leaders is the ability to understand the context in which they are operating and act accordingly.” Today’s business context is more complex, multifaceted, and fast-changing than ever before, requiring agility in both decision making and execution. 4. “After climbing a great hill, one only finds that there are many more hills to climb.” Entrepreneurship and business ownership inherently entail challenge after challenge, day after day, year after year. Expect and embrace challenges, focussing on finding the opportunities they hold. 5. “The brave man is not he who does not feel afraid, but he who conquers that fear.” We all face many kinds of fears all the time: fear of failure, disappointment, the unknown, even of success. What sets entrepreneurs and business owners apart is that they don’t allow fear to stop them – they are brave enough to try, to step out, to take the risk … despite the fear. 6. “Education is the most powerful weapon which you can use to change the world.” Continuously educate yourself to better manage and grow your business. Also educate and upskill your employees on an ongoing basis: offer mentorships, internships, learnerships and apprenticeships; facilitate capacity building for Non-Governmental Organisations (NGOs); and sponsor schools or scholarships in the community or in your industry. 7. “Overcoming poverty is not a task of charity, it is an act of justice.” Even small businesses can make a meaningful contribution, and…

Comments Off on 7 Effective Business Lessons Inspired by Madiba

How to Breeze Through a SARS Audit

“The aim of a tax audit is to determine if the taxpayer has complied with the relevant legislation administered by SARS.” (SARS) During a tax audit, SARS examines financial statements, accounting records and supporting documents to check if you or your business correctly declared your tax position on a tax return. If you didn’t submit a return, an audit will investigate if your actions complied with tax law. Either way, being selected for an audit – whether for income tax, VAT, employees’ tax or capital gains tax – poses significant risk. What are the risks of an audit? A substantial amount of time, cost and effort can be required to collate the information, documents and clarifications needed to complete an audit … Especially if the audit spans several years. If you don’t submit the requested audit information, SARS will raise a revised assessment, determining the amount of your tax liability or refund, based on an estimate from information readily available or obtained from a third party, even if this information is incomplete. What’s more, an audit can lead to the levying of understatement penalties of up to 200% of the shortfall where an understatement occurred. The 200% penalty is levied in instances where the taxpayer is either a repeat offender or is being obstructive and  is also guilty of intentionally evading taxes. Worst case scenario An audit can even result in criminal proceedings. It’s a criminal offence to refuse or neglect to supply relevant material requested by SARS without just cause. And remember: SARS is no longer required to prove that a taxpayer wilfully committed a tax crime – taxpayers can now be found guilty of a tax crime if a mistake was made, or in cases of negligence. The risk is intensifying SARS audits are increasingly common. Any taxpayer can be selected for audit, based on any consideration, including on a random or cyclical basis, or on a risk assessment basis. Even tax-compliant companies and individuals that get clean audits every year are regularly audited. Taxpayers are flagged for audit through SARS’ sophisticated case selection methodology. The taxpayers most likely to be audited include those who earn additional income and those whose tax returns do not align with information from other sources, for example, where there is a mismatch between the annual turnover and the VAT declarations for the year. The audit process A Notification of Audit letter provides the initial scope of the audit, documents required, and details of the SARS auditor. SARS can request additional material at any time, and they can obtain information from third parties. SARS prefers to receive audit documents electronically via eFiling or for them to be submitted at a SARS branch, but collection or delivery of documents can be arranged. An audit can take between 30 business days and 12 months to complete – or even longer in some cases. The time taken to complete an audit depends on the complexity of the specific case. SARS will provide progress reports on the audit…

Comments Off on How to Breeze Through a SARS Audit

5 Top Employee Retention Strategies

“People want to know they matter and they want to be treated as people. That’s the new talent contract.” (Pamela Stroko, Vice President, HCM Transformation & Thought Leadership at Oracle Corporation) Any business leader knows that hiring the best team possible is the first step to success, so it stands to reason that keeping them around is just as important. What’s more, finding, hiring and training new employees is an expensive process. As the world becomes increasingly connected, the battle for top talent has expanded beyond the city you’re based in. On top of this, job apps have made it even easier for your employees to find work elsewhere if they are not entirely happy. This has all put employee retention in the spotlight. What are employees looking for? What makes them stay? And just what does your business need to do to keep your best staff on your books? These five tips will help regardless of the kind of business you run. Level up For a long time, business management experts recommended employing outside of the company. This advice has now changed completely: Experts now say you should promote your existing staff. Your employees want to grow in their careers. Of course they do. While they might be happy now, if there’s no opportunity for advancement they’ll soon start looking elsewhere. A 2018 report found that 93% of employees would have stayed at their jobs longer if those companies had invested in their careers. Teach a man to fish Employees also benefit from personal and professional skills growth. It’s vital to ensure your team is up to date on the latest technologies, but it’s also important to facilitate growth in directions of their own choosing. This doesn’t just benefit them – it also brings new skills into your company. By giving your staff time to attend conferences, giving them study leave, or paying for continuing education you are guaranteed to improve your team and keep your employees for the longest possible time. You should also consider implementing a mentorship system where newcomers and younger staff are tutored and advised by senior staff members. Studies show that mentorship benefits both the new arrival and the old hand. Family matters Since the pandemic, people have become much more precious about their personal lives. If you acknowledge that your employees have lives beyond the office (fancy that!) you’re far more likely to retain them. Flexible working hours, remote offices, and even childcare support are now vital if you hope to keep employees in the long term. If you run a business where remote work isn’t possible, why not consider flexitime, or a shorter work week instead? Removing the stress your employees feel over their families has the added advantage of making them perform better when they are in the office. Pound of flesh Gone are the days where you could forbid employees to talk about their salaries. Income information is freely available, and your employees are constantly checking their earnings against those…

Comments Off on 5 Top Employee Retention Strategies

Is Venture Capital Right for Your Business?

“One of the fun things about venture capital is you are constantly learning new ideas and strategies from one business and then applying them to others.” (Joe Lonsdale, technology entrepreneur and investor) At its simplest, the term Venture Capital (VC) simply refers to capital that’s invested in any business or project where there’s an element of risk. Typically, this refers to innovative new companies, but it can also refer to money invested in everything from opening a new branch, to updating your factory or building a new wing on your restaurant. Every deal you see on Dragons Den is a venture capital deal. It’s true that venture capitalists tend to invest in companies that look likely to disrupt big markets, and those with patentable ideas or innovative services. But VC funding is an option for all businesses. It’s usually offered in exchange for a minority stake in your business. If you’re considering VC for your business, you need to understand the pros and cons. Advantages of VC Show me the money Venture capitalists can provide the funding necessary to either build your start-up from scratch or to expand your existing business. The cash can come in a single lumpsum payment or through additional funding rounds as needed. Learning curve Because they’ve often had experience working with similar companies, venture capitalists can offer strategic and operational guidance to help your business thrive. It’s all about who you know Most venture capitalists bring a valuable network of contacts. They can often assist with hiring key personnel, accessing international markets, connecting with strategic partners, and co-investing with other firms when you need more funding. Disadvantages of VC It’s a control thing When you take money from a venture capitalist, you gain a new business partner, and you lose a portion of your ownership and control. Depending on the deal, this could mean you’re now working with someone whose methods are different to yours and who may want to take the company in a different direction. Pressure to sell Venture capitalists usually earn their money when a company “exits”, either through a sale, or an Initial Public Offerings (IPO). It goes without saying that they can often have different goals and ideals to you, the business owner – especially if you want to own and run your own business indefinitely. Grow – or else Venture capitalists may come with stringent requirements on growth: how fast they expect it to happen, and which targets they need to hit by certain dates. Depending on your contract, you may find the funding you expected is not released when the goals are missed. VC has some large positives and can be a massive help to both new and existing business. However, it does also come with some large concessions. If you are considering VC in your business, speak with us. We can help you determine the best way to meet your needs and your business goals. Disclaimer: The information provided herein should not be used or relied on as professional advice.…

Comments Off on Is Venture Capital Right for Your Business?

Your Tax Deadlines for July 2024

05 July – Monthly Pay-As-You-Earn (PAYE) submissions and payments 25 July – Value-Added Tax (VAT) manual submissions and payments 30 July – Excise Duty payments 31 July – Corporate Income Tax (CIT) Provisional Tax payments 31 July – Value-Added Tax (VAT) electronic submissions and payments. Disclaimer: The information provided herein should not be used or relied on as professional advice. No liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions nor for any loss or damage arising from reliance upon any information herein. Always contact your professional adviser for specific and detailed advice. © CA(SA)DotNews

Comments Off on Your Tax Deadlines for July 2024

Use This SARS Incentive to Bring Young People into Your Business

“The employment tax incentive is aimed at encouraging employers to hire young and less experienced work seekers.” (SARS Employers ETI Guide) With Youth Day celebrations around the corner, business owners have an opportunity not only to consider unlocking the benefits of having young workers in their teams, but also to make a difference to South Africa’s dismal youth employment rate. What are the benefits of hiring young employees? More likely to be technologically savvy, younger employees have a positive impact on the adoption and use of new software and technology in a company. They also give companies that target the millennial market an advantage, as they can reach and communicate with their peers. Wages for young employees are lower, making them the cost-effective choice for entry-level positions, freeing up experienced workers for strategic level work. Younger people are better equipped to respond to sudden change and unexpected circumstances. Companies have an opportunity to develop a workforce specifically trained to meet their business needs and culture. Young workers bring paradigm shifting ideas, fresh perspectives and different ways of thinking and working to their organisations. Youthful energy, enthusiasm and creativity are great for team building, productivity and workplace morale. Used to formal learning, young people tend to absorb training more readily. Most young workers are eager to learn, build their experience and apply their skills. Source: Unicef One option businesses should consider to enable them to take on more young workers into their companies is to use the ETI incentive from SARS. What is ETI? The Employment Tax Incentive (ETI) is a tax concession encouraging employers to hire more young people aged between 18 and 29 years. It reduces the employer’s cost of hiring young people through a cost-sharing mechanism with government while leaving the earnings received by the employee unaffected. This incentive offers a wide benefit. Employers are financially incentivised to hire more young people, and young people gain valuable work skills and experience, benefiting the wider economy. It complements existing government programmes with similar objectives e.g. learnership agreements, and it will be available until 28 February 2029. Who qualifies for ETI? Employers who: are registered for Employees’ Tax (PAYE) are tax compliant meet these qualifying criteria on an ongoing basis. It is however important to note that certain employers (e.g. those in the national, provincial or local sphere of government and certain public entities) are specifically excluded from utilising the ETI. Employees who: have a valid South African ID or permit are aged between 18 and 29 years old earn between minimum wage or R2000 and R6500 for a 160-hour month who are not domestic workers or “connected persons” to their employers meet these qualifying criteria on an ongoing basis. Employers operating within a Special Economic Zone will, provided they meet certain criteria, not be subject to the age limitation highlighted in the second bullet. How does ETI work? ETI can be claimed for a 24-month period for all employees who qualify. The monthly value for the ETI reduces the amount of…

Comments Off on Use This SARS Incentive to Bring Young People into Your Business

How to Implement Effective Leadership Development in your Business

“Leadership and learning are indispensable to each other.” (John F. Kennedy) The world of work is changing, rapidly. With more teams made up of diverse people from a wide variety of locations, leadership these days has become less about personal relationships and more about managing across distance and effective organisation. Leaders in this world need skills they had never considered previously, and companies need to train them. Despite companies spending hundreds of billions of rands in leadership training globally, 63% of millennials feel their leadership were letting them down and only 27% of leaders believe they are equipped to lead hybrid teams. Here’s what you should be thinking about when implementing leadership development in your organisation. 1. Analysis and Assessment In order to build leadership capacity for the future, the first thing you should do is look at your organisation’s unique values, challenges, and priorities. Are you looking to increase profits, cut costs, improve employee retention or mitigate risks? Remember, your analysis needs to focus not only on what’s happening now, but on the coming changes in your industry and your goals for where you want to be in the future. Doing this will then allow you to take a closer look at the skills of your leaders as they currently stand and determine which leadership skills are most lacking. 2. Research The next step is choosing which leadership training organisations to partner with. There is currently no shortage of leadership development resources, speakers and organisations that offer training. The resources you work with should be vetted, relevant, and applicable to learning goals you established in the analysis phase. In order to ensure you are getting the best possible course you should evaluate the course material and format and research the course instructors. Who is offering this course? Do they have the requisite experience? When it comes to making a difference, instructors with a strong educational foundation and relevant qualifications will always trump the charismatic author with multiple tattoos and a matric. As your accountants, we are able to help you build a training budget, which can help prioritise training and ensure you get the most impact from your spend. 3. Involve your seniors You and your senior leaders understand leadership in the context of the company better than most and as such should play a mentorship role in the development of future leaders. Training engagement has been shown to increase dramatically for attendees when it is their leader who is among the teachers, so don’t be afraid to engage your team as an active part of the process. This will also help you too. By taking part you will also be aware of the course content and can more easily spot teachable moments during the day-to-day running of the company, reinforce the lessons in their mentorship sessions and better spot those who are implementing the lessons in their own personal development. 4. Inform your employees Building future leaders is about spotting talent, then using the training to position that…

Comments Off on How to Implement Effective Leadership Development in your Business

Quick Tips for Preventing Time Fraud

“Fraud and deceit are anxious for your money. Be informed and prudent” (John Andreas Widtsoe, scientist, author and religious leader) While accountants have become adept at spotting and preventing financial fraud simply by analysing a company’s books, there is another kind of fraud that needs alert leadership, record keeping and careful analysis to completely snuff out. Time fraud sounds like a concept from a sci-fi movie, but in reality, it’s actually quite a simple concept. Like with those who commit regular fraud, a time fraudster is purposefully stealing from the company, but what they are stealing is a much less tangible asset – time. Time fraud is any kind of employee behaviour that knowingly steals time from a company. It could be as minor as taking an extra smoke break, or purposefully arriving late, but can also involve using extended company time for side projects, and even illegally clocking in for shifts that weren’t worked. The 10-10-80 rule of business fraud says that 10% of employees will never cheat a company, 80% will cheat a company under the right circumstances and 10% are always actively looking for ways to cheat the company. This means that if it is unchecked time fraud can become a companywide problem that chokes profitability, irritates customers and destroys team morale. Here are our tips for making sure it doesn’t destroy your company. Spotting time fraud Recognising the red flags Detecting time fraud is about watching patterns. An employee who comes in late occasionally is not a fraudster, one who comes in late every day just might be. Catching a time fraudster therefore requires you to pay close attention to the employee’s behaviour. Sometimes honest employees can be guilty of one or more of these things, dependent on their skill level or job requirements, but if they are adding up, you are likely looking at a thief. Is the employee regularly claiming they worked long hours, but getting very little done? Do they frequently miss deadlines? Are there inconsistencies in their time tracking or billable hours records? What are the employee’s colleagues saying about their efforts? The fraud triangle Fraud criminologist Donald R. Cressey has developed what he calls the Fraud triangle, a tool businesses can use to determine which employees are most likely to commit any kind of fraud, including time theft. As the name suggests, the fraud triangle asks managers to pay particular attention to employees who exhibit any of these three components: Motivation: People with motivation to commit time fraud are more likely to do it. Motivation covers a wide range of incentives from the receptionist with a new boyfriend she loves chatting to on the phone, to the ambitious go-getter who is trying to start their own side-hustle. Opportunity: Opportunity is much more common now when so many people work from home. Employees who would be able to indulge in time fraud without comment are much more likely to infringe. Rationalisation: Again, employees who are able to rationalise their time theft are much…

Comments Off on Quick Tips for Preventing Time Fraud
Read more about the article Employers: Your COIDA Return of Earnings Deadline is 30 June 2024
Close-up Of Businesswoman With White Bandage Hand Filling Work Injury Claim Form On Wooden Desk

Employers: Your COIDA Return of Earnings Deadline is 30 June 2024

“The Compensation Fund is mandated to provide social security to the injured-on-duty employees and those who contracted diseases at the workplace.” (Compensation Fund Annual Report 2021/2022) By law, all employers are compelled to register for COIDA (Compensation for Occupational Injuries and Diseases Act No. 130 of 1993) within 7 days of employing their first employee. COIDA provides for compensation for disablement caused by occupational injuries or diseases sustained or contracted by employees during the course of their employment, or for death resulting from such injuries or diseases, in which case the dependents can claim compensation. Without this ‘insurance’, employers are held liable for the costs of an injured employee’s medical treatment and are also open to civil claims in respect of medical costs and compensation for loss of earnings, permanent disablement, death and even pension payments. In addition, failure to comply with the provisions of COIDA constitutes a criminal offense. On the other hand, employers that meet the requirements and have paid the assessment fees can request a Letter of Good Standing (LOGS), a document often required when tendering for substantial projects or new business. To access this ‘insurance’ for their employees, employers are required to register and contribute a fee to the Compensation Fund (CF) each year. In doing so, employers must also submit a Return of Earnings (ROE) every year. The ROE is a declaration of employees’ earnings for the past year, made by the employer to the Compensation Fund, and the ROE for the 2023 assessment period is now due at the end of June for all employers. What must be done Register with the Compensation Fund, if not yet registered. The 12-digit CF registration number starting with 99 is required for submissions and payments. Prepare the required information to be submitted for the 2023 assessment period, which extended from 1 March 2023 to 29 February 2024. Earnings to be included in the declaration are regular overtime, regular bonusses (e.g. annual bonusses), cash value of fringe benefits and earnings or drawings paid to working company directors or members of close corporations. For each month, actual earnings for the period, and head count including directors and members. Projected earnings and head count for the year ahead. Submit the Return of Earnings (ROE), also known as the 2A Form (W.As.8), as well as the list of required supporting documents, within the deadline. Make sure the correct nature of business or assessment tariff subclass is used. There are more than a hundred subclasses, each with its own assessment tariff based on the risks associated with the type of work. The annual assessment fee is calculated with the relevant assessment tariff and on workers’ earnings. (Formula Assessment Fee = total workers’ pay ÷ 100 x assessment tariff) In addition, if an employer’s accident costs are higher than others in the same subclass, the assessment tariff may be increased. If costs are lower, the rate may be reduced. Ensure a Notice of Assessment/Invoice (W.As.6) is received, showing the amount owing to the…

Comments Off on Employers: Your COIDA Return of Earnings Deadline is 30 June 2024

Your Tax Deadlines for June 2024

07 June – Monthly Pay-As-You-Earn (PAYE) submissions and payments 25 June – Value-Added Tax (VAT) manual submissions and payments 27 June – Excise Duty payments 28 June – Corporate Income Tax (CIT) Provisional Tax payments 28 June – End of the 1st fiscal quarter 28 June – Value-Added Tax (VAT) electronic submissions and payments. Disclaimer: The information provided herein should not be used or relied on as professional advice. No liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions nor for any loss or damage arising from reliance upon any information herein. Always contact your professional adviser for specific and detailed advice. © CA(SA)DotNews

Comments Off on Your Tax Deadlines for June 2024
Read more about the article Your Employer Annual Declaration is Due by 31 May
May 31 written on a calendar to remind you an important appointment.

Your Employer Annual Declaration is Due by 31 May

“Failure by an employer to comply with its obligations does not only harm that employer and the fiscus, but also employees. SARS vigorously pursues employers that fail to comply.” (SARS) Employers must submit their annual reconciliation declarations (EMP501) with accurate and up-to-date payroll information about their employees by 31 May this year. This is among the requirements imposed on employers by the Fourth Schedule to the Income Tax Act: deducting or withholding employees’ tax from remuneration, paying the above to SARS monthly before the 7th of the following month, reconciling employees’ tax during the annual and the interim reconciliation, and issuing tax certificates (IRP5s/IT3(a)s) to employees timeously. A SARS focus area The employer-reconciliation process is a focus area for SARS, not only to ensure compliance among employers, but also because it enables SARS to issue individuals with income tax auto-assessments. SARS uses the IRP5/IT3(a) certificate information submitted by employers through the annual reconciliation process to prepopulate the employees’ annual income tax returns (ITR12), and employees cannot change this information. This means the employer-reconciliation process is also a key phase in the Income Tax Filing Season, because incomplete or incorrect information will make it difficult for employees to fulfil their tax obligations and because employees require IRP5 and IT3 certificates to file their income tax returns in time during tax season. As such, SARS says it vigorously pursues employers that fail to comply and, where necessary, aims to make tax non-compliance hard and costly through hard enforcement, for example, court action, asset seizure and criminal prosecution. What needs to be done? Register employees who are not registered for income tax. Review the year’s EMP201 declarations that declare the total tax liability for each tax period for: Employees’ Pay-As-You-Earn (PAYE) tax, Unemployment Insurance Fund contributions (UIF), Skills Development Levy (SDL) Employment Tax Incentive (ETI) amounts (if applicable). Submit any outstanding monthly declarations (EMP201) and settle all payments due to avoid administrative penalties for non-compliance or late submission, and to reduce interest charges on delayed or outstanding amounts. Ensure the values on the EMP201 declarations and on the tax certificates balance to the actual payments made to SARS. If any discrepancies are identified in the EMP201 declarations, these must be corrected when submitting the EMP501. The EMP501 Annual Reconciliation Declarations must include: Monthly employer declarations (EMP201). Information about payments made (excluding penalties and interest paid). Employee tax certificates (IRP5/IT3(a) generated) covering the tax year from 1 March 2023 to 29 February 2024. Monitor the status of your submission to ensure the EMP501 has been successfully filed with SARS – a submission rejected as incomplete or due to a data error is considered not to have been submitted, and the taxpayer will be liable for non-compliance penalties. Keep accessible employer records with a register that contains each employee’s personal details and financial records as prescribed by the Commissioner for at least five years. Also complete the interim reconciliation process in September/October each year to enable an easier and more accurate annual reconciliation submission and an up-to-date…

Comments Off on Your Employer Annual Declaration is Due by 31 May

How and When to Save a Struggling Start-Up

“Failure is simply the opportunity to begin again, this time more intelligently.”- (Henry Ford, founder of Ford Motor Company) Data from StatsSA has shown that more than 1,500 businesses closed their doors for good in South Africa last year. This can come as no surprise to anyone who conducts business in South Africa at the moment, with spiralling costs, high interest rates and other tough market conditions that include frequent load shedding at short notice. It is therefore highly likely that all business leaders will go through tough times and for those with start-ups they can often seem insurmountable. If your start-up is one of those failing businesses the first thing you need to do is determine if the company is worth the extra energy, investment and effort required to save it, and if the answer is yes, then take our steps below to ensure that happens. Save or close? The first step to deciding whether to save a company is to work out the root cause of the troubles. Often this will take a team of outsiders, but a conversation with us as your accountants should be the first step. We can help you quickly assess whether your troubles come from external issues such as competition, market conditions or new regulations, or whether they are from internal issues such as poor management, a high level of debt, bad hires or inadequate equipment. Next you need to be brutally honest with yourself. What was it that made you enter the market? What made you unique? Are these things still true? Is your product obsolete? And is your business still capable of turning a profit? Assuming you believe profit is still achievable, then the next step is a full evaluation of the finances, from assets to debits and invoices outstanding, so you can find out just how bad things are. From there, we can help you work out the costs of necessary adjustments. Do you need restructuring? New equipment? Or new staff? What will it cost to fix, and do you have the ability to go through the necessary changes? You will need to carefully consider all these steps. You have invested a lot of effort and emotion into this company, and making these decisions rationally can therefore be hard. Having brought advisors onboard, you now need to actually listen to what they have to say. If you have completed all the steps before this and still want to go on, then ask yourself one final question. Are there alternatives? Is there anyone who would buy the company? A competitor who might consider a merger? And why would one of these options not be better than you keeping things going? It is important to consider all of these options, so that when you commit you know you are on the right path. If, after all of this, you are still determined to save the business, here is what you need to do: Rank your challenges Being in a start-up can be overwhelming.…

Comments Off on How and When to Save a Struggling Start-Up

Beneficial Ownership Registers – Now Mandatory with CIPC Annual Returns

“It is imperative that ALL companies and close corporations ensure compliance with the beneficial ownership filing requirements, to ensure good corporate governance and business continuity.” (CIPC) Following changes to the Companies Act on 24 May 2023, company directors and members of close corporations are obliged to lodge and maintain a detailed Beneficial Ownership (BO) Register, along with a list of supporting documents with the CIPC (Companies and Intellectual Property Commission). This register and documents must also be kept up to date within tight timelines and verified annually. Pre-existing companies with their anniversary date after the promulgation of the amended Companies Regulations were required to file their beneficial ownership information with their annual returns. Registers for new companies and amendments must be lodged within 10 days. This means that all entities in CIPC’s register must have filed their beneficial ownership information by 24 May 2024 – one year since it became mandatory. The Commission, citing a huge number of non-compliant entities that are yet to file their beneficial ownership and/or securities register information, is enforcing compliance by implementing more serious consequences. Consequences of non-compliance   A new “hard-stop functionality” has been implemented by the Commission. That will prevent any non-compliant entities from filing their annual returns, which brings its own consequences. The late filing of annual returns will incur penalties. Banks, service providers or customers often require businesses to have up-to-date annual returns before engaging in business. The Commission will take further and necessary enforcement actions with regards to entities which continue to be non-compliant, such as: investigation into the administration and governance processes of non-compliant business, issuing of compliance notices; and/or referral for deregistration and even final deregistration due to non-compliance. It is also a criminal offence to submit false or incorrect information to the CIPC. What is required for compliance?  Identify the beneficial owners of a company – these are individuals/natural persons who, directly or indirectly, ultimately own 5% or more of the company, or exercise effective control of that particular company. For each beneficial owner identified, collect the following: full names, date of birth, correctly certified copy of ID or passport; business or residential and postal address; email address; confirmation as to the participation and extent of the beneficial interest; supporting documents. Collate the information in a register, which must be filed with CIPC, and upload the supporting documents to CIPC’s website. Keep the register up to date, with changes filed with CIPC as soon as practically possible, but no later than 10 business days after notification. An updated register must also be submitted with the annual returns each year. The information must be treated as confidential and adequate precautions must be taken to prevent theft, loss, damage, destruction and falsification. Top tip for hassle-free compliance Our assistance will prove invaluable in ensuring your business remains compliant with both CIPC’s beneficial ownership requirements and annual return requirements, particularly following the hacking of the CIPC website and the problems and delays that followed. We can also guide you through the complexities of CIPC…

Comments Off on Beneficial Ownership Registers – Now Mandatory with CIPC Annual Returns
Read more about the article Five Things You Need to do After the CIPC Hack
May 31 written on a calendar to remind you an important appointment.

Five Things You Need to do After the CIPC Hack

“The Internet is a worldwide platform for sharing information. It is a community of common interests. No country is immune to such global challenges as cybercrime, hacking, and invasion of privacy” – (Lu Wei, the head of the General Office of the Central Leading Group for Internet Security and Informatization from August 2013 to June 2016) On the 1st of March 2024, the CIPC admitted it had been hacked. The CIPC said in a statement that, “Our ICT technicians were alerted, due to extensive firewall and data protection systems in place at the CIPC, to a possible security compromise and as a result, certain CIPC systems were shut down immediately to mitigate any possible damage.” While they referred to the incident as “an attempt” to hack their systems they also added, “Unfortunately, certain personal information of our clients and CIPC employees was unlawfully accessed and exposed.” A few days later MyBroadband.co.za said they had been contacted by the hackers who allegedly proved they had access to the site since 2021 and the CIPC could be understating the damage done. Whether the claims made to MyBroadband are accurate or not, the possibility this hack has leaked private information from many or all of South Africa’s registered businesses and presumably given outside access to company registrations which potentially allows the hackers to make alterations to core business areas. Together with a long-standing issue at SARS that periodically sees clients receiving an email or SMS stating, “unauthorised changes were made to your personal details on eFiling”, it is clear that South African businesses need to be aware of the risks of online attacks at key government organisations and more importantly, know what to do about them. These are the main concerns: Private information leaked According to reports, the hackers may have gained access to the private credit card information used to make payments to the CIPC. MyBroadband quotes the alleged hackers as saying the CIPC was “processing and storing credit cards in the clear.” While most banks require access to an app as verification, the exposure of CVVs and expiry dates of cards is a risky proposition. When combined with other information stored on the site, such as the names, addresses and signatures of directors there is a real risk that company clients and contacts may be open to being scammed through fake profiles or other contacts generated by malicious third parties. Access to Company registrations If, as is alleged, hackers have gained unfettered access to the company registrations section and the login details for multiple clients, companies risk potential changes in their core information. Directors can be changed, addresses altered and critically, key documentation can be downloaded. The latter is of great concern as these documents could allow a fraudster to open bank accounts in a company’s name. After that it becomes simple to contact clients saying that bank account details have changed, and even offer them the proof that they are speaking to legitimate company representatives. From there money could easily…

Comments Off on Five Things You Need to do After the CIPC Hack

Your Tax Deadlines for May 2024

07 May – PAYE submissions and payments 24 May– Value-Added Tax (VAT) manual submissions and payments 30 May – Excise duty payments 31 May – VAT electronic submissions and payments, & Corporate Income Tax (CIT) Provisional Tax payments where applicable. Disclaimer: The information provided herein should not be used or relied on as professional advice. No liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions nor for any loss or damage arising from reliance upon any information herein. Always contact your professional adviser for specific and detailed advice. © CA(SA)DotNews

Comments Off on Your Tax Deadlines for May 2024
Read more about the article Have Your Own Budget Shortfall? Here’s What to Do…
Close-up Of A Businessperson Balancing Stacked Coins On Seesaw With Finger

Have Your Own Budget Shortfall? Here’s What to Do…

“The cold, harsh reality is that we have to balance the budget.” (Michael Bloomberg, former New York City Mayor) Budget shortfalls are not uncommon across the public and private sectors, especially in these economically challenging times. A budget shortfall is a significant concern for any individual or organisation and should be corrected promptly. To address the R15 billion shortfall in National Budget 2024, the South African government earlier this year did not cut its spending, but rather indirectly raised individual taxes by not adjusting personal tax brackets, rebates and credits for inflation, as well as proposing above-inflation increases in sin taxes. Of course, these strategies are not available to South African individuals and businesses, but nevertheless, as Michael Bloomberg, former Mayor of New York City reminded us: “The cold, harsh reality is that we have to balance the budget.” This is because a budget shortfall – when financial obligations or liabilities exceed the amount of cash available – tends to impact negatively on business by, for example, necessitating spending cuts that could adversely affect critical operations, or by requiring an increase in debt to finance the shortfall. On the other hand, maintaining a balanced budget ensures expenses do not exceed revenue, promoting financial stability and avoiding additional debt. By providing a clear demarcation of the available resources and financial capabilities, a balanced budget facilitates informed decisions, long-term planning and sustainable growth. There are different types of budgets for various purposes, such as day-to-day operational budgets, cash flow budgets, long-term capital budgets, and master budgets combining various budget types for a comprehensive overview of the company’s overall financial health. These budgets include elements such as revenue estimates; fixed, variable and one-time costs; cash flow projections; and profit projections. We are able to assist you with choosing the right approach for your business’ specific budgeting requirements. Strategies for balancing your own business and personal budgets If you are facing a budget shortfall, the tried and tested strategies below for balancing a budget may be helpful. While these approaches are business-orientated, each can be adapted to balance your personal budget too. 1. Understand your shortfall Effective budget shortfall management begins with understanding the causes and consequences thereof. Do a thorough analysis before deciding which budget balancing strategies to implement. For example, a shortfall can be temporary, perhaps the result of a specific set of circumstances, or it can be persistent, which might indicate poor financial management.  Your accountant will also be able to assist in this respect. 2. Spending cuts This is the basic strategy for addressing budget shortfalls. However, cost-saving opportunities are not always easily found. Some of the tactics to consider include, for example, cutting all non-essential expenses, across-the-board cuts, targeted cuts in specific areas, or even financial modelling or projections that calculate the combined impact of various approaches. Not all cost-cutting measures are the same and it is more effective to prioritise cost cutting initiatives based on potential impact and feasibility. Prioritising high-impact initiatives can deliver quick wins, building momentum…

Comments Off on Have Your Own Budget Shortfall? Here’s What to Do…
Read more about the article Price Your Products for Profit with these Psychological Strategies
Pricing strategy open book on table and coffee Business

Price Your Products for Profit with these Psychological Strategies

“Find the right price for an irresistible offer, which, by the way, isn’t necessarily the lower price.” ― (W. Chan Kim, Business strategy advisor and author)        A good businessperson pays attention to the price of their products. With accountants by their side, they wisely analyse every expense, tax and logistical possibility to ensure their product goes out at the best rate for maximum profitability. Like with everything in society, no matter how thorough the maths, pricing strategies can also be influenced by the underlying psychological principles that drive consumer behaviour and purchasing decisions. Ultimately, customers want to know that they’re getting either the best price point, the best quality, or the best value. Psychological pricing leans into that idea, and ethically uses price as a way to send the right signals to make customers feel one of these three benefits. By decoding these subtle nuances, businesses gain a competitive edge by subtly adjusting their pricing strategies to lure customers and bolster profitability. Here we uncover the strategies and insights essential for businesses aiming to thrive in today’s dynamic market landscape. Price Appearance All businesses know that pricing an object at R49.99 is more likely to attract a sale than simply pricing it at R50. In the West people read from the left so the lower number on the left is attractive. Of course, many customers know this too, but there are other ways of making the appearance of the price boost sales. The first of these is simply to leave off the cents in a price. Studies have shown that marking a product as R49 is more likely to make a sale than R49.00 simply because it looks shorter. In fact, according to The New York Times, even putting the currency sign at the start of a price can trigger purchasers into feeling the “pain of paying.” The best route? Remove the currency sign and cents altogether. Premium Pricing and Price Anchoring Premium pricing is when a brand chooses to price themselves at the top of the market rather than set a competitive price. This can work due to the public’s long-established perception that higher prices equal higher quality or rarer products. This does not always work, but there is a far subtler way to take advantage of the same effect – price anchoring. Price Anchoring is where a business releases their first product at a premium price but releases subsequent products at more competitive rates. The existence of the premium product makes the other products seem that much more reasonable than they otherwise would and encourages sales. Price anchoring can also refer to a practice in retail where the store puts an expensive product alongside a cheaper one, thereby making the cheaper one’s price seem like a bargain. For example, retailers, putting prime virgin olive oil at R89.99 for 500ml next to the sunflower oil, makes the latter seem cost-effective, even if they have priced it above the usual market price. Discount language Offering discounts is a great way to sell off stock that may…

Comments Off on Price Your Products for Profit with these Psychological Strategies

Freelancer vs Employee: How to Decide

“People are not your most important asset. The right people are.” (Jim Collins, author, speaker and consultant) Knowing whether to hire a freelancer or full-time employee for any particular role is vital for the successful running of a modern business. With budgets constantly being constrained and the pressure to perform going up, ensuring you maximise your workforce is absolutely essential if you want to build a successful company. Here is our quick guide to help you decide whether the roles in your company should be filled by a full-time employee or a freelancer. When to bring on an employee Training: If the role requires specific knowledge or a significant amount of training, it will always be better to bring in a full-time employee. While the risk always exists that you will train an employee only for them to leave, this risk is far greater with a freelancer given the fact that they are already working with multiple companies. Oversight: If the role requires careful oversight, it is also a good idea to make it full-time. Freelancers work with multiple clients and as such schedule work to their calendar and not strictly to when your managers and supervisors are online. Culture and brand awareness: Freelancers are exceptional at delivering on their specific tasks but may not have the same general awareness and knowledge of your company. This is important to consider especially when choosing staff who will be interacting with your clients and customers, where it’s vital they are living the company culture and fully cognizant of the nuances of the brand. Recruiting a leader: Anyone who is set to take a senior role in your business should be a full-time employee, simply because these roles require someone who is fully dedicated to the business and not distracted by other roles and concerns. When to bring on a freelancer Budget: If the budget is a concern, then you should definitely be using a freelancer. Even if that freelancer is charging a premium your company will often save money on benefits such as health insurance, paid holidays, retirement annuities and bonuses, while also saving on their office space and supplies and equipment. With freelancers the company only pays for the hours worked, and dead time around the coffee machine is no longer an expense. If you find the job is larger than expected the option exists to take the freelancer on a retainer for a set number of hours each month at a set rate, which can activate even more savings. Your accountant can easily run the costs for you in each scenario, making this decision an easy one. Risk: As freelancers aren’t employees, they are significantly easier to terminate should their work not be up to standard. Further, they aren’t generally considered when tallying the employee numbers for determining the size of a business, and their working conditions are not regulated by the Basic Conditions of Employment Act. In general, taking on a freelancer runs far lower risks for an organisation than hiring in a similar position.…

Comments Off on Freelancer vs Employee: How to Decide

Donating to a PBO? Check SARS’ New Requirements (and PBOs Note Your New 31 May Deadline)

“[The new requirements] enable… a more efficient process to make deductions available to qualifying donor taxpayers and to help prevent section 18A claims abuse.” (SARS) Public benefit organisations (PBOs) are engaged in public benefit activities for example religious institutions, day care centres, disaster relief organisations, health clinics, etc. Many are dependent on donations and, to encourage the public’s generosity, a tax deduction for certain donations made by taxpayers is provided. Qualifying PBOs (i.e. section 18A-approved organisations) may issue tax certificates – called section 18A receipts – to donors.    This tax certificate – or section 18A receipt issued by a section 18A-approved organisation – entitles you or your company to a deduction from taxable income for bona fide donations in cash or of property. While approved section 18A institutions were previously required to keep records of all section 18A receipts issued, the requirements have changed, affecting both PBOs and their private and corporate donors. PBOs: New requirements, and a 31 May 2024 deadline Previously, the information that had to be provided by a PBO for a valid section 18A certificate was limited to the details of the PBO; details of the date, amount or nature of the donation; confirmation of how the donation would be used; and the name and address of the donor. Last year, SARS issued further requirements for more detailed information to be included on all section 18A certificates issued from 1 March 2023. This includes the nature of the donor; the donor’s identification or registration number; donor trading name (if different from the registered name); donor income tax reference number; donor contact number and e-mail address; and a unique receipt number. In addition, this year – like other third parties such as the banks, medical schemes and fund administrators required by law to send data to SARS – all PBOs are now also required to submit bi-annual reports – called an IT3(d) – to SARS. The first deadline for PBOs in this respect is 31 May 2024. From this date, approved section 18A tax exempt institutions must submit data on section 18A tax deductible receipts issued, which includes information on the S18A approved tax exempt institution, donation information and donor information for the 2023/2024 year of assessment (i.e. S18A receipts data from 01 March 2023 to 28 February 2024) by submission of IT3(d) data via efiling. Professional assistance is essential While it has always been best practice to check with your accountant first before making a donation and relying on the tax break, it is now more crucial than ever for companies and individuals to ensure that the PBO being supported, as well as the tax certificate – or section 18A receipt – issued to obtain a tax deduction, meet SARS’ new requirements. Also remember to check the limits: the amount of donations which may qualify for a tax deduction is limited to up to 10% of taxable income. We can also help PBOs to ensure they can meet the new requirements and deadlines, to ensure compliance and that their donors…

Comments Off on Donating to a PBO? Check SARS’ New Requirements (and PBOs Note Your New 31 May Deadline)

Your Tax Deadlines for April 2024

05 April – Monthly Pay-As-You-Earn (PAYE) submissions and payments 25 April – VAT manual submissions and payments 29 April – Excise Duty payments 30 April – Value-Added Tax (VAT) electronic submissions and payments & CIT Provisional payments where applicable. Disclaimer: The information provided herein should not be used or relied on as professional advice. No liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions nor for any loss or damage arising from reliance upon any information herein. Always contact your professional adviser for specific and detailed advice. © CA(SA)DotNews

Comments Off on Your Tax Deadlines for April 2024

Budget 2024: How It Affects You and Your Business

“Our bigger challenge… is that our pie is not growing fast enough and this limits our ability to generate sufficient revenues to distribute among our priority areas.” (Finance Minister Enoch Godongwana – Budget 2024) Finance Minister Enoch Godongwana’s third Budget Speech in an election year contained few surprises, but also little in the form of good news, especially for South Africa’s personal income tax payers. The Minister quoted dismal local average expected real GDP growth of 0.6% for 2023, which is projected to reach 1.6% between 2024 and 2026. This poor economic performance is ascribed to the persistent constraints in electricity supply and freight, rail and ports, as well as a high sovereign credit risk. And the result? A sharp drop in tax revenue collection for 2023/24 which, at R1.73 trillion, is R56.1 billion lower than estimated! To make up the shortfall, Budget 2024 contains tax measures that will raise an additional R15 billion in 2024/2025, mainly through income tax raised by not adjusting personal tax brackets, rebates and medical tax credits for inflation, as well as above-inflation increases in alcohol and tobacco excise duties. Other main proposals included no increase to the general fuel levy for 2024/25, a global tax on multinational companies in South Africa with an annual revenue exceeding €750 million and the R150 billion withdrawal from SA's Gold and Foreign Exchange Contingency Reserve Account. These announcements are briefly detailed below, along with some of the other announcements that will impact individuals and businesses. Budget proposals that will impact you Addressing the Budget shortfall, personal income tax brackets are not adjusted for inflation - so individuals who received a salary increase this year are likely to pay more tax as they could fall into a higher tax bracket. No inflation adjustments to the tax rebates. Medical tax credits per month are not increased by inflation. A one-year extension in the R350 Social Relief of Distress (SRD) grant and increases ranging from R20 to R100 per month in other social grants. Above-inflation increases in the excise duties on alcohol and increases of between 4.7 and 8.2% on tobacco products. This means that the duty on: a 340ml can of beer increases by 14c, a 750ml bottle of wine goes up by 28c, a 750ml bottle of fortified wine goes up by 47c, a 750ml bottle of spirits will increase by R5.53, a 23g cigar goes up by R9.51, a pack of 20 cigarettes, rises by 97c, vaping products increase to R3.04 per millilitre. Two-pot retirement reform to be implemented on 1 September 2024, allowing individuals access to a portion of their retirement savings before their retirement date. Budget proposals that will impact your business A global minimum corporate tax will be implemented from 1 January 2024, with multinational corporations with an annual revenue exceeding €750 million subject to an effective tax rate of at least 15%, regardless of where their profits are located. This will broaden the corporate tax base, enabling more tax revenue collection without increasing existing…

Comments Off on Budget 2024: How It Affects You and Your Business

Budget 2024: Your Tax Tables and Tax Calculator

Budget 2024 effectively brought an increase in personal income tax by not adjusting the tables for tax rates, rebates and medical tax credits, while also implementing substantial increases in ‘sin’ taxes and introducing a proposed global tax on multinational companies. This selection of official SARS Tax Tables and other useful resources will help clarify your tax position for the new tax year. Then follow the link to Fin 24’s Budget Calculator (just follow the four-step process) to perform your own calculation. Individual taxpayers – tax tables unchanged Source: SARS Source: SARS Source: SARS Businesses – Corporate tax rates – extended Sources: SARS’ Budget Tax Guide 2024; Budget Speech 2024 Sin taxes increased Source: Budget 2024 People’s Guide How much will you be paying in income, petrol and sin taxes? Use Fin 24’s four-step Budget Calculator here to find out the monthly and annual impact on your income tax, as well as what you will pay in future in terms of fuel and sin taxes, bearing in mind that the best way to fully understand the impact of the announcements in Budget 2024 on your own and your business affairs is to reach out to us for professional advice. Disclaimer: The information provided herein should not be used or relied on as professional advice. No liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions nor for any loss or damage arising from reliance upon any information herein. Always contact your professional adviser for specific and detailed advice. © CA(SA)DotNews

Comments Off on Budget 2024: Your Tax Tables and Tax Calculator
Read more about the article Things to Look for When Buying a Small Business
Electronic smart checklist and document on virtual screens concept, business people check electronic documents on digital documents, paperless offices,working on borderless communication technology

Things to Look for When Buying a Small Business

“It’s far better to buy a wonderful company at a fair price, than a fair company at a wonderful price.”- (Warren Buffett, investor, businessman and philanthropist) When buying a small business there are a number of things that need to be checked before pulling the trigger and signing the contract. Doing proper due diligence will ensure you don’t invest hard earned money on a lemon. Here are the five most important things to look out for. • Finances Carefully examining the finances of the company is vital and bringing an expert on board to do it for you will ensure you don’t miss those hidden details that could be signs of a faltering company. Let us examine your past financial statements and tax returns for you to discover trends and establish whether sales are on the way up or down. We will also look closely at the assets and liabilities of your company, review the status of any inventory, equipment, and physical assets and analyse your likely costing for maintenance, necessary upgrades and stock issues. This is all essential as buying a company and then finding yourself in an immediate cash flow crisis is the worst possible start to your hopeful new venture. • Intellectual Property Does the company you are buying depend on one invention or many? If so, have those inventions been patented, copyrighted or trademarked? And just who owns those things? It’s no good buying a business only to find you now owe the former owners for the rights to using their creations. • Customer opinions The first step is to examine the internet for reviews. Perhaps the previous owners have been rude and undermined any goodwill that should have arisen from an otherwise excellent concept? Maybe the much-vaunted invention isn’t quite as good as expected? Speak to key customers and ask them their opinion on a takeover. Does it bother them or will they stay on with the company when it has been sold? Does the goodwill of the business rest with the product and the business itself or is it personal to the current owners? • Employees Where possible conduct employee interviews to fully understand what they think of the company, how they believe it can be improved and whether they are planning on staying on if there is a new owner. The employees may be able to spot gaps or weaknesses you may not easily see, but more importantly may also reveal undiscovered areas for expansion. A full employee analysis will, with the help of your accountant, also help you determine just where there are gaps that need to be filled, what training still needs to be done, and most importantly, what all of that will cost. • Existing contracts Take a look at any long-term existing contracts. Anything from a rental agreement to a customer service contract could reveal problems. Are there any burdensome terms and conditions that you will be locked into? Is there a customer who has to be serviced at…

Comments Off on Things to Look for When Buying a Small Business
Read more about the article The Five Skills Your Business Needs to Cultivate in 2024
Electronic smart checklist and document on virtual screens concept, business people check electronic documents on digital documents, paperless offices,working on borderless communication technology

The Five Skills Your Business Needs to Cultivate in 2024

“The only thing worse than training your employees and having them leave is not training them and having them stay.” – (Henry Ford, Founder, Ford Motor Company) In a world where everything seems more expensive today than it was yesterday training and advancement of staff can seem of lesser importance. As an increasing number of studies show, however, this could not be further from the truth. A lack of training at businesses can lead to decreasing quality of service, high employee churn rates, and more recently, an inability to match more technologically savvy competitors in the market. In 2024, speak to your accountant to budget for the advancement of your employees and the development of skills within your organisation. Businesses who fail to bring these skills on board, whether through training or additional hires, are guaranteeing tough times ahead. 1. AI Prompting Like Excel in the 2000s this is the one skill every office employee will need to have over the coming years. At the moment, prompt engineers are commanding enormous salaries for their understanding of just which commands are genuinely helpful when dealing with AI. It’s all very well having the latest technology, but if you are unable to unlock its potential then you are wasting the investment and falling behind every day. 2. Creative Communication Ironically, in an era where AI is capable of producing a facsimile of good writing in a matter of minutes, genuine heartfelt, creative and original communication is going to become even more critical. Ensuring you have employees who are capable of identifying communication opportunities, and actively translating the insights of AI into easily understood, actionable and motivational text will be the difference in a world littered with paint-by-numbers ChatGPT blog posts and internal emails. 3. Cybersecurity As the world moves increasingly digital and automated it also becomes more vulnerable to cyber-attacks. Online threats can cripple companies and put them out of commission for weeks if not months, and lost information can be very hard to retrieve. While it is imperative that your company has experts employed who understand the threats, each and every employee should also be trained in the basics and potential loopholes that criminals will exploit. Failing to train in this area will no doubt lead to far greater costs down the line. 4. People Management Managing a team requires a completely different set of skills to just ten years ago. With most jobs incorporating at least a percentage of remote work, and freelancers becoming an integral part of projects, managers need to be up to date on a number of new communication and management apps and solutions. Additionally, they need to know how to motivate and communicate effectively online and develop teams from people located around the world. 5. Customer Service In the modern era of online reviews and social media, customer service has never been more important. Now, one bad experience doesn’t disappear, but instead lives with a company online forever. As a result, it’s critical that staff be…

Comments Off on The Five Skills Your Business Needs to Cultivate in 2024

Your Tax Deadlines for March 2024

07 March – Monthly Pay-As-You-Earn (PAYE) submissions and payments 25 March – VAT manual submissions and payments 27 March – Excise duty payments 28 March – End of the 2023/24 Financial year, Value-Added Tax (VAT) electronic submissions and payments, & CIT Provisional payments where applicable. Disclaimer: The information provided herein should not be used or relied on as professional advice. No liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions nor for any loss or damage arising from reliance upon any information herein. Always contact your professional adviser for specific and detailed advice. © CA(SA)DotNews

Comments Off on Your Tax Deadlines for March 2024

Provisional Tax: Are You Ready for the Crucial 29 February Deadline?

“Provisional tax is merely a mechanism to pay the normal income tax liability during the tax year… an advance payment of a taxpayer’s normal tax liability.” (SARS) To provisional taxpayers, especially those who are liable for provisional tax in both their personal capacities and as business owners, it may well seem that there are endless provisional tax deadlines and payments to be made every year. There are indeed numerous income tax provisional and final declarations and payments that overlap across tax years, which is certainly confusing, and yet non-compliance is met with some of the harshest penalties imposed by SARS, most notably in respect of the second provisional tax declaration and payment, due by the end of February for individuals, and for companies with a February financial year end. In this article we find out who are provisional taxpayers, what they need to pay and when and how to avoid the penalties for non-compliance. What is provisional tax? Provisional tax is not a type of tax, but a cash flow mechanism to collect pre-payments of taxes that must be made in respect of individual provisional taxpayers’ and company taxpayers’ normal annual income tax prior to a final determination of the annual tax liability. At least two amounts are paid in advance during the year of assessment, based on estimated taxable income for the year of assessment. A third optional payment can be made. Why must provisional tax be paid? Ensures government collects cash more evenly during the year and not just in bulk amounts following final tax assessments which are annual and usually in similar time periods e.g. end of December or February. Spreads the payment of a taxpayer’s year’s income tax liability over two or even three provisional payments. Prevents taxpayers facing large income tax liabilities that are only revealed at the end of the year of assessment when the annual personal income tax (PIT) return ITR12 or the annual corporate income tax (CIT) return ITR14 is filed. The first, second and third provisional payments are credited against any tax owing after the final income tax return is filed, and any further tax liability will then become due. Reduces the risk and amount of interest accruing between the time when a tax liability is determined and when it is paid. Who must pay provisional tax? Provisional tax is paid by individuals who earn income other than, or in addition to, a salary or traditional remuneration paid by an employer from which PAYE deductions are made – including those who earn income from conducting a business, such as members of CCs, sole proprietors and company owners. Companies and trusts. Any person notified by the Commissioner of SARS. Exceptions and thresholds apply in every instance, so be sure to check with your accountant. When is provisional tax due? Below is an example of the provisional and final income tax due dates for: The 2024 year of assessment (1/03/23-29/02/24) and The 2025 year of assessment (1/03/24-28/02/25) for a company with a February financial year…

Comments Off on Provisional Tax: Are You Ready for the Crucial 29 February Deadline?

These Invoicing Tips Could Save Your Business

“Never take your eyes off the cash flow because it’s the lifeblood of business” (Sir Richard Branson, entrepreneur, investor, and author) Cash is king, said one anonymous business genius. At the end of the day, it’s having money in the bank that keeps a company running smoothly. According to a recent study by Sibongiseni Selby Myeni at the Walden University, the majority of SA’s small to medium enterprises are destined for the scrap heap and the majority of these cases will be due to a lack of cash flow. In an era where more invoices are going unpaid, how can your invoicing process help to make sure you are one of the lucky ones? Send the invoice immediately The best time to send an invoice is when you and your relationship with a client is still fresh in everyone’s minds. Ask for the invoicing details up front, so you can send the invoice with the final deliverable. Invoice for immediate payment The invoice should request payment immediately, or failing that, at the end of the month and not only when you need the money. Smaller businesses are likely to comply, and bigger companies may rush faster to ensure you get paid promptly within their next payment cycle.  Making the assumption that your client needs leeway or payment time scales well into the future only guarantees your invoice loses priority. Check your clients If you are going into a large contract, it’s wise to do some groundwork on your client. One of the biggest reasons for non-payment is the client’s own cash flow worries. Getting some intelligence from other clients, or if possible, running a background check on them, will ensure you don’t invest huge amounts of time and resources into defaulting clients. If you do establish a client might default, you don’t have to cut them off, simply invoice with the intention of being paid up front, or at least request a deposit and include a punitive “late payers’ fee” or interest on non-payment to encourage them to prioritise you. Never miss the payment cycle Your larger clients are going to be fanatical about their payment cycles. Ask them upfront when they need to receive invoices and make sure you get the invoice in before that date. Failure to do so will often mean a 30 or even 60 day delay in payment. Request Debit orders If you have a client who uses the same service regularly, don’t be afraid to ask for retainers and other contracts, to be paid by debit order, to cover the costs rather than invoicing each month. Be sure to offer perks to encourage your clients to take you up on these offers. Build relationships When it comes time to pay, even struggling companies will want to pay the people they know and like first, over the anonymous supplier. Knowing who at your client is responsible for the invoice and following up politely with them is a great way to ensure your invoices are treated with priority.…

Comments Off on These Invoicing Tips Could Save Your Business

Build Your Team Stronger This Year

“Great things in business are never done by one person. They’re done by a team of people.” (Steve Jobs) There are many benefits to having a great team, and these have been backed up by scientific research around the world. These include, for example: Improved productivity, with thousands of employees noting that having the respect of their peers is the number one reason they go the extra mile at work. Better problem-solving, as team members pool their diverse unique talents and skills to find smart solutions to ever-more complex problems. Generation of innovative ideas as team members with different experiences, opinions and perspectives collaborate. Taking more calculated risks, as team members know they have the support of a team.Personal growth, increased job satisfaction and reduced stress are all benefits of working in a team. Reduced risk of burnout as the workload is shared among team members. Five steps to build your team stronger  Take care of the basics with the help of your accountant Ensure fair remuneration and that each team member’s salary is optimally structured. Put the basics in place: Employment contracts, salary slips, leave and sick leave, job descriptions and performance reviews. Offer incentives for employees to increase their earnings – from simply working extra hours to profit sharing for achieving company goals. Provide the right skills and tools for each team member Team members should have a clear understanding of their roles and responsibilities, and how it contributes to achieving the team’s goals. In addition to safe, clean and friendly working conditions, each team member should have the right skills and the right tools to make their contribution to the team’s success effectively and efficiently. Be sure to provide practical means to track the team’s progress to maintain motivation. Offer perks that matter! Non-monetary perks that have proven to be very popular include flexible working hours, extra time off, transport, childminding facilities, fun social activities and opportunities to volunteer during work time. Health and wellness programmes are an affordable and practical option to help team members to better care for their health, improving productivity and reducing both absenteeism and presenteeism (when team members are at work, but are too ill to perform their duties). Financial wellness programmes can provide team members completely confidential assistance to deal with the financial stress that is known to negatively affect work performance. Ensure open and regular communication Regular and prioritised communication – from weekly team meetings to reports with regular due dates are crucial to share information and provide feedback to the team and individual members. Provide all team members with opportunities to share their input, actively seek out suggestions, listen to understand and work to build consensus, which is likely to result in the best decisions. Define common goals and clear steps to achieving these goals. Celebrating successes and implementing lessons learned Be certain to celebrate milestones and successes with the team, recognising each team member’s efforts. Define the lessons learnt from failures and adjust the team’s approach accordingly. Consider team-building…

Comments Off on Build Your Team Stronger This Year

Adapt or Die: How to Develop a Digital Transformation Strategy

“At least 40% of all businesses will die in the next 10 years… if they don’t figure out how to change their entire company to accommodate new technologies.” John Chambers, former CEO of Cisco Systems) Around the boardroom tables of the world, one thing is on every agenda – digital transformation. From global conglomerates to SMEs, leadership is keenly aware that in a digital world, those who do not adapt will quickly become irrelevant. In fact, a recent study revealed that 55% of businesses believe they have less than a year to digitalise before they start to suffer financially and lose market share. Businesses must adapt to stay ahead of the game. By integrating advanced technologies across all aspects of the enterprise, businesses are able to significantly improve a business’s efficiency by automating manual processes, reducing errors and improving productivity. This allows them to not only keep up with the competition, but also to enjoy greater efficiency, productivity and customer satisfaction. This process of implementing these modernising technology advancements is referred to as a digital transformation. However, the process of digital transformation is not one a company should enter into lightly as it’s not simply about implementing the latest technology and tools. The goal of digital transformation isn’t just to eliminate manual processes, but to augment your operations, streamlining workflows and improving the customer experience. This must all be considered within the context of your budgets, timelines and overall business goals, while managing organisational risks. As a result, it’s imperative to develop a digital transformation strategy which takes into account all of these aspects and potential pitfalls of an overhaul of this nature. Get buy in from the highest levels A digital transformation is a necessary change, but it can’t work without buy in and leadership from the top down. This is something the company needs to do together, and some tough choices are coming. With a likely high price tag and disruptions on the cards, the company is about to go through a challenging time; making sure everyone at the top understands this is a powerful first step. Analyse your current system Before embarking on your digital transformation, you will need to know exactly what needs to change. To do this you will need to do a complete, top to bottom analysis of your current technology and systems in order to: Review business processes and highlight inefficiencies Identify technology gaps or areas where your existing systems fall short Define functional capabilities needed to effectively support or improve your processes. Develop your company mindset Digital transformations are not as much about technology as they are about change. A thorough digital transformation will likely change the way everything is done in your company and will therefore require a culture of agility, communication and open mindedness. Leaders will need to take ownership of the transformation and prepare all involved well ahead of any actual proposed developments. Employees, clients and other stakeholders will all need to understand the transformation strategy and how it…

Comments Off on Adapt or Die: How to Develop a Digital Transformation Strategy

Your Tax Deadlines for February 2024

07 February – Monthly Pay-As-You-Earn (PAYE) submissions and payments 23 February – Value-Added Tax (VAT) manual submissions and payments 28 February – Excise Duty payments 29 February – CIT Provisional Tax payments 29 February – PIT Provisional Tax payments 29 February – Value-Added Tax (VAT) electronic submissions and payments Disclaimer: The information provided herein should not be used or relied on as professional advice. No liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions nor for any loss or damage arising from reliance upon any information herein. Always contact your professional adviser for specific and detailed advice. © CA(SA)DotNews

Comments Off on Your Tax Deadlines for February 2024
Read more about the article 2024: Best Year Yet for Your Business?
Portrait of happy waitress standing at restaurant entrance while looking outdoor. Portrait of young business woman attend new customers in her coffee shop. Smiling small business owner showing open sign in her shop while leaning against the door.

2024: Best Year Yet for Your Business?

“The best way to predict the future is to create it.” (Peter Drucker) Facing what may well be another tough year, company owners and managers will be well aware that many of the external challenges will be beyond their control. Fortunately, what remains under your control is how this new year is approached and starting 2024 with a thorough understanding of the three metrics below will ensure that this could be the best year yet for your business – The business’ past performance, Its current status, and Its mission for the new year. You don’t need an MBA or special knowledge to assess the company’s past performance, to understand the present situation, or to plan for the year ahead. Just schedule some time with your accountant, take inventory of what’s truly going on in your business and decide how to make 2024 your best year yet. Assessing the past An assessment of the company’s performance over previous years provides invaluable information about what is working and what needs to be changed. A relatively quick and easy way of assessing the past performance is looking at the business accounts and financial reports. For example, your profit and loss (P&L) statement, or income statement, will reveal reasons for periods when net losses were recorded (for example, slow business periods or extraordinary expenses) as well as raise red flags where expenses regularly exceed income. A balance sheet summarises total assets and total liabilities, showing the company’s financial position and measuring liquidity or ability to pay short-term liabilities. Summarising expected cash inflows and outflows over a period, a cashflow report reveals where the most cash is generated and used; highlights potential cash flow problems and enables informed budgeting and spending decisions. Regular debtors’ reports enable proactive management of current and overdue invoices to improve cashflow. Similarly, budget vs actual spend reports compare actual spending to the amounts budgeted for the period, to reveal areas over or under budget and to flag problem areas. Determine where the business is now Review the business operations, successes and challenges, and the reasons for missed targets, whether simply drawing on paper or using special software. Understand the company’s current capacity for production and its performance – how many targets met, on target and/or overdue. This enables current strategies, practices and operations to be evaluated, and to pinpoint what is working or not. Also look at customer satisfaction and retention rates, as well as employee satisfaction, both of which can be assessed through electronic surveys or simply speaking to clients and staff. Planning ahead Building on what’s working and realising that doing things differently is the only way to achieve different results, you can choose the goals that will create the future of your business. Specific, Measurable, Achievable, Relevant and Time bound goals – or SMART goals – focus your team’s efforts and increase the chances of successfully achieving the targets, particularly if these are supported by step-by-step plans, a budget for the required resources, accountability assigned to specific people, and ongoing reviews to track progress. SMART goals are crucial for achieving success, as they provide a clear…

Comments Off on 2024: Best Year Yet for Your Business?
Read more about the article How to Survive Ongoing High Interest Rates in 2024
Portrait of happy waitress standing at restaurant entrance while looking outdoor. Portrait of young business woman attend new customers in her coffee shop. Smiling small business owner showing open sign in her shop while leaning against the door.

How to Survive Ongoing High Interest Rates in 2024

“Inflation is bringing us true democracy. For the first time in history, luxuries and necessities are selling at the same price.” (Robert Orben, comedian and writer) Interest rates and inflation are a nasty partnership that can, if managed badly, derail any small to medium enterprise. Their effects are felt in every area of the business and if they are not addressed correctly, high interest rates can have a significant impact on business, driving up costs, slowing growth and minimising competitive advantage. Governments use high interest rates to manage the impacts of inflation. When inflation is growing, people should expect interest rates to do the same.  Unfortunately, the global phenomena that have been driving increased inflation over the past few years show no signs of slowing down – the Ukraine war drags on leading to both oil and food supply issues, while supply chain issues and the pandemic’s grasp are both proving more difficult to overcome than expected. This has meant that economists have abandoned any hopes for lower rates in 2024 and have instead coined the mantra, “Higher for longer”. What does this mean for your business in 2024? More difficulty borrowing: Rising interest rates leads to businesses paying more to borrow money and reduces the ability to pay debts that have already been incurred. High debt repayments may make it difficult to finance new expansion projects or invest in new products and services, which in turn can stifle growth. Less demand: Customers feel high inflation too. They may turn to buying cheaper products thereby eroding the competitive advantage your company once held, or they may give up on your service altogether. This too can have long-term impacts on growth plans and could severely impact cash flow. Declining reserves: Longer high interest rates may mean businesses are required to dip into their cash buffers to service debts or simply to cover costs as earnings slowly dip. Improved earnings on cash: Those companies with large cash reserves can see benefits in times of high interest as the return from banks improves. Faltering competition: Those companies in good standing may also find their competition struggling. This is the perfect time to seize additional market share. How to thrive in high interest conditions Assess your weaknesses: Evaluate the risks associated with your business operations. Take into account elements like how sensitive your income sources are to economic fluctuations, dependence on particular clients or suppliers, and any external influences that could affect your financial strength. Recognizing potential risks and vulnerabilities empowers you to create tactics that lessen their effects when confronted with an interest rate increase. Trim expenses: It’s time to go through your monthly expenses and see where you can save. Are you getting the best deals on rental, internet, and office supplies? If your staff are largely working from home, can you afford to move into a smaller office? Consider outsourcing jobs that aren’t part of your core business – PR, designers, IT professionals and even HR and Admin are good places to start. Refinance debt: Take careful note…

Comments Off on How to Survive Ongoing High Interest Rates in 2024
Read more about the article How to Achieve Tax Compliance Throughout 2024
Portrait of happy waitress standing at restaurant entrance while looking outdoor. Portrait of young business woman attend new customers in her coffee shop. Smiling small business owner showing open sign in her shop while leaning against the door.

How to Achieve Tax Compliance Throughout 2024

“SARS is willing and ready to assist taxpayers who want to be compliant. Where taxpayers willfully and intentionally ignore their legal obligations, SARS will act sternly.” (SARS Commissioner Edward Kieswetter) Businesses are often required to share their tax compliance status, for example for a tender application, bidding process or prequalification as a supplier; to confirm that their tax affairs are in order with SARS; to receive payment; or for foreign investment allowances. This is because proof of tax compliance is accepted as an indicator of how well a company is managed and its good standing in terms of its legal obligations. Tax compliance also saves time and money. SARS provides clear advice to owners of small, micro and medium enterprises (SMMEs) on how to achieve tax compliance, both in the business and in their personal capacity, including a recommendation to seek the advice of an accountant. Which tax types apply to you and your business? This handy table from SARS details the tax types that generally apply to SMME businesses and their owners. Source: SARS Compliance life cycle The “compliance life cycle” as SARS calls it, applies to each one of the tax types for which the business and the owner are liable. It involves completing these steps in your tax relationship with SARS from beginning to end:  Registration on SARS’ system for each tax type applicable; Timely and correct declarations or returns for each tax type, including submitting relevant supporting documents; Timely payments where a tax liability exists; and Deregistration from tax types if the business is liquidated or closed. To meet these requirements consistently across all the relevant tax types over the tax year, in an always-changing tax landscape, taxpayers should consider professional assistance. Consequences of non-compliance Non-compliance is a costly choice, generally involving penalties and interest, as well as additional fees to rectify, and potentially further losses, such as losing a business opportunity or the confidence of clients, stakeholders and investors, or suffering reputational damage. In addition, not registering for a tax type to evade paying taxes, as well as the non-submission of tax returns are criminal offences, which may result in a fine, imprisonment or both. Outstanding returns will also negatively affect tax compliance status, and administrative penalties that will attract interest may be incurred for non-submission. Where tax liabilities have not been paid, and no payment arrangement has been made, penalties and interest will also apply, tax compliance status will be affected, and SARS may appoint third parties, such as a registered bank, to recover the outstanding tax.  Ensuring compliance Human errors and simple mistakes are common given the complex tax types, rules and strict deadlines. Nevertheless, a taxpayer can be found guilty of an offence without SARS having to show that the taxpayer committed it wilfully, deliberately and knowingly. It means that even unintentional or administrative errors can be penalised with a maximum penalty and, in some cases, criminal sanctions. This makes it essential to rely on your accountant, who is not only well-versed in the…

Comments Off on How to Achieve Tax Compliance Throughout 2024
Read more about the article Why January is the Perfect Time to Start a Business
Portrait of happy waitress standing at restaurant entrance while looking outdoor. Portrait of young business woman attend new customers in her coffee shop. Smiling small business owner showing open sign in her shop while leaning against the door.

Why January is the Perfect Time to Start a Business

“The way to get started is to quit talking and begin doing.” (Walt Disney) Whether starting a business is your New Year's resolution or something you have been waiting to do for years, if you are thinking of launching it in January 2024, then you have already made a wise decision. January is a popular month to officially launch new businesses, not just for those inspired by a New Year's Eve conversation, but for seasoned entrepreneurs. There are several reasons why January is so popular. Perhaps they will inspire you to make it your foundation month too? You have the energy Coming off a holiday and filled with the buzz of a new year is the perfect time to launch a business. New businesses require long hours and energy you may not have after a year in your corporate job, but that short break can do wonders for your energy and give you just the lift you need to get it all started. January is a slow month Following on from the Christmas spending boom and a lazy holiday it usually takes corporates a few weeks to get back to full speed. While this might sound terrible to someone eager to get going immediately with a new venture, it's a big benefit. There are a lot of admin tasks that need to be done to launch a business, from registering with the CIPC to opening a bank account, drawing up business and financial plans and getting your logo designed, so having a quiet first month to get that out the way while you aren't missing out on sales will help. Hiring According to TransformSA, January in South Africa is the month when the highest percentage of people quit their jobs. Following on from the holiday many unsatisfied, driven or unsettled people decide they can't face another year of doing the same thing and leave looking for something else. As a start-up, this means that there are many more people on the job market looking for a new opportunity and you stand a greater chance of finding the right people for your enterprise. Given that you will be starting small, it is absolutely critical to get the first few hires right, and January's talent pool will make that easier. Refreshed clients Just like employees, potential clients are also arriving at work eager to do something new and exciting. It is extremely common for business leaders to use the chance of a quiet January to go over the past year's figures and reevaluate client relationships and long-standing suppliers. This is the perfect time to walk into their offices with something fresh. Lower advertising costs Studies show that the fourth quarter of every year is by far the busiest when it comes to advertising, while quarter one, and particularly January can be a problem. If you are looking to do a significant amount of advertising, walking into a publisher to negotiate ad space in January is a power move that could see you…

Comments Off on Why January is the Perfect Time to Start a Business
Read more about the article Your Tax Deadlines for January 2024
Tax Time Concept In Notepad At Desk

Your Tax Deadlines for January 2024

05 January - Monthly Pay-As-You-Earn (PAYE) submissions and payments 24 January – End of Filing Season for Provisional taxpayers 24 January – End of Trusts Filing Season for taxpayers liable for provisional tax 30 January - Excise Duty payments 31 January - Value-Added Tax (VAT) electronic submissions and payments & CIT Provisional payments where applicable. Disclaimer: The information provided herein should not be used or relied on as professional advice. No liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions nor for any loss or damage arising from reliance upon any information herein. Always contact your professional adviser for specific and detailed advice. © CA(SA)DotNews

Comments Off on Your Tax Deadlines for January 2024
Read more about the article Corporate Gifting: How to Boost Your Business This Festive Season
Refined Christmas gift basket for culinary enthusiats with bottle of wine and mulled wine ingredients. Corporate hamper or personal present for cooking lovers, foodies and gourmands.

Corporate Gifting: How to Boost Your Business This Festive Season

“A real gift comes attached with ribbons, not strings.” (Raymond C Nolan) Most clients, suppliers and business associates will appreciate a thoughtful gift from your company, and the Festive Season is the most appropriate time to send such a gift. The challenge lies in selecting a gift that conveys genuine intentions to thank the recipients for the role they play in the success of your business, to strengthen the relationship and to stand out from the competition. Here are some great tips to ensure your corporate gifts achieve these objectives. Keep it simple: Choose gifts that are relevant and useful to the recipient, and also align with your business values and goals, for example, sending locally sourced gifts made and packaged with sustainable materials. Stick to the popular choices: For good reason, certain gifts are most popular among recipients - with gift baskets, food and gift cards the most popular choices, along with handy tech gifts like portable speakers, headphones and tablets. Allow a choice: Gift cards and vouchers are particularly popular because recipients can choose their own gifts. Edible gift baskets: Gift baskets filled with delicious treats are very popular, because they can be shared with others. Chocolates and baked goodies like brownies are the favourites. Don’t send these items: Avoid gifts like candles, soaps or magazine subscriptions, useless trinkets, office supplies, keychains, magnets and t-shirts. Avoid over- and under-spending: A corporate gift does not have to be expensive, but it should be thoughtful and useful, as well as durable and long-lasting. Rather send great gifts to a few top clients, than worthless trinkets to all your business associates. Presentation: The gift should be attractively packaged, with a personalised note or card included. Personalise: Gifts that are specific to a certain industry, or - even better - to a particular client, will be much more appreciated. Customised products and personalised gifts are also gaining popularity. Avoid in-your-face advertising: While part of a company’s marketing strategy, corporate gifts should come across as tokens of appreciation, not merely as billboards for your company’s advertising. Gifts should be branded with your company name, logo and contact details, but keep it elegant, professional and low key. Experiences: Recipients may prefer experiences to things, for example, tickets to sporting events, theatre performances or even spa treatments, but be sure to allow a choice, unless you know the recipients’ preferences. Host an end of year party: Another example of gifting an experience is hosting a party (a “Christmas party” if that terminology is appropriate to your guests) to thank business associates, creating an opportunity to get to know each other better. Send an office lunch party: A favourite food gift is one sourced from well-known local establishments in quantities that can feed the whole office. Charitable donations: A donation made to a charitable organisation on behalf of a client or supplier can also make a thoughtful corporate gift but allow the recipient to select the cause. Mind the tax implications Gifts could be tax deductible as marketing…

Comments Off on Corporate Gifting: How to Boost Your Business This Festive Season
Read more about the article Festive Season Gifts for Employees? Here’s How SARS Will Tax Them
Closeup of gift box in female hands at workplace, coffee break at workspace, door-to-door delivery, Christmas or Valentine's day concept, corporate birthday party, mother's and women's day.

Festive Season Gifts for Employees? Here’s How SARS Will Tax Them

“Think of giving not as a duty but as a privilege.” (John D. Rockefeller Jr.) Most businesses want to show appreciation to their employees at the end of a long year’s work, and the “Season of Giving” is the ideal time. A thoughtful gift will make any employee feel more recognised and appreciated, and this will improve morale and enhance perceptions about the company and could even increase employee satisfaction and loyalty. SARS, however, considers almost any kind of gift to employees as a taxable fringe benefit, and therefore companies need to check with their accountants before giving, to ensure the tax implications are fully understood and taken into consideration. What does SARS regard as gifts? Any asset, commodity, goods or property of any nature provided by the employer to the employee at no cost, or a cost which is less than the market value of that item, is regarded as a taxable benefit in the hands of the employee, as per Paragraph 2(a) of the Seventh Schedule to the Income Tax Act. This means that any gift that can be regarded as an asset will be subject to employees’ tax – whether physical or intangible, and regardless of the value, because there is also no minimum value below which gifts from an employer are exempt from tax. Furthermore, the gift will be taxable even if the gift is given to an employee’s family member, such as a partner or a child. Also remember that the onus of proof lies with your company should SARS challenge the tax treatment of any gifts to your employees. Tax on common employee gifts Tangible gifts, such as watches or electronic devices, will be taxed in the hands of the employee based on its market value, or on the cost to the employer. Intangible gifts such as flights, bus tickets or accommodation are also considered as taxable benefits to the employee and the cost to the employer is the taxable amount. Gift cards and vouchers are among the most popular gifts for employees, but beware!  These are taxed at the same rate as if it the employee received cash. In some cases, it may be better to gift cash instead of a card or voucher that would limit the employee to a single retailer or outlet. Similarly, bonusses are taxed at the same rate as other remuneration. This means that the amount of the bonus will be added to an employee’s annual salary when the rate of tax payable for the year is determined. The danger here is that the bonus amount might push some employees into a higher tax bracket. How must the tax be deducted? Depending on the nature of the gift, employers will need to determine the cash equivalent, or the market value, or the cost to the company to calculate the employee tax that must be deducted. This can be quite complex, for example, the value of a benefit where accommodation is provided depends on whether the company owns the…

Comments Off on Festive Season Gifts for Employees? Here’s How SARS Will Tax Them
Read more about the article How to Write a One-Page Business Plan
72 Hours Delivery on Clipboard. Office Desk with a Lot of Office Supplies. Clipboard with Concept - 72 Hours Delivery with Office Supplies Around. 3d Rendering. Blurred Illustration.

How to Write a One-Page Business Plan

“If you do not know where you are going, every road will get you nowhere.” (Henry A. Kissinger) Creating a business plan is one of the most important processes when running a business. It is the roadmap for the success of any business and should include everything from cash flow planning to expansion strategies and the company’s mission statement. If you want to take out a loan a full-length plan is invaluable, but on a day-to-day basis these documents can be lengthy and difficult to access. A one-page business plan is primarily a communication tool and is developed as a way to quickly summarise the key points of a business and its goals. It’s a great way to clearly define often complex issues in a simple manner and keep executives, partners or staff focused on the mission at hand. They are also a strong place to start when developing a full-length business plan and can help companies to pivot in changing times. What should a one-page business plan include? Your one-page business plan needs to include everything below, but resist going into the details. Keep each point to a few well focused sentences. Remove unnecessary words and adjectives. A Brief Description The first thing to do is to simply describe the types of products and services that make up your business. Customer Pain Points What problem are you solving for your customers? Why does your product or service exist? And why are these products or services better than those of your competitors? Avoid generalities and keep your answer focused. Competitive Advantages This is where you look at the things that make you and your company perfect for your industry. What makes you stand out? Is it the team you have put together? Your business model or a unique invention? Making Money This is the space for a three-point financial model. It should include your revenue sources, your company costs and the pricing strategy for your products. Again, avoid the specific amounts. This is not a budget. It simply points to where the money comes from and how it is spent in three sentences. Marketing Plan How do you get your product to your customers and how do you tell people about your business? What are your main sources for attracting new business? This is just a high-level overview on how you go about marketing and making sales. The Competition In one line only, describe each of your major competitors and what makes their business a success. Your Co-workers This is your chance to look at the key figures you have hired to make your company a success. Who are the most important people and why are they important? This will help you to understand which of your employees should be earmarked for promotions or bonuses, and training. Future Funding What are the major things you may need funding for over the next few years? Why do you foresee the need for money in these areas? Your “Why” Why are you…

Comments Off on How to Write a One-Page Business Plan
Read more about the article 9 Tips for Catching CV Liars
Close up of man back with fingers crossed behind. Idea of lying on job interview

9 Tips for Catching CV Liars

“No man has a good enough memory to be a successful liar” – Abraham Lincoln, President of the United States of America, 1861-1865  In a recent survey conducted by StandOutCV more than 50% of Americans admitted to lying on their CV. It’s a staggering number, and something that is taking place in a country where jobs are plentiful and finding work easy. Google searches on how to lie on a CV went up 48% in 2022 alone, and searches on how to fake a job reference went up 52% in the same time. While there is no such research on South Africa, business owners would be cautioned that a similar number is almost certainly to be expected here simply due to the tough economic conditions. The National Qualifications Framework Amendment Act 2019 makes it illegal to lie about qualifications on your CV in South Africa under punishment of a jail sentence and applicants can be made to pay back their full salary. Despite this there are a number of other ways that applicants can lie, which are not punished (e.g: past salary, job titles, and responsibilities) and which are therefore likely to be significantly more common. 9 tips for employers It’s clear that lying on a CV is everywhere, so how can you as the employer protect yourself from this seemingly common scourge? Here are our 9 tips on what to look for to catch liars cold. What do people lie about most? People lie on their CVs for many reasons. Some do it to avoid being stereotyped or simply to boost their egos, while others do it for far more nefarious reasons like earning a job they aren’t qualified for. Studies have shown that the most common areas where people lie are: 1: Education level 2: Exaggerated salary 3: Date discrepancies 4: Job titles 5: Fake references and 6: Name dropping. These are therefore the areas you need to focus on the most when trying to trip someone up in a lie. Look for telltale signs  Look for areas where people are not being specific. For example: Dates that go from year to year instead of month and year to month and year probably indicate there is something being hidden. Have they said they have a Bachelor’s degree from a specific university but not mentioned that it’s a Bachelor of Arts or Science? Look for skills that are listed but that don’t make sense for the claimed work history – why does this typist of eleven years have brick laying as their primary skill? Check LinkedIn and other online resources Candidates will happily tell lies in the shadows to one recruiter they don’t know, but will they tell those lies online where all their past colleagues can see them? Unlikely. The LinkedIn version of their CV is almost certainly much closer to the truth than anything you see on paper. Double check, check other Social Media profiles, and Google for any other online mentions of the candidate. Call the…

Comments Off on 9 Tips for Catching CV Liars

Your Tax Deadlines for December 2023

7 December – Monthly Pay-As-You-Earn (PAYE) submissions and payments 28 December – Excise Duty payments 29 December - End of 3rd Financial Quarter 29 December – Value-Added Tax (VAT) electronic submissions and payments & CIT Provisional payments where applicable. Disclaimer: The information provided herein should not be used or relied on as professional advice. No liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions nor for any loss or damage arising from reliance upon any information herein. Always contact your professional adviser for specific and detailed advice. © CA(SA)DotNews

Comments Off on Your Tax Deadlines for December 2023
Read more about the article Employee Incentives That Really Work for Small Businesses
Happy black female employee get rewarded for professional achievement handshake boss, tolerant male manager shake hand of proud african business woman promote express recognition at work concept

Employee Incentives That Really Work for Small Businesses

“Always treat your employees exactly as you want them to treat your best customers.” (Stephen R. Covey, author of The Seven Habits of Highly Effective People) Small businesses often lose their talent to large companies simply because they can’t afford the kinds of salaries and incentives on offer at a global corporate. Keeping staff happy is, however, critical for business success. Here are five employee incentives that really work to keep your staff happy, effective and engaged. 1. Allow flexible time In the modern world nothing is as precious as time and employers should not underestimate what this would mean for employee motivation. In a recent study on the 4-day work week 89% of all respondents said they would make sacrifices to work four days a week, and 54% said they would gladly work longer hours on the other four days. It costs nothing to offer employees the opportunity to set their own hours, and work when they are able. It also gives them the ability to look after families, run errands and still meet their work obligations – something larger companies may not be able to do. 2. Profit sharing Profit sharing is a bonus incentive scheme that effectively only kicks in when the company is profitable. Better yet, it provides personal incentive to employees to make the company as profitable as possible. By offering employees an equal share in the profit sharing regardless of their position you also create a strong sense of teamwork and bond them in a united cause. 3. Public recognition A big positive of working in a small company is being able to see and know each employee as an individual. Genuine recognition of achievements is therefore possible – did someone go above and beyond, or make a personal sacrifice to make a deadline? Acknowledge it publicly, in front of everyone else. In a recent survey, 92% of all employees say they are likely to repeat an action if they are recognised for it. Simple acknowledgement can be motivation enough, but if this is backed up with a real reward, like paid time off or a monetary bonus it can become even more effective. 4. Make the office more fun Small companies can introduce flexibility in office protocols as well as work hours. Think about how you can make things more relaxed in a genuine and helpful way. Consider providing a room where people can bring their children to do their homework after school pick up or allow employees to bring pets in on one day a week. Is South Africa playing a cricket test match? Put it on in the break room. Let people have a say in which coffee and tea are available and always remember birthdays with a thoughtful gift. 5. Points-based incentives A points-based incentive program allows employees to gather points and ultimately redeem them for rewards. You could develop a book of rewards your employees will genuinely enjoy from small things like free lunch and gift cards to theatre…

Comments Off on Employee Incentives That Really Work for Small Businesses
Read more about the article SARS Admin Penalties: What Taxpayers Can Do
Happy black female employee get rewarded for professional achievement handshake boss, tolerant male manager shake hand of proud african business woman promote express recognition at work concept

SARS Admin Penalties: What Taxpayers Can Do

“…imposing administrative non-compliance penalties is to ensure the widest possible compliance with the provisions of a Tax Act … they are imposed impartially, consistently and proportionately to the seriousness and duration of the non-compliance.” (SARS) The Tax Administration Act stipulates that SARS can issue administrative penalties for outstanding tax returns. In previous years, penalties were only imposed on taxpayers with more than one tax return outstanding. Since December, due to changes in the Tax Administration Act, SARS can apply administrative penalties to taxpayers who have a single outstanding return. As a result, hundreds of thousands of South African taxpayers have received administrative penalties from SARS this year, many of them facing tax debt of tens of thousands of rands, accumulated over many years. When are penalties incurred? SARS can raise administrative penalties if a taxpayer is non-compliant in a specific area of their tax affairs, including Personal Income Tax (PIT) and Corporate Income Tax (CIT), Pay as You Earn (PAYE) or value-added tax (VAT). A percentage-based penalty is imposed when a payment is received late. To prevent a payment from being received late, the payment must be received into the SARS bank account on or before the due date. SARS also imposes fixed amount administrative non-compliance penalties for outstanding returns and/or non-compliance for PIT or CIT. These include the once off PIT penalty imposed where the taxpayer submitted a return late as from 2020 year of assessment onwards. There is also a recurring penalty for the failure to submit a return for PIT and CIT. The fixed amount penalty is based on a taxpayer’s taxable income and can range from R250 a month (where there is an assessed loss or no taxable income) up to R16,000 a month (where the taxable income exceeds R50 million) for each month that the non-compliance continues. For PIT, the recurring penalty is imposed where the taxpayer failed to submit an income tax return for years of assessment from 2007 onwards, when that person has one or more income tax returns outstanding. For CIT, the recurring penalty is imposed where the company has failed to submit an income tax return for years of assessment from 2009, where SARS has issued the company with a final demand and the company failed to submit the return within 21 business days of the final demand. As such, penalties are now applied monthly for tax returns dating back many years. Companies also face administrative penalties for PAYE. If an employer has failed to submit an EMP501 reconciliation declaration on time, an admin penalty of 1% per month over 10 months, based on the employer’s liability over 12 months, is levied. What are the costs of the penalties? Percentage-based penalties are often steep, such as the 10% late payment penalty on VAT or PAYE, or the penalty of 1% over 10 months where an EMP501 was not submitted in time. But it is the recurring penalties levied every month that really snowball. This is because SARS will keep penalising non-compliant taxpayers month…

Comments Off on SARS Admin Penalties: What Taxpayers Can Do
Read more about the article The Hidden Costs of Starting a Business
Happy black female employee get rewarded for professional achievement handshake boss, tolerant male manager shake hand of proud african business woman promote express recognition at work concept

The Hidden Costs of Starting a Business

“There are only two things in a business that make money – innovation and marketing, everything else is cost” (Peter Drucker, author) Running a business is never cheap and starting one up may be one of the most expensive things you ever do. According to the U.S. Small Business Administration, most microbusinesses cost around R60 000 just to get to the point where you are ready to start operating. Clearly, larger businesses with extensive infrastructure would cost much more. While it’s easy to plan for obvious production costs, office equipment, marketing and even taxes, the hidden costs we list below may come as something of a surprise. Registration, licences and permits Business registration is a cost that is absolutely essential for all businesses. Just registering a business name will require a payment to the CIPC. Depending on your industry there may also be licences and permits necessary to manufacture or sell your products. This is particularly relevant in the manufacture and supply of foods. Restaurants, hotels and B&Bs may also need permits to offer specific services and any business that wants to make use of natural resources, such as fish, water, or land will undoubtedly also need to pay for government permission. Health clinics, spas, nightclubs and many more will also have to find money to meet permit requirements. Business Insurance Not every business owner needs to take out insurance, but anyone with a business that deals with the public would be wise to at least cover their liabilities in that regard. If employees are going to operate onsite, employee liability insurance is also highly recommended. In addition to this you may need to insure key equipment, vehicles, and important and expensive stock items. Shrinkage Shrinkage is any loss of inventory that occurs before it can be delivered to your customer. New business owners may not account for any loss whatsoever, but studies indicate that depending on the industry, shrinkage can account for up to 7% of turnover. Usually though, shrinkage will be in the region of 1% to 2% of turnover, which can add up.  These losses come from customer thefts, employee fraud, administrative errors and damage, and need to be controlled, but the truth is, some will always sneak through and have to be accounted for in any business calculations. Delayed payments New business owners might develop their projections based on their sales always going to customers who pay for the products or services as soon as they are received. The reality of doing business is that this is extremely rare. Some large corporates may only pay on a 90-day cycle. Meanwhile, new stock must be purchased/developed and staff have to be paid. Taking loans to cover costs because of delays will result in interest payments, whereas monies held back to meet these payment requirements will mean that other investments or growth opportunities will have to be delayed. All of this incurs unexpected costs. It is therefore essential that you meet with your accountant to determine the most…

Comments Off on The Hidden Costs of Starting a Business
Read more about the article Dispute with SARS? Here are the New Rules…
Happy black female employee get rewarded for professional achievement handshake boss, tolerant male manager shake hand of proud african business woman promote express recognition at work concept

Dispute with SARS? Here are the New Rules…

“The importance of the ability of taxpayers to challenge the legality of actions and decisions within the tax system is internationally recognised.” (Taxpayers’ Rights: Theory, Origin and Implementation) In South Africa, taxpayers have the right to dispute tax assessments, interest, late payment penalties, and administrative penalties for various taxes, including Personal Income Tax (PIT), Corporate Income Tax (CIT), Value-Added Tax (VAT), and Pay-As-You-Earn (PAYE). This is done by submitting requests such as Request for Reason, Request for Late Submission (Condonation), Request for Remission (RFR), Notice of Objection (NOO), Notice of Appeal (NOA), and Suspension of Payment. Recent changes to the procedures to lodge an objection and appeal against an assessment or decision aim to enhance the efficiency and effectiveness of tax dispute resolution. Here are the key changes: Taxpayers now have 80 business days to file a Notice of Objection against a SARS assessment or decision, a significant increase from the previous 30-day window. Taxpayers are not obliged to wait the full 80-day period. All substantiating documentation must now be submitted within the extended 80-day objection period, making it crucial to request reasons for an assessment before objecting. Previously taxpayers were only required to list the substantiating documents.  Taxpayers can request an additional 30-day extension beyond the 80-day period for valid reasons and, in exceptional cases, an extension up to three years. Taxpayers and SARS can agree on shorter periods for dispute resolution, not just extensions as per the old rules. Taxpayers can appeal the outcome of an objection on new grounds not raised in the NOO, if it doesn't pertain to a previously unchallenged part of the assessment. Alternative Dispute Resolution (ADR) changes now require facilitators to have appropriate tax experience and to be acceptable to both parties. A senior SARS official must appoint the facilitator within 15 days of the ADR commencement. Interim ADR reports must be delivered within five days after the meeting, and final reports within 10 days following the end of ADR proceedings. SARS must now issue assessments within 45 days of a settlement being reached in a dispute and/or after receipt of the Tax Court’s decision from the Registrar. SARS must provide a statement explaining why they made an assessment and why they oppose an appeal to the tax court. SARS can now add new grounds for disallowing objections or appeals, unless it changes the assessment basis significantly or requires a new assessment. Changes to the Tax Board and Tax Court processes include the issuance of subpoenas by the Tax Board clerk or Tax Court registrar, with parties having the right to challenge these if they find them irrelevant or unreasonable. An email address is now expressly included as an ‘address for delivery’. What’s still the same? SARS must inform taxpayers of assessments, notifications or communications issued by also sending a message to the taxpayer’s last known number or email. Keep your contact details updated and check your compliance status regularly, especially when receiving emails or SMSs from SARS.               Submitting an objection or appeal does not…

Comments Off on Dispute with SARS? Here are the New Rules…

Your Tax Deadlines for November 2023

7 November – Monthly Pay-As-You-Earn (PAYE) submissions and payments 29 November – Excise Duty payments 30 November – Value-Added Tax (VAT) electronic submissions and payments & CIT Provisional payments where applicable. Disclaimer: The information provided herein should not be used or relied on as professional advice. No liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions nor for any loss or damage arising from reliance upon any information herein. Always contact your professional adviser for specific and detailed advice. © CA(SA)DotNews

Comments Off on Your Tax Deadlines for November 2023
Read more about the article The Risky New Trust Landscape – What Trustees Need to do Now
Metaphor of business solution, support, coaching, insurance, innovation and another helping business themes. Wide banner composition with office in background.

The Risky New Trust Landscape – What Trustees Need to do Now

“The common assumption is that trusts are some kind of tax panacea...Then, conversely, from a South African Revenue Service (SARS) perspective, trusts are viewed with a degree of suspicion and mistrust. [T]he truth lies somewhere between these positions.” (Broomberg on Tax Strategy) The legal and tax landscape in which South African trusts operate has changed substantially over the last few months, thanks to changes to the Trust Property Control Act (“Trust Act”) and the Financial Intelligence Centre Act (“FICA”) by the General Laws (Anti Money-Laundering and Combating Terrorism Financing) Amendment Act, as well as new rules and requirements from SARS. These changes impose new duties on trustees, and apply to all trustees, not only independent trustees. 1. Disclosure to Accountable Institutions you engage with, and record-keeping Changes to the Trust Act impose two specific new requirements on trusts to combat money laundering and crime-financed terrorism, and failure to comply is an offence. If convicted, trustees face a fine of up to R10 million, or imprisonment for a period of up to five years, or both. These requirements became effective on 1 April 2023, leaving most trustees already non-compliant. The first new requirement is that a trustee must disclose to any “accountable institution” (see here for the full list of what comprises an accountable institution, but the definition includes banks, attorneys, estate agents, long term insurers and brokers, trust companies and the like) that he/she engages with it in his/her capacity as a trustee, and that the relevant transaction or business relationship relates to trust property. The trustee must also record the details of the accountable institution the trust is engaging with. 2. Compiling and registering beneficial ownership The second requirement imposed by the changes to the Trust Act is to establish and record the beneficial ownership information of a trust; to keep an up-to-date record of this information; and to lodge a register of the beneficial ownership information prescribed with the Master of the High Court. This second requirement recently doubled, as SARS issued notice that trusts will now also be required to submit beneficial ownership details when completing a trust tax return, among a number of other tax changes affecting trusts, as discussed below. 3. Filing third-party returns – the IT3(t) A further onerous obligation was imposed by SARS: Most trusts are now also required to file third-party returns, in the same way banks report interest income and medical aids report medical aid tax information to SARS, which it uses to, for example, pre-populate tax returns. While trust distributions were not previously reported to SARS by third parties, the new requirements oblige trusts to file third-party returns to SARS to declare distributions and vesting amounts to beneficiaries. This must be done via an IT3(t) report which contains prescribed information relating to trust distributions and their beneficiaries and requires trusts to report on demographic information of the trust, demographic information of trust persons/beneficiaries, trust financial flows, and any amounts vested in a beneficiary, including net income, capital gains and capital amounts. The ITR3(t) must…

Comments Off on The Risky New Trust Landscape – What Trustees Need to do Now
Read more about the article Tips for Pacing Business Growth for Sustainability
Employee asking questions to confident smiling female business coach, speaker, multiracial colleagues group at meeting, talking about growth of sales graph, good result, training team of office workers

Tips for Pacing Business Growth for Sustainability

“Growth is never by mere chance; it is the result of forces working together” – (James Cash Penney, Founder of JCPenney) Every business decision carries profound consequences for the enduring existence of the organisation, and this is no more true than when it is applied to those decisions affecting business growth. Knowing how and when to expand, open new branches, roll out new features or engineer new products takes planning and is not something leaders should be trying to do by the seat of their pants in response to external events. A meticulously crafted business growth strategy is therefore essential to plotting sustainable growth. Here are the things you will need to consider when constructing yours. Set clear targets You know you want to be successful, but do you know what that success looks like? Just how much money do you want to make? What do you want the lifestyles of your employees and yourself to be like? What kind of turnover and profit would you consider to be successful? What would you like your reputation in the industry to be? If you haven’t considered the destination for your journey, how will you ever plot how to get there? Talk to customers You probably already realise the value of getting expert advice. Speaking to accountants about your finances, or lawyers about contracting just makes sense. But perhaps you have not considered that no one knows your customer’s needs quite like your customers? When choosing which customers to speak to, first look to those who are your ideal customers – those people who are getting good value from your services and who are happy with your products. By speaking to them, you will slowly uncover patterns for what you are doing right and what a successful business in your industry looks like. The next step is to speak to those customers who are not happy with your service and find out why. This will help you to uncover the opportunities you are missing, and the things you need to fix to get yourself onto the right growth path. Don’t ask these customers what you should be doing though, as changing everything based on the impressions of a few disgruntled clients is a sure-fire way to failure. Rather ask them what the challenge was that they came to you to fix, why they came to you specifically, and then what they were feeling at each stage of their journey. Once again, it is about uncovering patterns, and by asking these sorts of questions you will quickly work out whether you did something wrong, whether your services lack potential solutions the industry might need or whether you were simply the wrong fit all along. Now that you know what a successful client interaction looks like, and where your business is falling short, it becomes easier to see which holes will need to be plugged and where you can comfortably expand over the coming years. Build a road map Now that you know where…

Comments Off on Tips for Pacing Business Growth for Sustainability
Read more about the article Why the Four-Day Working Week Just Might Happen
Employee asking questions to confident smiling female business coach, speaker, multiracial colleagues group at meeting, talking about growth of sales graph, good result, training team of office workers

Why the Four-Day Working Week Just Might Happen

“We need to do a better job of putting ourselves higher on our own ‘to-do’ list.” (Michelle Obama, former First Lady of the United States) The four-day work week has been in the news a lot recently with a number of significant studies and trials coming out in favour of the arrangement. While many would assume that workers are thrilled with four-day weeks, but that bosses are finding it hinders business, the results do not back this up. Repeatedly, these studies are coming out in support of the four-day work week with the benefits simply racking up. Here are the reasons why it just might work: Employees want it In terms of work schedules, employees are increasingly seeking flexibility, with a four-day workweek emerging as their top preference, according to a recent survey of American employees conducted by Bankrate. The survey revealed that a significant majority of full-time workers and job seekers, a staggering 81%, express strong support for a four-day workweek over the conventional five-day arrangement. What's more, an impressive 89% of these respondents indicated their willingness to make sacrifices in order to enjoy a four-day workweek. Among these concessions, a noteworthy 54% are open to working longer hours, while a substantial 37% are even willing to explore career changes or transition to different industries. Additionally, a considerable 27% are open to increasing their in-person office presence or working entirely on-site. Productivity Increases Many assumed that a four-day work week would hamper productivity, but a recent study in the UK that included 61 companies and more than 3000 workers found exactly the opposite. The study, which followed the companies and their workers through a six-month test of a 32-hour, four-day week, with no loss of pay for employees was the largest of its kind, making its results extremely impactful. Perhaps more impressive though, is that after the study was over, 56 of the 61 companies that were involved decided to continue with the shorter week indefinitely, and two more said they were voluntarily extending the trial. Among the benefits reported by companies were an increase in revenue over the same period in previous years, as well as a sharp decline in resignations. One company reported a productivity increase of 22%, a lower carbon footprint as well as an increase of 88% in job applications, and a 66% decrease in absenteeism. The results back up those achieved by a smaller pilot program that covered another 30 companies and 1000 employees. Employees are happier As for employees, well they were almost unanimously happy. Participation in the above trial led to a significant decrease in people saying they lacked sufficient time during the week to attend to their responsibilities towards children, grandchildren, or elderly family members. Additionally, they reported feeling reduced work stress as well as better mental health, more time for exercise, better sleep and generally less negativity. 55% reported an increased ability to work. The results also suggest that the shortened workweek could lead to better gender parity as the time men reported spending with their…

Comments Off on Why the Four-Day Working Week Just Might Happen
Read more about the article Don’t Fall Prey to the Most Common Cybercrimes!
Employee asking questions to confident smiling female business coach, speaker, multiracial colleagues group at meeting, talking about growth of sales graph, good result, training team of office workers

Don’t Fall Prey to the Most Common Cybercrimes!

“The bottom line is that cyber risks sit right alongside rising systemic risks, and is the biggest emerging, and constantly evolving risk facing businesses today.” (SHA Specialist Risk Review 2022) In Africa, Interpol has identified phishing – particularly Business Email Compromise (BEC) – as well as online scams, as both the biggest current crime threats, and the crimes most likely to increase in the next three to five years. This is Interpol’s list of the prominent cyberthreats identified in the African region: Business Email Compromise Phishing Cyber extortion including ransomware attacks Online scams Banking trojans and stealers Below, find out how these cybercrimes are perpetrated and how to protect yourself, your company and your employees with tips from SABRIC and CISA. Business Email Compromise (BEC) For 7 consecutive years, BEC attacks have been the most financially devastating cyber threat worldwide, and continue to be the most prevalent cybercrime, says Interpol. A type of phishing attack, it causes significant financial losses and often reputational damage. It includes cybercriminals using an organisation’s email account to send out fraudulent messages with malicious links or attachments that install malware or steal confidential information. Most commonly, however, BEC involves cybercriminals manipulating emails, especially payment requests containing bank account details. This is because it’s common business practice to send confirmation of or changes to bank details, or invoices containing bank details, via email. In BEC attacks, these emails are intercepted - or fraudulent emails or invoices are created - changing the account details to the cybercriminal’s account. Any payments subsequently made are lost to cybercrime. A recent High Court ruling in this regard, set a precedent applicable to all businesses, as the judge noted: "… the plaintiff’s case established clearly that sending bank details by email is inherently dangerous, and so must either be avoided in favour of, for example, a secure portal or it must be accompanied by other precautionary measures like telephonic confirmation or appropriate warnings which are securely communicated." Specific BEC preventative measures include: Inform clients that your company will never change banking details via letter, SMS or email. Consider not putting banking details on your invoices - rather ask customers to phone you to check the details they have. Use bank-defined beneficiaries for online banking where possible. Before making payment to a supplier’s bank account after receiving an emailed invoice, check that the bank account details on the invoice are genuine. If you receive any instructions to change banking details from a supplier, call them to verify. Check with your insurers if you can get cover for this risk. Phishing One of the oldest, most pervasive cyberthreats and a major source of stolen credentials and information, phishing is a cyber-attack aimed at stealing sensitive information like usernames, passwords and credit card details, typically using deceptive emails or websites, apparently from trusted sources, that contain malicious attachments or links to viruses or malware. Phishing is linked to an estimated 90% of data breaches and causes not only direct financial losses but enables other forms of cybercrime. Cyber…

Comments Off on Don’t Fall Prey to the Most Common Cybercrimes!

Your Tax Deadlines for October 2023

6 October - Monthly Pay-As-You-Earn (PAYE) submissions and payments 30 October - Excise Duty payments 31 October - Value-Added Tax (VAT) electronic submissions and payments & CIT Provisional payments where applicable. Disclaimer: The information provided herein should not be used or relied on as professional advice. No liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions nor for any loss or damage arising from reliance upon any information herein. Always contact your professional adviser for specific and detailed advice. © CA(SA)DotNews

Comments Off on Your Tax Deadlines for October 2023
Read more about the article Using a “Risk Matrix” to Risk-Proof Your Business
Businessman is using tablet pc and selecting risk management.

Using a “Risk Matrix” to Risk-Proof Your Business

“Don’t be fearful of risks. Understand them, and manage and minimize them to an acceptable level.” (Naved Abdali, Financial journalist and author) Managing risk in your business is absolutely critical for developing it to success. Knowing exactly which threats are really relevant and which will help any leader to develop strategy and prepare for the worst eventualities. One of the simplest and most useful ways of determining the greatest risks to a business is through developing a “risk matrix”, otherwise known as a “risk assessment matrix”. Risk matrices give leaders a visual way of understanding the risks in their business by plotting these risks on a grid. An example to illustrate… Let’s illustrate the concept with the help of an example. A catering company has identified three risks to its business and has plotted them on a typical matrix which looks like this – Source: Adapted from a template available for free download from ProjectManager.com As you can see – The caterer has decided that a food poisoning event is deemed to be unlikely but with severe consequences. This puts it in the orange “High” category. Staff not arriving for shift is deemed likely with major consequences. This puts it in the red “Very High” category. Catering customer paying a month late is deemed possible with insignificant consequences. This puts it in the green “Low” category. This allows the caterer to visually compare the identified risks with one another at a glance, and to prioritise addressing them. Create your risk matrix in the context of your own business Any risk that is high on the likelihood scale and high on the consequence scale needs to be paid attention to immediately, while conversely those that are low on both axes can be attended to last. Leaders would determine where each individual risk falls on the matrix dependent on the context for their own business. For example, while a food poisoning risk may be a very low risk and unlikely event at a mining company, it is more likely for, and could mean bankruptcy for, a catering company. This simple outline may differ depending on the organisation or leader using it. Often, they appear colour coded with severe risks marked in red and less severe ones in blue or green. The effect of the matrix, however, remains the same, so choose whichever format works for you. How to build your risk matrix There are essentially four steps to creating a risk matrix, each of which will be influenced by your knowledge of your business and its particular details. 1. Identify risks The first step is to identify all the likely risks to your business. You cannot plan for things that you don’t know about and haven’t imagined. At this stage every avenue should be covered, and each eventuality considered. The catering company cannot prepare for a mass food poisoning if they have never even considered it enough to put it on their risk matrix. Risks are not just direct dire threats, however, and…

Comments Off on Using a “Risk Matrix” to Risk-Proof Your Business

Common Tax-Related Criminal Offences, and How to Avoid Them…

“The difference between tax avoidance and tax evasion is the thickness of a prison wall.” (Denis Healey, former British prime minister)     Section 234 in Chapter 17 of the Tax Administration Act (TAA) sets out a list of criminal tax offences. If prosecuted and convicted of a tax criminal offence, taxpayers will - at the least - be subjected to a substantial fine and may even face the maximum penalty of imprisonment for up to two years. There are also other harsh consequences of a criminal conviction under section 234, such as a negative impact on the eligibility of individuals to hold certain positions and to emigrate from South Africa, as well as reputational damage and a loss of both shareholder value and stakeholder trust for corporate taxpayers. These tax criminal offences range from serious offences, such as intentional tax evasion and frustrating SARS in carrying out its duties, to relatively minor breaches, such as failing to notify SARS of a change in registered particulars. Common tax criminal offences Not registering for tax purposes to evade paying taxes due. Not submitting returns to SARS as and when required to evade paying taxes. Not truthfully responding to SARS’ questions. Not declaring income to evade paying tax on that income. Lying about expenses, like business mileage or medical contributions, to reduce tax payable or obtain an undue refund. Submitting fraudulent invoices to reduce Income Tax and VAT payable or obtain fraudulent refunds. Employers deducting tax from employees (PAYE) and never paying it over to SARS. Vendors, whether registered for VAT or not, charging VAT and never paying it over to SARS. Not notifying SARS of a change in registered particulars. Not retaining records as required under the TAA. Issuing an erroneous, incomplete or false document required to be issued under a tax Act. Neglecting to disclose to SARS any material facts which should have been disclosed. Obstructing SARS officials in doing their duties. How SARS views taxpayer behaviour While taxpayers were previously merely penalised for human errors and simple mistakes - which are common given the complex tax processes and strict deadlines - a taxpayer can now be found guilty of an offence without SARS having to show that the taxpayer wilfully, deliberately and knowingly committed the offence. This means even inadvertent or administrative errors can be penalised with a maximum penalty and that a substantially expanded range of taxpayer behaviours - and a greater number of taxpayers - are now open to criminal sanctions. How to avoid committing tax criminal offences SARS notes that among the steps that a reasonable person may take to avoid committing tax criminal offences is “employing an accountant, tax practitioner, or other tax professional to complete returns, or from whom to obtain advice before completing a return with entries that are not understood or adopting a position with tax implications.” Be sure to choose a specialist who is appropriately qualified and experienced, as well as a member of a professional controlling body that enforces strict standards, such as SAICA…

Comments Off on Common Tax-Related Criminal Offences, and How to Avoid Them…

Corporate Taxpayers: Hello Tougher SARS Verifications

"Any taxpayer can be selected by SARS for verification for the purpose of proper administration of tax, including on a risk basis." (SARS) Companies must, within 12 months of their financial year-end, submit to SARS an Income Tax Return for Companies (ITR14), as well as supporting documents, declaring their full income tax responsibility to SARS. This declaration, return and supporting documents may be selected for verification by SARS. A verification involves the comparison of the information declared on the return to the taxpayer’s financial and accounting records and other supporting documents. The purpose of a verification is to ensure that a declaration or return represents a taxpayer’s tax position fairly and accurately. Previously, when companies were identified for a verification, SARS required them to submit the Supplementary Declaration for Companies or Close Corporations or IT14SD form. This is no longer required by SARS, but it will increase the scrutiny companies face when selected for verification. What has changed? The requirement to submit an IT14SD in a verification case is replaced by a letter requesting specific relevant documents based on the reason for verification. SARS also says that as of September last year, companies are no longer required to submit any outstanding IT14SDs and that should taxpayers receive any further notification or final demand letter to submit an IT14SD, such request should be ignored. However, taxpayers should always check with their accountant before disregarding correspondence of any kind from SARS. What’s still the same? The requirement to submit relevant documents upon submission of the ITR14. All correspondence will still be issued as before. The process of dealing with the verification case will remain the same. The submission of specific relevant documents will be required during the verification process. The verification of a company always requires the submission of a signed set of Annual Financial Statements (AFS), as well as a detailed Tax Computation and the underlying supporting documentation/schedules (e.g. Tax pack). When requested to submit specific relevant documents based on the reason for the verification, companies are still required to submit the documents within 21 working days. How does this affect your company? When a company is now identified for verification, it will be notified of the verification, as is the current practice and will be requested to: Submit specific relevant documents based on the reason for the verification, or Submit a revised Corporate Income Tax ITR14 return. To comply with a request to submit specific relevant documents, the requested documents must be uploaded using eFiling, or any other submission channel, including SARS Online Query system (SOQS). Once the relevant documents are uploaded, a SARS verifier will be able to action the case. If the relevant documents are deemed insufficient, or additional documents are required, this will be requested. The relevant documents must still be provided within 21 working days. If a company does not comply with the request for relevant documents, SARS will raise a revised assessment to resolve the verification case, and will add back the related expenses, dependent on the specific relevant…

Comments Off on Corporate Taxpayers: Hello Tougher SARS Verifications

Quiet Quitting and How to Prevent It

“Quiet quitting” isn’t laziness...When they don’t feel cared about, people eventually stop caring. If you want them to go the extra mile, start with meaningful work, respect, and fair pay.” – (Adam Grant, organizational psychologist and speaker) The idea of the recently acknowledged trend of quiet quitting is not really new at all. Some people have been coming to work and doing the bare minimum since work has existed. It has, however, become a lot more noticeable and, more important, socially acceptable since the pandemic. It’s therefore unsurprising that a 2023 Gallup report states that as few as 32% of employees now class themselves as engaged at work. As any business leader knows, workers who are only barely fulfilling the terms of their contracts in the least productive ways can be detrimental to corporate culture and bottom line, and “quiet quitting” therefore does need to be addressed. Causes The time spent at home with families during the pandemic has awakened many employees to what work/life balance could be like with a little more life and a little less work. Rather than being the habit it had been before the pandemic, the return to work and the daily commute now seemed unnecessary and expensive. In instances where employees were forced to return to the office, resentment built and, without meaningful communication and explanation from management, began to fester. At its core, therefore, quiet quitting is not laziness. It’s a direct response to a perception that employees are being used and that management does not really care about their needs, desires or hopes. If they don’t care about me, why should I care about my job? What can be done? Reward employees adequately The first step toward making an employee feel valued is to actually value them. Resources on the internet make it extremely easy for employees to see what other companies are paying for similar roles and if they aren’t earning the same, they will feel undervalued. Paying a good salary also leads to better employee retention, which lowers your recruitment and training costs and in businesses with small skill pools can ensure you stay ahead of the game. Your accountant will be able to assist you to determine just what you can afford to pay for each role, and how best to structure benefits to get the most from taxes. Take care of employee mental health Those who engage in quiet quitting often state that their mental health was a critical reason why they did so. Proactively addressing your employees’ mental health needs is therefore a priority if you want them to be engaged at work.It is essential that you make sure work/life boundaries are a built-in aspect of any job. Simple rules like preventing employees from calling each other after hours, or keeping lunch hours free for lunch, will go a long way toward ensuring your employees don’t have to draw those lines themselves. Other ideas include matching overtime with additional time off or giving employees their child’s birthday…

Comments Off on Quiet Quitting and How to Prevent It

Your Tax Deadlines for September 2023

7 September - Monthly Pay-As-You-Earn (PAYE) submissions and payments 28 September - Excise Duty payments 29 September – End of the 2nd Financial Quarter, Value-Added Tax (VAT) electronic submissions and payments, CIT Provisional payments where applicable. Disclaimer: The information provided herein should not be used or relied on as professional advice. No liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions nor for any loss or damage arising from reliance upon any information herein. Always contact your professional adviser for specific and detailed advice. © CA(SA)DotNews

Comments Off on Your Tax Deadlines for September 2023
Read more about the article Tax Season 2023 Now Open – What’s New and What’s Not
Word taxes 2022 near alarm clock on blue background. The concept of paying the tax. Payment time. Reporting period. Deadline. Income annual. Top view. 3d render

Tax Season 2023 Now Open – What’s New and What’s Not

“The submission of accurate personal income tax returns on time is important for a seamless filing season. Taxpayers must take control of their own tax affairs to ensure they are aware of their obligations and remain compliant.” (SARS Commissioner Edward Kieswetter) SARS recently announced the dates and changes for the 2023 Tax Season, which opened on 7 July 2023 for individuals (non-provisional taxpayers and provisional taxpayers), as well as for trusts. The deadline dates are as follows: Non-provisional taxpayers who were auto assessed have until the normal filing season deadline, 23 October 2023, to file an amended return. Individuals who were auto assessed will receive an SMS or email from SARS. Non-provisional taxpayers who are required to file a return and did not receive a notification from SARS that they were auto assessed must submit a Personal Income Tax Return (ITR12) before 23 October 2023. Provisional taxpayers as well as trusts can file a return until 23 January 2024. What’s still the same? Much stays the same as last year, including that SARS will again issue auto assessments to taxpayers whose tax affairs are less complicated, usually non-provisional taxpayers who are formally employed. SARS will send an SMS and/or email to inform taxpayers of the auto assessment, which can be viewed on eFiling or the SARS MobiApp. The auto assessments are based on the data SARS collects from employers, financial institutions, medical schemes, retirement annuity fund administrators and other third-party data providers. If you agree with your auto-assessment - and have confirmed with your accountant that everything is in order - you are not required to file a tax return and you do not need to do anything further. Where your assessment shows that you owe tax to SARS, payment must be made on or before the payment due date displayed on the “Notice of Assessment” (ITA34). If a refund is due, simply wait for the refund, which can be expected within approximately seventy-two (72) hours if your banking details with SARS are correct. If you are not in agreement with the auto-assessment, you can edit the declaration by completing and filing a tax return, along with the necessary supporting documents, before 23 October 2023, to enable SARS to consider a revised assessment. What’s new this year? Extended auto assessment deadline - this year SARS will allow taxpayers, who did not agree with the auto assessment outcome, to file an amended return until the normal filing season deadline, 23 October 2023. This is a change from the 40 days allowed last year. Where an auto-assessment is issued after 23 October 2023, the 40 business days will start on the date of the notice of the assessment The payment due datesfor non-provisional eFilers will be adjusted to: 30 days after a notice of assessment has been issued for taxpayers who have not been auto-assessment; or 30 days post Filing Season 2023 closing date for auto-assessed taxpayers. Spouses married in community of property assessment - this filing season SARS has retrieved “Married in community of…

Comments Off on Tax Season 2023 Now Open – What’s New and What’s Not
Read more about the article The True Cost of an Employee
Fair pay for a team of subordinate employees. Compensation in fostering employee motivation engagement. Treating employees fairly. Promoting a positive work culture. Providing funding, paying salaries

The True Cost of an Employee

“The value of a business is a function of how well the financial capital and intellectual capital are managed by human capital.” (Dave Bookbinder, author) There are a lot of factors that go into working out the true cost of an employee. According to the US Small Business Administration, employees really cost between 1.25 and 1.4 times their monthly wages.  Understanding why this is, is critical to working out whether the company can really afford to bring someone onto the team. Determining the true cost of an employee helps a company to draw up better budgets, cost products more accurately and ultimately, make more profit. Here are all the things you need to consider before choosing to onboard a new hire. Salary: The monthly wage paid to an employee is usually the base for deciding whether a company can afford to bring them on board. Obviously, the full “Cost to company” monthly wage needs to be taken into account including taxes, UIF and any other built-in components such as equity schemes or medical aid. The salary also includes the cost of leave. All employees are by law allowed to take holidays and days off when they are ill. These are days that you are paying your employee, but not gaining any benefit. Additional employees: When you hire new employees, you may also need to consider hiring other people to manage those people, conduct the hiring process, administer employee disputes and complaints and ensure they are paid timeously each month. While new business owners may find it possible to do this themselves for one or two new employees, this can quickly start taking over in terms of hours, meaning the company owner is no longer doing their own vital job. It is advised that the costs of HR, finance and middle management are therefore looked at separately as this will give you a clearer idea of the ongoing costs for each employee. Onboarding and training: From the minute you start writing the advert for a job posting, the cost of hiring an employee starts to add up. How much time is lost sifting through CVs, conducting interviews and running background checks? Once they are onboard, they will need to be trained on the company systems and rules and will take time to get used to their role. How much time do other employees need to do this rather than their own jobs? Employers should also not expect peak performance right from the beginning and this loss of productivity also has a cost. Equipment: Any employee you hire will need to be given equipment, the cost of which will be determined by your industry. Everything from overalls to laptops and company cell phones as well as desks, chairs and meeting rooms need to be considered. What software do they need installed and how much is the annual subscription? How much office space does each employee take up? What does that space cost you to rent each month? On top of this comes costs like toilet paper, lighting,…

Comments Off on The True Cost of an Employee
Read more about the article Tips for Getting out of Business Debt
Debt Management Plan - linear text arrow concept with notebook, smartphone, pens and coffee mug on desktop - 3d render illustration.

Tips for Getting out of Business Debt

“Borrowing isn't inherently bad; it depends a lot on what the debt is financing” (Stephen Moore, writer and economic commentator)  Taking on debt can be a good thing for a company. It can fund expansions, help you seize market share or diversify offerings. Handled incorrectly it can, however, lead to severe problems that could ultimately result in bankruptcy. Managing company debt is, therefore, something that should always be done alongside your company accountant, who can advise on whether taking on new debts is possible, whether the debt will pay itself off and how best to keep the payments down. Understanding just how debt works is, however, essential for any business owner and knowing how to pay it off before it becomes trouble is a skill that needs to be nurtured. These are our tips for paying off business debt. 1. Analyse and prioritise The first step to breaking free from debt is understanding it. By knowing exactly how much you owe and to whom, and the different interest rates and payments involved, you get to take control of that debt. Look at the debts that are the most crippling and which cost you the most in interest each month and target paying these off first. Pay any extra money you have there and in the long run your bank balance will thank you. 2. Cut expenses No matter how closely you monitor your expenses on a day-to-day basis, there are always items that can be cut to finance debt repayments. Your accountant can help you to analyse your monthly expenses and find areas for improvement. Whether you are making multiple small savings, such as trading to less expensive office coffee, and buying energy saving light bulbs or selling vehicles that aren’t currently utilised, each cent found will make a difference. 3. Shorten your payment cycle Many businesses operate on an invoicing system which gives clients a certain amount of time to pay for a product or service. The standard amounts are generally 30, 60 or 90 days. While it may be beneficial to clients, having long payment cycles can unnecessarily hurt the supplier. By getting paid sooner, a business is able to maximise the interest it receives on the income, or, in the case of companies with debt, decrease the interest they pay on any loan. 4. Negotiate better debt repayment terms If your business goes under, your creditors will lose the vast majority of their money. To prevent this from happening, don’t be afraid to approach the banks, or other lenders to renegotiate your payment limits, or interest rates. It is in your creditor’s best interests to ensure you pay (and to keep your business for the future!) so you might be surprised by what they are willing to do when you say you are struggling. 5. Consolidate debt Depending on how your debt is currently structured and the different interest rates, it may be advantageous to consolidate that debt. Consolidating debt means taking out one large loan with…

Comments Off on Tips for Getting out of Business Debt
Read more about the article SARS Warning: Beware Scam Emails!
Cropped rear view of successful businesswoman busy using computer at the office desk. Young female entrepreneur working hard to achieve her business goals, typing on PC with blank screen copy space

SARS Warning: Beware Scam Emails!

“The backbone of any successful phishing attack is a well-designed spoofed email or spoofed website, which is why it pays to have a healthy level of scepticism when it comes to opening emails and visiting websites.” (Phishing.org) With Tax Season 2023 upon us, expect an upsurge in scam emails, seemingly from SARS but actually clever attempts by online criminals to swindle you. “Phishing” is a cyberattack that uses fraudulent emails made to look as if they come from a reputable source – such as SARS - to trick people into disclosing sensitive personal information or taking an action such as clicking on a link that installs malware on their systems. While fraudulent SMSs “smishing” and phone calls or “vishing” are also used, email “phishing” is the preferred method. Examples from SARS include emails that appear to be from returns@sars.co.za or refunds@sars.co.za, notifying taxpayers that they are eligible to receive tax refunds or owe SARS money. One of the most recent scams involves an email titled ‘eFiling Credit Request’ that asks the email recipient to click on a link to view the amount. Another scam email titled ‘Debt Management – Final Demand’ guides the email recipient to download a ‘statement of account’. New scams are popping up all the time – for examples see SARS’ Scams and Phishing webpage. These emails contain attachments, icons or links to false forms and fake websites made to look like the SARS website, to fool people into entering personal information or sharing one-time pins (OTPs). Those caught by phishing often suffer financial loss as well as psychological trauma, while some may be unaware that they are victims of crime. It may also result in a breach of a company’s data security, as employees often use their work email addresses to sign up to websites and email lists. SARS’ advice to safeguard yourself Do not open or respond to emails from unknown sources. Beware of false SMSs. Beware of emails that ask for personal, tax, banking or eFiling details such as login credentials, passwords, pins, and credit or debit card information. SARS will not send you any hyperlinks to other websites – not even those of banks. SARS will never request your banking details in any communication that you receive via post, email, or SMS. However, for the purpose of telephonic engagement and authentication purposes, SARS will verify your personal details. SARS does not send *.htm or *.html attachments. SARS will never ask for your credit card details. Remember never to click on links in a suspicious email from SARS. You can email suspicious SARS correspondence to phishing@sars.gov.za. You can also check here to see all current legitimate SARS surveys, emails and SMSs. Check with your accountant While protecting yourself against scammers, it remains crucial to ensure that all legitimate SARS correspondence to you is still promptly attended to. If you are in any doubt, it is best to check with your accountant, who will be able to verify if the request is from SARS or report fraudulent emails…

Comments Off on SARS Warning: Beware Scam Emails!

Your Tax Deadlines for August 2023

7 August - Monthly Pay-As-You-Earn (PAYE) submissions and payments 30 August - Excise Duty payments 31 August - Value-Added Tax (VAT) electronic submissions and payments, CIT Provisional payments where applicable, first provisional tax payment (individuals). Disclaimer: The information provided herein should not be used or relied on as professional advice. No liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions nor for any loss or damage arising from reliance upon any information herein. Always contact your professional adviser for specific and detailed advice. © CA(SA)DotNews

Comments Off on Your Tax Deadlines for August 2023
Read more about the article Ten Often-Overlooked Ways Your Accountant Can Help Your Business
Business growth success achievement concept, planning development leadership and customer target group

Ten Often-Overlooked Ways Your Accountant Can Help Your Business

“If you talk to a top accountant about his field of expertise, it's mind-boggling.” (Vincent Kompany, professional football manager and former player) Accountants are the tax and compliance champions of any industry, but the best ones do so much more for their clients, as strategic advisors and trouble-shooters who can also assist with automating a variety of tasks and pave the way for the running of a smooth and profitable business. Here is a list of not-so-obvious services an accountant can assist with that will help your business thrive. 1. Setting up a new business Setting up a new business comes with a number of potential pitfalls that may not be discovered until it’s too late. For instance, the type of business you choose to set up, be it a company, sole trader, trading trust or partnership will come with different tax requirements, paperwork and personal liabilities. Changing the kind of business vehicle at a later stage can be a costly process, so having an accountant assist you in ensuring you are starting off with the best entity for your business could make a huge difference. 2. Buying or selling a business If you are thinking of either selling your business or buying a new one, your accountant should be your first stop. Accountants can assist with business valuations, form exit strategies, and get the right financial reports and documents together to ensure you only make good decisions. Your accountant will also help keep costs down and make sure you don’t find yourself on the wrong end of a bad deal. 3. Cash flow adjustments One study performed by Jessie Hagen of U.S. Bank revealed that 82% of businesses fail because of poor cash flow management. There is, therefore, no doubt that not being able to meet financial obligations when you need to is certainly an indicator that things are not going well. The good news is that your accountant can help. By conducting a thorough business analysis, your accountant may be able to rebalance your budget and debts, optimise your cash flow and build cash flow projections.  By simply showing you what needs to be paid when, organising cash reserves, and adjusting the way money is used in the business, you can avoid upsetting suppliers and staff and ensure your business operates as smoothly as possible. 4. Business operations There are many decisions in a business that look like they may be simple, but the fact that they involve an element of finance makes them a critical task to take to your accountant. Accountants can help with analysing whether your equipment should be bought, or leased, whether offices should be rented and where, and whether the terms and conditions offered by one supplier are truly better than those of another. Your accountant is also best suited to assist in pricing your products to make sure you are getting the most profit from each sale and maximising your potential client base. They will also be able to point to areas of under-performance in the…

Comments Off on Ten Often-Overlooked Ways Your Accountant Can Help Your Business

Directors: Prepare and Submit Your Company’s Beneficial Ownership Register

“The lack of adequate, accurate and up-to-date beneficial ownership information facilitates money laundering and terrorist financing by allowing criminals to hide their true identities, and the true purpose and/or source or use of funds.” (Financial Intelligence Centre - FIC) South Africa’s grey listing by the Financial Action Task Force (FATF) earlier this year and the subsequent passing of the General Laws (Anti-Money Laundering and Combating Terrorism Financing) Amendment Act 22 of 2022, resulted in amendments to the Companies Act, among others. The changes to the Companies Act mean that company directors are now obliged to implement a detailed beneficial ownership register for their companies and submit the register to the Companies and Intellectual Property Commission (CIPC), along with a list of supporting documents. Such a register must also be kept up-to-date and verified annually. Who must file a beneficial ownership register? The vast majority of private companies must file a beneficial ownership register, but there are some complicated issues at play here and you would be well-advised to check with your accountant as to exactly what your company’s obligations are in terms of these new rules. What are the penalties? Failure to comply with the provisions relating to the beneficial ownership register requirements is an offence in terms of the Companies Act. A compliance notice may be issued in cases of non-compliance and an administrative penalty may be imposed. What are the deadlines? Entities incorporated before 24 May 2023 will be required to file the records of their Beneficial Interest Register as part of their Annual Returns filing process from 24 May 2023, the date of publication of the final Amended Companies Regulations. Entities incorporated after 24 May will be required to file the records of their beneficial ownership within 10 days after incorporation. What is required? The beneficial owners of a company must be identified, their information collated and a register containing this information must be filed with CIPC. A “beneficial owner” in respect of a company, means an individual/natural person who directly or indirectly, ultimately owns 5% or more of that company, or exercises effective control of that particular company, including through: The holding of beneficial interests in securities of that company. The exercise of, or control of the exercise of the voting rights associated with the securities of the company The exercise of, or control of the exercise of the right to appoint or remove members of the board of directors of that company. The holding of beneficial interest in the securities, or the ability to exercise control, including through a chain of ownership or control of a holding company of that company. The ability to exercise control, including through a chain of ownership or control of a juristic person other than a holding company of the company, a body of persons corporate or unincorporated, a person acting on behalf of a partnership, a person acting in pursuance of the provisions of a trust agreement; or The ability to otherwise materially influence the management of that company. For…

Comments Off on Directors: Prepare and Submit Your Company’s Beneficial Ownership Register

How to Prepare for a Possible Electricity Blackout

"Eskom plays a critical role in the life of South Africa, and life of South Africans. Due to its important role in the economy, its inability to provide electricity on demand and on time is a crisis." (President Cyril Ramaphosa) The South African Reserve Bank’s Financial Sector Contingency Forum (FSCF) has recently encouraged South African businesses to develop plans for operation at stage 8 load-shedding levels and a total countrywide blackout. While it has tempered this warning by saying that total blackout is an improbable scenario (with a chance of 0.1% to 1% of happening), it’s not an impossible one. The FSCF does however, think that businesses would be prudent to prepare nonetheless, particularly given the very real possibility of load-shedding levels that could see power being shut off for 12 hours a day or more. Here is how businesses can make that happen. Analysis The first step is for your business to analyse exactly how a critical power failure or extended loss of power would impact you. Would it be a shutdown of production or a loss of e-commerce sales? Would information loss be important, or do you still need to communicate with clients? Understanding this will inform the rest of the process. Plan financially Talk to your bank, investors and insurance companies to fully understand what can be done at the moment of shutdown to ensure continued operations and put risk financing in place to make sure you can cover costs in the event of grid collapse. If you have insurance, you need to know if they cover blackouts and what you need to do when that occurs to ensure they provide assistance. Make sure you have a hard copy of the policy accessible even when the power goes out. We are no longer at the stage where blackouts can be considered “unforeseen”, which means your insurer will have requirements for your preparation in such an event if you expect them to pay out. Backups Set your computers to autosave and back up all necessary information to the cloud regularly. Alternate Power Sources While it may not be feasible to run the whole business on alternate power indefinitely, you should at least provide UPS units at key positions such as Wi-Fi to ensure that when the power goes out you can still save the necessary work, run billing, or ring up customer sales. Also turn off and unplug all sensitive equipment so that the surge of returning power does not damage equipment. Security In the event of a total collapse, businesses may be wiser to shut down entirely. With both fires and crime expected to dramatically increase at that time it’s important to prepare an evacuation plan for your building or factory and shut off all electricity points at the mains. Ensure your property is safe, even when electric fences and CCTV are off. Disclaimer: The information provided herein should not be used or relied on as professional advice. No liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions…

Comments Off on How to Prepare for a Possible Electricity Blackout

Is Your Information Safe With SARS?

"Confidentiality of taxpayer information has always been a fundamental cornerstone of tax systems… taxpayers need to have confidence that the often-sensitive financial information is not disclosed inappropriately, whether intentionally or by accident." (Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development - OECD) The confidentiality of taxpayers’ information has recently come under the spotlight in South Africa. This was first sparked by a public statement from SARS earlier this year on the tax compliance status of President Cyril Ramaphosa and two related entities. “In taking this exceptional step to disclose the tax status of the President, with his written consent, SARS would also encourage other high profile political office bearers and leaders in society to consider taking this proactive step as part of their commitment to transparency,” SARS Commissioner, Edward Kieswetter, said at the time. This was followed by a recent Constitutional Court ruling concerning tax confidentiality and the right of access to information, relating to a request under the Promotion of Access to Information Act (PAIA) to access certain tax records of former President Jacob Zuma (Arena Holdings and others v SARS and another). The court found that certain provisions of PAIA, as well as the Tax Administration Act (TAA), are constitutionally invalid, and ordered SARS to reconsider the request to disclose taxpayer information, taking into account certain issues. While this re-evaluates the previous absolute confidentiality of tax records – and affects every taxpayer in South Africa - SARS says that the judgment does not set aside the tax confidentiality provisions for the information it collects. What information can SARS collect? SARS has access to a wide array of sensitive information about both businesses and individuals, and it has long been accepted that the confidentiality of this information is paramount. Taxpayer information is defined in the TAA as any information provided by a taxpayer or obtained by SARS in respect of the taxpayer, including biometric information. SARS draws on available data from statutory declarations by taxpayers, data from third party providers as well as other sources. In addition, not providing sensitive financial - and even extremely personal - information to SARS is not an option. According to the TAA, it is a criminal offence for a person to wilfully and without just cause refuse or neglect to: furnish, produce or make available any information, document or thing, excluding information requested under section 46(8) reply to or answer truthfully and fully any questions put to the person by a SARS official take an oath or make a solemn declaration or attend and give evidence as and when required in terms of the Act. Furthermore, taxpayers are legally obliged to disclose the information required to discharge the burden of proof, and to ensure access for SARS to certain records at all times. By not complying with these provisions, a taxpayer is guilty of an offence and, upon conviction, is subject to a fine or to imprisonment for a period not exceeding two years. What about POPIA and PAIA? The Protection of Personal Information Act (POPIA)…

Comments Off on Is Your Information Safe With SARS?
Read more about the article Your Tax Deadlines for July 2023
Clock with"Taxes" folder on busy office desk.

Your Tax Deadlines for July 2023

7 July - Monthly Pay-As-You-Earn (PAYE) submissions and payments 28 July - Excise Duty payments 31 July - Value-Added Tax (VAT) electronic submissions and payments & CIT Provisional payments where applicable. Disclaimer: The information provided herein should not be used or relied on as professional advice. No liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions nor for any loss or damage arising from reliance upon any information herein. Always contact your professional adviser for specific and detailed advice. © CA(SA)DotNews

Comments Off on Your Tax Deadlines for July 2023

How to Use AI to Improve Your Small Business

“The amount of work we can automate with AI is vastly larger than before. As leaders, it is incumbent on all of us to make sure we are building a world in which every individual has an opportunity to thrive.” (Andrew Ng, Co-founder and lead of Google Brain) Artificial Intelligence has come a long way very fast, and now every second app is claiming to be able to change your life using this ground-breaking technology. Many of these apps are simple software solutions designed to automate routine tasks, sometimes while mimicking a level of human interaction – as in chatbots, and the aim is to use them to free up human focus for more important, strategic or engaging activities, which cannot be mimicked. The truth is that many of these apps are only able to offer services at a fraction of the skill of a human new to the job, or still require significant human knowledge or input to get the most use out of them. There are, however, some apps out there where this assistance is more than just a little valuable, particularly for a new company that may have no staff at all in a specific role, or where an entrepreneur may simply not have the time to do everything themselves. Here then, is a list of ways you can use current AI to improve your small business. Customer service Probably the most common use for Chatbots is the spreading of content marketing on social media. Many people are familiar with these fake profiles popping up to link to various services or leave comments defending various points of view. While at one time there may have been a benefit to such marketing this is rapidly reaching its climax as people become more savvy to the existence of these tools and online bots now seem to outnumber actual people online. A far more interesting use has been in customer service where bots are being deployed as a first line of assistance to clear the bulk of customer questions before they take up the time of real members of staff.  Sold as being capable of mimicking a human conversation, business owners should, nonetheless, never fool themselves that modern chatbots are coming across as real staff members. People are, however, becoming increasingly comfortable with having their questions answered by an automated service, and chatbots in this scenario can help free up time by becoming an interactive FAQ. The benefit to a small business owner is that their time is no longer cluttered with routine enquiries and response times to customers are now rapidly sped up, lowering frustration and improving real world relationships. They can also be set to send you notifications to alert you to serious cases, or issues that only humans can resolve. Among the best AI chatbot programs are Netomi, WP-Chatbot, Microsoft Bot Framework and of course (the one getting all the media attention!) ChatGPT. Cybersecurity Cybersecurity is an increasingly important and regulated aspect of modern business. Doing business…

Comments Off on How to Use AI to Improve Your Small Business

New Trustee Duties: More Admin, Impossible Deadlines and Hefty Penalties

“A trustee has a responsibility to guard the assets of others with a higher degree of care than he does his own.” (John Ashcroft) Onerous new duties have recently been imposed on all trustees of all trusts - by government through legislative amendments, and also by SARS - in addition to their existing fiduciary duty to act in the best interest of all the beneficiaries and “with the care, diligence and skill which can reasonably be expected of a person who manages the affairs of another”. The legislative amendments follow South Africa’s grey listing by the global financial watchdog, the Financial Action Task Force, and the subsequent changes to the Trust Property Control Act (TPCA) and the Financial Intelligence Centre Act (FICA), among others. The new trustee duties will require extensive and time-consuming additional administration, and have impossible deadlines, while non-compliance can result in hefty penalties. This makes professional trust administration assistance crucial for trustees, now and in the future. Who is affected? All trustees – not only independent trustees – are affected by the imposition of these new trustee duties. In addition, all trusts are affected, regardless of the nature of the trust or the value of the assets in the trust, including family trusts, commercial and business trusts as well as public benefit trusts. Not even dormant trusts are specifically excluded. The new regulations will also affect companies that provide services to trusts. Under FICA, the scope of ‘accountable institutions’ has recently been expanded to include trust service providers, company service providers, legal practitioners, crypto asset service providers, and clearing system participants, among others. These accountable institutions must conduct customer due diligence on their clients, including verifying identities, assessing the risk of illicit activities, and reporting suspicious activities. This will require significant resources, time and expertise from both trustees and accountable institutions. What are the new duties and deadlines? The legislative changes to the TPCA have given rise to trustee duties relating specifically to beneficial ownership registers and records of accountable institutions. In addition, SARS has issued new reporting requirements. Updated beneficial ownership registers - trustees are now required to collect, record and maintain detailed information and specific records of the beneficial owners of the trust – who are now far more broadly defined to include founders, trustees, beneficiaries, donors and protectors. In addition, trustees must lodge a register of the prescribed information with the Master’s Office, with only a trustee or a person with power of attorney allowed to use the Master’s portal to do so. Updated records of interactions with accountable institutions - trustees are now required to collect, record and maintain details pertaining to accountable institutions with which trustees have dealings, including, for example, accountable institutions acting as agents to perform trustee functions and accountable institutions providing any services to trustees. As noted, the definition of “accountable institutions” has also widened considerably. Submitting an IT3(t) for each beneficiary - SARS recently issued a draft notice requiring trustees to submit an IT3(t), which provides details of any amount vested in a…

Comments Off on New Trustee Duties: More Admin, Impossible Deadlines and Hefty Penalties

When to Say No to an Opportunity (or a “Barnacle”)

“The difference between successful people and really successful people is that really successful people say no to almost everything.” (Warren Buffet, Investor) Anyone who has ever started a business knows the feeling a new enquiry can generate. The excitement that things seem to be working, may make the new entrepreneur set aside their concerns and leap at any opportunity. The sad news is that this excitement to help anyone who asks could be diluting the brand, lowering the quality of output and even damaging the business’s ability to grow. Here are the signs it may be time to say no to an opportunity. When you don’t have the capacity Your hours are stretched as it is, but now a potential new client has come calling and you are determined to make it work. In the early days clients are a lifeline to a business, but there will come a point where taking on new responsibilities could see you dropping the ball when it comes to your other clients. With each new arrival, it is therefore important to carefully analyse your resources, and options and determine whether you can truly do justice to their needs, and those of your other clients, with the capacity you have. If you can’t, and you try, then you will only end up damaging your reputation for good work and harming your business in the long run. When you don’t have the skills Knowing what you can’t do is as important as knowing what you can do. Don’t assume you will learn as you go. Taking on work under your brand banner that you are incapable of delivering will be a death knell to your business. When the long-term cost outweighs the short-term benefit A new client has come in with a promise to pay you more money than you have ever seen for the next three months, but they need you to drop your other clients to do it. This is a perfect example of short-term gain being outweighed by long term benefit. Sure, these next three months will be good, but those clients you currently have won’t come back and worse, will tell others that you dropped them. Six months down the line, the new client’s money will be gone along with your original clients. It’s not making financial sense – saying no to “barnacles” Traditionally, it is thought that loyal customers are the heartbeat of a business, but increasingly studies are finding that businesses need to ask their accountants to regularly evaluate the value versus effort that these loyal clients are bringing to the business. Harvard business review suggests that some “loyal customers” may in fact be using more of your resources for less of your profit, preventing you from servicing other potentially more lucrative clients. These customers who use up your resources, perhaps through continued complaints, returns for changes, or negotiations for better prices, are referred to as “barnacles” and like barnacles on a ship they can slow down your business growth.…

Comments Off on When to Say No to an Opportunity (or a “Barnacle”)

Can the R&D Tax Incentive Benefit Your Business?

“The government expects that, by encouraging companies to undertake R&D in South Africa, local companies will strengthen their capabilities of developing value-added products, technologies and services.” (Department of Science and Innovation (DSI) - South Africa) Research and development (R&D) is essential to boost innovation in the business sector, as it improves the capability to develop new products and processes and to improve existing ones. This is crucial for improving competitiveness and growth of the South African economy. Section 11D of the Income Tax Act offers a R&D tax incentive to promote private sector R&D investment in South Africa. In the following paragraphs, you will find out what the incentive offers, which companies qualify, and the terms and conditions that apply. What does the R&D incentive offer businesses? Section 11D allows R&D spending to be considered when determining taxable income in two ways: A deduction equal to 150% of expenditure incurred directly for R&D; and An accelerated depreciation deduction (50:30:20) for capital expenditure on machinery or plant used for R&D. According to the DSI, the tax deduction will help to reduce the cost of R&D, which will enable companies to finance their R&D and scale up or undertake R&D activities sooner than otherwise. Which companies can benefit from the R&D incentive? To be eligible, a company must be an incorporated entity and recognised as a company under the Income Tax Act. Individuals, non-profit organisations and trusts are not eligible. As the aim is to encourage South African companies to invest in R&D, the incentive is available to businesses of all sizes and in all economic sectors. Companies can also claim a deduction of R&D it outsources to another company, or to a South African university or science council. Companies in joint ventures (JVs) can claim to the extent that they fund the R&D. Prototypes and pilot plants created solely for purposes of R&D are also eligible. However, where a company receives funding from government, a public entity or a municipality towards its R&D activities, this funding will be excluded when the R&D tax deduction is calculated. What are the terms and conditions? The R&D activities must be approved by the Minister of Science and Innovation on recommendation by the R&D Tax Incentive Adjudication and Monitoring Committee that evaluates applications and reviews the annual progress reports that must be submitted. The R&D expenditure claimed should be incurred directly and solely for R&D undertaken in South Africa, and in the production of income and the carrying on of any trade. R&D expenditure claimed should be incurred after the date the application is submitted to the DSI. Applications awaiting approval should not be included in provisional tax calculations to avoid penalties. Where approval is received after a tax assessment has been finalised, a Request for Correction can be made. There is an extensive list of exclusions and limitations. Since last year, applications and progress reports can only be submitted via the new online automated system. According to the 2023 Budget Review, government is refining…

Comments Off on Can the R&D Tax Incentive Benefit Your Business?
Read more about the article Your Tax Deadlines for June 2023
Tax Calculator with Red Button

Your Tax Deadlines for June 2023

7 June - Monthly Pay-As-You-Earn (PAYE) submissions and payments 29 June - Excise Duty payments 30 June – End of the 1st Financial Quarter 30 June - Value-Added Tax (VAT) electronic submissions and payments & CIT Provisional payments where applicable. Disclaimer: The information provided herein should not be used or relied on as professional advice. No liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions nor for any loss or damage arising from reliance upon any information herein. Always contact your professional adviser for specific and detailed advice. © CA(SA)DotNews

Comments Off on Your Tax Deadlines for June 2023

How You and Your Business Can Benefit from SARS’ Solar Tax Breaks

“The lack of reliable electricity supply is the biggest economic constraint… I am pleased to announce two tax measures to encourage businesses and individuals to invest in renewable energy and increase electricity generation.”(Finance Minister Enoch Godongwana – Budget 2023) In the 2023 Budget, the lack of a reliable electricity supply was highlighted as the country’s biggest economic constraint. South Africans have been subjected to loadshedding every day of 2023, often at stage four, five or six. Recent research by the Bureau for Economic Research revealed more load-shedding in the first two months of 2023 than in all of the previous four years. It is a situation expected to deteriorate even further as demand rises with the winter months approaching. To encourage businesses and individuals to invest in renewable energy and to increase electricity generation, government announced two tax measures in the 2023 Budget in February. The first will provide R5 billion in tax relief to companies through an expansion of the renewable energy incentive, and the second will provide R4 billion in tax relief for households that install solar panels. Both entail a number of conditions and requirements, as well as tight timelines, which are summarised below. The expanded tax incentive for businesses To encourage rapid private investment to alleviate the energy crisis, this is a temporary expansion of the existing tax incentive Section 12B of the Income Tax Act, which provides for capital expenditure deductions for assets used in the production of renewable energy. It originally allowed businesses to deduct 50% of the costs in the first year, 30% in the second and 20% in the third for qualifying investments in wind, concentrated solar, hydropower below 30 megawatts (MW), biomass and photovoltaic (PV) projects above 1 MW, and provided an accelerated capital allowance of 100% in the first year for solar PV energy projects of less than 1MW. This incentive has now been temporarily expanded as outlined below. Highlights of the expanded incentive Under the expanded incentive, businesses will be able to claim a 125% deduction. Moreover, that deduction can now all be claimed in the first year. Businesses will be able to reduce their taxable income by 125% of the cost of renewable energy assets used for electricity generation. The adjusted incentive will only be available for investments brought into use for the first time between 1 March 2023 and 28 February 2025. The deduction applies to all renewable energy projects. There will be no thresholds on the generation capacity size of the projects that qualify. The expanded incentive is only available for two years from 1 March 2023 to 28 February 2025 to stimulate investment in the short term. Example: business renewable energy tax incentive For businesses with a positive taxable income, the deduction will reduce tax liability. For example, a renewable energy investment of R1 million would qualify for a deduction of R1.25 million against taxable income. Using the current corporate tax rate (27%), this deduction could reduce the corporate income tax liability of a company by…

Comments Off on How You and Your Business Can Benefit from SARS’ Solar Tax Breaks

Affordable Ways to Reap the Benefits of Engaged Employees

“Always treat your employees exactly as you want them to treat your best customers.” (Stephen R. Covey) Gallup describes “engaged employees” as those who are involved in, enthusiastic about, and committed to their work and workplace. Numerous studies over many decades have confirmed the benefits of engaged employees especially to smaller companies, where they are often required to take on many diverse responsibilities. Many studies have also identified employee engagement strategies that have proven most meaningful to employees and are therefore most effective. In these difficult economic times, business owners and managers will be pleased to find that some of the most effective employee engagement strategies do not require a substantial cost. The many benefits of engaged employees This isn’t just hype. Studies have confirmed that - Engaged employees often go beyond the call of duty. Employee engagement is positively correlated to company growth rates. Improved employee retention and loyalty. Lower absenteeism rates. Higher productivity – some studies have found engaged workers to be up to 21% more productive. Improved customer satisfaction. Improved company reputation and overall stakeholder value. Reduced incidence of internal theft and fraud. Reduced safety incidents. Some effective employee engagement strategies Employees have a good understanding of the business's values and mission, and clear expectations about their role in achieving these. Employees have the necessary equipment, resources and authority to do their jobs well. Regular employee performance and progress catch-ups with good quality, authentic and genuine feedback. Good relationships with superiors who are truly concerned for employees’ wellbeing and willing to provide support. Opportunities for employees to voice opinions and contribute ideas. Genuine and meaningful recognition, given publicly and timeously in front of superiors and peers. Peer-to-peer recognition has been found to have twice the impact of recognition from managers. Flexible work schedules and remote working options that allow employees to meet family obligations. Onsite employee programmes addressing, for example, health and wellness, or personal finances. Onsite family day care facilities and/or onsite food services. Having friends at work significantly improves employee commitment and satisfaction, by as much as 50% according to some studies. Volunteering unites employees towards a common greater good. Implementing employee engagement strategies on a budget When looking at the employee engagement strategies listed above, it is encouraging that most don’t involve high costs. What is crucial is to ensure that any strategies implemented add real value to your employees and impact their work and personal lives in a meaningful way. The best way to do so would be to ask your employees directly, perhaps at a team meeting or via an anonymous online survey. Perhaps an employee-of-the-month program with rewards such as breakfast with the Boss or gift cards could yield great results. It may be that a Friday afternoon off once a month or paid leave on an employee’s birthday are top choices. Celebrating national holidays or sporting events as a company, or providing paid time off for volunteering together, will create opportunities to build friendships and create a sense of belonging. Especially…

Comments Off on Affordable Ways to Reap the Benefits of Engaged Employees

Setting Up Your Finances in a New Business

“A house built on granite and strong foundations, not even the onslaught of pouring rain, gushing torrents and strong winds will be able to pull down.” (Haile Selassie, Former Emperor of Ethiopia) When starting a new business, few things are as important as establishing your finances and making sure they are right. Building the foundation for stable, accurate financial reports and tax filing will see you in good stead in the future and establish the practices that will lead your company to success. Here are the top seven tips. 1. Set up a deadline calendar Whether you use a large whiteboard in your office, or a digital reminder service like Google Calendar, it is vital that you track which payments are due and when. Whether it’s your staff salaries, business loan payments or accounts payable, you need to know exactly when each amount is due in order to plan your cash flow accurately. Not having the cash on hand when a payment is due not only hurts your business credit rating but can also cost you more in fines or late-payment fees. 2. Monitor your accounts receivable Just because you have invoiced a client doesn’t mean that money is immediately coming in. Check the terms of each client’s contract to understand exactly when they are likely to pay. If a client pays on a 60-day cycle it is unreasonable to expect the money will come in before that and you therefore need to plan other ways to have cash on hand to meet payments. For each invoice make a note on when it is likely to be paid. 3. Track your inventory Inventory on hand is as much a part of your finances as the actual cash in your bank. Are you ordering too much and letting things rot on the shelves, or are you ordering too little and being forced to pay for rush deliveries to meet your orders? Tracking inventory will allow you to make better purchase decisions and streamline the operations of your business thereby reducing costs and stress. 4. Consider opening two business bank accounts Account 1: It is vital that you be able to track all expenses you are incurring in order to make accurate business decisions and monitor your business spending. To do this you will need one bank account in the name of the business dedicated to the daily running and expenses of the business. This will allow you to accurately reconcile the account at the end of the month and see whether more money is coming in than going out. Don’t have more than one daily operations account, and don’t use your personal accounts to pay business expenses – if you do, monitoring your cash flow, income and expenses becomes that much harder. Account 2: The second account you should think of opening is a savings account, into which you will deposit a percentage of each month’s income to cover the taxes at the end of the year. The last thing you want…

Comments Off on Setting Up Your Finances in a New Business

Happy Tax Freedom Day!

“In 2022 South Africa had the 12th highest income tax burden, the 9th highest company income tax burden, and the 14th highest non-resource tax burden worldwide.” (Garth Zietsman, South Africa's Tax Freedom Day statistician)  Tax Freedom Day marks the day in the year when South Africans stop giving all their money to their government for the year and finally start working for themselves. In 2023, Free Market Foundation statistician Garth Zietsman has worked out that this day will be the 14th of May, two days later than in 2022, which in turn fell 10 days later than predicted in 2021. In 2023, the average South African taxpayer has had to work for a predicted 133 days to pay their taxes. Back in 1994, South Africans took 101 days. The usefulness of the metric is now clear – South Africans are now spending a full month longer every single year working for their government. According to Zietsman, the actual date may be far worse: “The prediction is based on the intended level of tax collection for central government mentioned in the Budget Speech. Typically, the actual figure, which is the general government revenue as a percentage of GDP from the Reserve Bank Quarterly, turns out to be 30% more than the intended figure for central government”. The Freemarket Foundation is a Johannesburg based, classical liberal think tank, who have adapted the concept of Tax Freedom Day from Florida businessman Dallas Hostetler who developed and trademarked the idea in America in 1948. Disclaimer: The information provided herein should not be used or relied on as professional advice. No liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions nor for any loss or damage arising from reliance upon any information herein. Always contact your professional adviser for specific and detailed advice. © CA(SA)DotNews

Comments Off on Happy Tax Freedom Day!
Read more about the article Your Tax Deadlines for May 2023
Tax Calculator with Red Button

Your Tax Deadlines for May 2023

5 May - Monthly Pay-As-You-Earn (PAYE) submissions and payments 30 May - Excise Duty payments 31 May - Value-Added Tax (VAT) electronic submissions and payments & CIT Provisional payments where applicable. Disclaimer: The information provided herein should not be used or relied on as professional advice. No liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions nor for any loss or damage arising from reliance upon any information herein. Always contact your professional adviser for specific and detailed advice. © CA(SA)DotNews

Comments Off on Your Tax Deadlines for May 2023
Read more about the article Why (and How) to Submit Skills Development Reports by 30 April
Word taxes 2022 near alarm clock on blue background. The concept of paying the tax. Payment time. Reporting period. Deadline. Income annual. Top view. 3d render

Why (and How) to Submit Skills Development Reports by 30 April

“We need to give importance to skill development because this way we can end unemployment.” (Narendra Modi, Prime Minister, India) Since 1999, the Skills Development Levy (SDL) has served to fund skills development in the country. It encourages a planned and structured approach to skills development so employers, employees and the economy can benefit from a better skilled and more productive workforce. All South African companies with a payroll exceeding R500,000 per year (that’s just under R42,000 per month) - including salaries, wages, overtime payments, leave pay, bonuses, fees, commissions and lump sum payments, and with certain specific exclusions - are required to pay SDL of 1% of the total amount paid in salaries to employees each month. It is declared and paid by employers to SARS with the other monthly employee taxes (PAYE and UIF) via the Monthly Employer Declaration (EMP201) and is then paid over to the relevant SETA by SARS. Employers can claim back more than half of the levies paid each year, but most miss the opportunity by not meeting the stipulated requirements. Depending on the size of a company’s payroll, this could be a substantial amount. There are also other benefits that can be unlocked by meeting the requirements for claiming back the levies paid. We briefly summarise below the benefits of claiming back the SDL paid, as well as how to do it in the most efficient way. Benefits of claiming back levies paid Claiming ensures valuable revenue is not forfeited - up to 70% of SDL paid to SARS in the financial period can be claimed back through the mandatory grant and other avenues. 20% of the levy paid can be claimed via the mandatory grant, paid by the Seta every quarter, which is accessed as follows: Appointing and registering a skills development facilitator (SDF) Timeously submitting an approved Workplace Skills Plan (WSP) Timeously submitting an Annual Training Report (ATR) based on the WSP. 50% of levies paid can be claimed in discretionary grants for learnerships, skills programmes, apprenticeships, workplace experience placements, internships and bursaries, and organisations can apply using the same requirements for claiming the mandatory grant. By offering SETA-accredited training, for example, mandatory training and registered learnerships, further tax rebates can be accessed. Successful submission of the required reports will earn your company points for the Skills Development priority element under the revised B-BBEE Codes. The WSP and ATR reports contain similar labour demographics information as the Employment Equity reports, facilitating improved employment equity management in the workplace. Skills development initiatives positively promote a better skilled and more productive workforce, as well as proper succession planning. Submitting the reports provides important sector information to the SETAs (Sector Education and Training Authorities), which informs the development of the SETA’s sector skills plan (SSP) and ultimately the National Skills Development Plan. How to claim back levies paid Appoint a suitably qualified and registered SDF to facilitate the training needs within the organisation and liaise with the SETA. Companies with 50 or more employees need to…

Comments Off on Why (and How) to Submit Skills Development Reports by 30 April

5 Business Plan Mistakes to Avoid

“Proper business planning demands that you focus on the self-interest of the customer at all times.” – (Brian Tracy, Author and Speaker) Writing a business plan can feel like a daunting process, and making mistakes is part of the package, even if you follow the online guides and templates.  To make this process simpler, we have made a short list of common errors that somehow keep creeping into these vital documents. Making it too long As Amazon founder Jeff Bezos once said, “You know the business plan won’t survive its first encounters with reality. It will always be different. The reality will never be the plan.” He did, however then go on to stress that writing a business plan is essential to understanding what will make your business tick. It’s important to realise that your business plan will never be able to cover every contingency and every possible incident that can occur and should rather be focused on revealing the core business. Once you understand your core business implicitly, you will be able to write it down in a much more succinct fashion. A long business plan is therefore only evidence that you don’t yet understand what’s going on. Understand your target market No product is for everyone. Understanding who you are selling to and what will motivate them to buy is the first thing any investor will look for, and the most fundamental thing you will need to understand to be successful. It will shape who you hire, what your marketing looks like, and even what your startup's logo will be. Simply believing you will market to everyone is putting your business on the path to failure. Ignoring competitors It is extremely common for companies to exclude business competitors from their business plan. Many believe that their new product is so superior, cheap or well-supported that competitors won’t stand a chance once it is marketed correctly, or simply don’t have as much understanding of the market they are entering as they think they do.  Having a sound, realistic competitor analysis shows investors you understand the market and know where your unique differentiators lie. Neglecting a financial forecast Many business plans ignore financial forecasts as they either don’t have the experience necessary or don’t believe they are important – of what use is guessing things that don’t exist? The truth is that a good financial planner or accountant should be able to help with these forecasts which need to include profit and loss, but also, essentially, cash flow and balance sheet. This area of the business plan will reveal to potential investors whether your plan has been carefully thought out, and takes realistic rates of growth into account, or whether it’s simply pie in the sky. No investor is going to work with someone who believes they will sell a million items in the first three months. Being too strict The business plan should always be viewed as a guide and not as a set of hard and fast rules.…

Comments Off on 5 Business Plan Mistakes to Avoid
Read more about the article UDZ Tax Incentive Extended: Could Your Business Benefit?
Architects working on plans at office

UDZ Tax Incentive Extended: Could Your Business Benefit?

“…governments internationally have increasingly used tax measures to support efforts aimed at regenerating urban areas.” (SARS Guide to the UDZ Allowance) The urban development zone (UDZ) tax incentive, provided for in section 13quat of the Income Tax Act (the Act), was introduced 20 years ago in 2003, as an accelerated depreciation allowance for property investments in certain central business districts. It aims to promote investment by the private sector in the construction or improvement of commercial and residential buildings, including low-cost housing units, situated within demarcated UDZs. In the most recent 2023 Budget, this incentive was extended for another two years, to allow for the completion of a review of the incentive, which has yielded some successes, by motivating investment in South Africa’s cities. We briefly overview below what the tax incentive entails and the criteria that must be met, where it applies and other issues to take note of when deciding if it could benefit your business before it expires at the end of March 2025. What the UDZ tax incentive entails Individuals and companies investing in residential or commercial property in South Africa’s urban zones from which to carry on a trade, should carefully consider the UDZ tax incentive before deciding where to buy. This tax allowance, when deducted, can substantially reduce the taxable income of a taxpayer, and - because the allowance is not limited to the taxpayer’s taxable income - can create an assessed loss. However, five specific criteria must all be met before the allowance is granted. In addition, only certain costs can be considered for the purposes of the allowance. These are listed below, along with the UDZs listed by SARS, and some further issues to take note of. Five criteria to be met Building requirement – The building must meet certain requirements, and only the cost of the erection, extension, addition to or improvement of the building, covering either the entire building or a floor area of at least 1,000m2 qualifies. Land costs are excluded. Urban development zone requirement – The building must be located within a UDZ. Trade requirement – A taxpayer will qualify for the allowance only if the relevant commercial or residential building or part of the building is used by the taxpayer solely for the purposes of trade, and only once the building has been brought into this use. Owner requirement – The building or part of the building that was erected, extended, added to or improved must be owned by the taxpayer deducting the allowance. Where the building or part of a building was purchased directly from a developer within three years after completion, an allowance may be deducted, provided the developer did not deduct any allowance, among other criteria. Date requirements – There are specified dates to which the allowance applies, including a commencement date requirement and a trade date requirement. Costs that may be considered – and those that are not Construction work Architect and approval fees Sidewalks Parking for the building Landscaping as part of the development (including earthworks, greenery and irrigation) Drainage Security (fences,…

Comments Off on UDZ Tax Incentive Extended: Could Your Business Benefit?

Tips for Generating Customer Trust as a Start Up

“Consumers don’t just buy products and services anymore; they buy experiences. This demands a new approach to marketing, sales, and services; one that hinges on winning customer trust.” (Ben Jackson, Author "The Future of Commerce) With customer trust being the most important element in attracting sales, contracts and clients, gaining that trust is an important step for any new start up. How can you make sales if you have no way to prove you are good at making sales? These tips should help any start up build that all important trust and make their first sales. Make top level products It may seem obvious, but whether you are offering a service, or selling products online, the first, and most critical thing you can do to develop as a company is to make sure your product is as high-quality as possible. Products that are easy for a customer to use, and that fulfil the client’s needs will always win their loyalty. Price your product accurately Pricing a product isn’t as easy as adding profit to cost. You need to price your product in such a way that you are covering all costs, making a profit, and pricing yourself correctly within the market. Getting this right will be crucial to finding, developing and retaining customers. Your accountant can help ensure no one feels cheated while you are also operationally effective. Provide top level service in every way The first few weeks and months of operation are absolutely critical when it comes to customer service. It may feel like nothing is coming in, but the day you receive an email it would be extremely wise for you to answer as quickly as possible. Handling enquiries politely, quickly and thoroughly will translate in the customer’s mind to a business which is caring and paying attention. Show them your humanity The first inclination for any customer is to mistrust brands – they are money-making machines. We do, however, want to trust new people we meet. Because of this, it’s a great idea to reveal the human face of your business early. Use the About Us page to introduce yourself and the team right from the start. Let people know your story, and how you came to establish your company. This allows you to imbue your brand with the real-life values you believe in and so establish the human connection in a way that only small brands really can. Offer a free sample People view free things as being risk-free interactions, and so are generally likely to take you up on the offer. By trading free samples or an hour of your work at no cost, in exchange for nothing but an email address, you give clients the chance to try your product or service and potentially even leave a review. You also get their email address, which is a good way to communicate with them and establish a genuine relationship. Use testimonials Whenever anyone compliments your business, you should think about asking them for a…

Comments Off on Tips for Generating Customer Trust as a Start Up

Your Tax Deadlines for April 2023

1 April – Start of the 2022/23 Financial Year 6 April - Monthly Pay-As-You-Earn (PAYE) submissions and payments 26 April - Excise Duty payments 28 April - Value-Added Tax (VAT) electronic submissions and payments & CIT Provisional payments where applicable. Disclaimer: The information provided herein should not be used or relied on as professional advice. No liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions nor for any loss or damage arising from reliance upon any information herein. Always contact your professional adviser for specific and detailed advice. © CA(SA)DotNews

Comments Off on Your Tax Deadlines for April 2023

Budget 2023: How It Affects You and Your Business

“This is not an austerity budget. It is a budget that makes tough trade-offs in the interests of the country’s short and long term prosperity.” (Finance Minister Enoch Godongwana – Budget 2023) Finance Minister Enoch Godongwana’s second Budget contained no major tax proposals, thanks to an improvement in revenue from higher collection in corporate and personal income taxes, and in customs duties. Instead, the focus of Budget 2023 was firmly on the current energy crisis, which has resulted in a State of Disaster being declared. It announced that government will take over R254 billion of Eskom’s debt over the next two years, subject to stringent conditions. Of the tax relief amounting to R13 billion to be provided to taxpayers in 2023/24 announced in the Budget, R9 billion is earmarked to encourage households and businesses to invest in renewable energy. More specifically, R4 billion in relief is provided for households that install solar panels and R5 billion to companies through the expansion of the existing renewable energy incentive. These incentives are briefly detailed below, along with some of the other announcements that will impact individuals and businesses. Budget announcements that will impact you personally A new tax incentive to install rooftop solar panels: For one year from 1 March 2023, individuals will be able to claim a rebate of 25% of the cost of installing rooftop solar panels, up to a maximum of R15,000, to reduce their tax liability in the 2023/24 tax year. The personal income tax brackets will be fully adjusted for inflation, increasing the tax-free threshold from R91,250 to R95,750. Medical tax credits per month will be increased by inflation to R364 for the first two members, and to R246 for additional members. The retirement tax tables for lump sums withdrawn before retirement and at retirement, will be adjusted upwards by 10%, increasing the tax-free amount at retirement to R550,000. Revised draft legislation on the ‘two-pot’ retirement system will be published, including the amount immediately available at implementation from 1 March 2024. Withdrawals from the accessible “savings pot” would be taxed as income in the year of withdrawal. Social grants will increase in line with CPI inflation. The R350 grant will continue until 31 March 2024. Increases in the excise duties on alcohol and tobacco of 4.9%, in line with expected inflation. This means that the duty on: a 340ml can of beer increases by 10c, a 750ml bottle of wine goes up by 18c, a 750ml bottle of spirits will increase by R3.90, a 23g cigar goes up by R5.47, a pack of 20 cigarettes, rises by 98c. Budget announcements that will impact your business Expanding the existing section 12B tax allowance for renewable energy, businesses will now be allowed to reduce their taxable income by 125% of the cost of an investment in renewables for two years from 1 March 2023. There will be no thresholds on the size of the projects that qualify. According to National Treasury, where a renewable energy investment of R1 million is made by a business, that business will qualify for a deduction of…

Comments Off on Budget 2023: How It Affects You and Your Business

Budget 2023: Your Tax Tables and Tax Calculator

The big Budget Speech 2023 tax news was the introduction of tax incentives for investing in rooftop solar and renewable energy. The Budget also detailed tax relief in the form of adjusted tables for tax and rebates for individual taxpayers, adjusted tables for retirement tax and transfer duty, and the expected increases in ‘sin’ taxes. How will these changes affect you directly? To better understand the impact of the Budget on you and your business, here is a selection of official SARS Tax Tables, then follow the link to Fin 24’s Budget Calculator to do your own calculation. Businesses – corporate tax rates unchanged* Source: SARS’ Budget Tax Guide 2023 Individual taxpayers – tax tables adjusted Source: SARS Source: SARS Source: SARS Transfer duty table - adjusted  Source: Budget 2023 People’s Guide Sin taxes raised Source: Budget 2023 People’s Guide How much will you be paying in income, petrol and sin taxes? Use Fin 24’s four-step Budget Calculator here to find out the monthly and annual impact on your  income tax, as well as what you will pay in future in terms of fuel and sin taxes, bearing in mind that the best way to fully understand the impact of the announcements in Budget 2023 on your own and your business affairs is to reach out for professional advice from your accountant. Disclaimer: The information provided herein should not be used or relied on as professional advice. No liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions nor for any loss or damage arising from reliance upon any information herein. Always contact your professional adviser for specific and detailed advice. © CA(SA)DotNews

Comments Off on Budget 2023: Your Tax Tables and Tax Calculator
Read more about the article How To Prepare a Reliable Disaster Recovery Plan
Recovery Plan, business and marketing concept. Folder Register on Office Table

How To Prepare a Reliable Disaster Recovery Plan

"The time to prepare for disasters is before they happen” (Stephen Matheson, Vice President of Product at BridgeHead) Given how reliant we all are on our IT infrastructure, it will come as no surprise to learn that one of the worst things that can happen to a business is for a failure to occur in that department. Whether it’s fire, floods, or hacking, being taken offline can spell a serious period of trouble for most organisations. In the time it takes to get back up and operational projects can be delayed, the quality of work can suffer, or worst of all, everything is put on hold for months while data is recreated. All of this can lead to strained relationships with both customers and suppliers and potentially the end of the business. A Disaster Recovery Plan is the pre-planned process a company will turn to when disaster strikes to ensure that a short-term problem does not become a permanent one. Here are five simple tips for what you need to consider when drawing one up. Have a response checklist The response checklist is a detailed breakdown of which employees should be contacted and what they should do in the event of a disaster. These should cover everything from who phones your IT support company to who puts out the fire or organises the evacuation drill. Ideally, these responses should be practiced. It’s no good telling someone they have to turn off the building’s water in the event of a flood if they don’t know where to do that. Have a data backup plan All company data needs to be backed up, as regularly as possible. How this is done will depend on how vital that data is to the operational capabilities of your business but should happen at least once a day. Look at your company carefully and decide which information is vital and which can safely be lost. You don’t need to back up all your client emails if you also keep other records of their projects for instance.Data is a business asset and has real value. The more important the data, the more strictly and safely that data needs to be backed up. Can you do it yourself on a hard disk that the secretary takes home, or do you need a full-scale external, cloud-based solution? How are you going to tell your clients? While it's usually a good idea to keep drama and difficulties far away from your clients, in this instance it may be important to tell them what is going on to explain any delays they may be about to experience and how you are planning to meet their orders.  In addition, provide them with any alternate contact details.Your plan should detail exactly how that is going to happen. Having pre setup and approved email addresses and telephone numbers organised will save a lot of time and frustration until your company is back on its feet. Cost considerations Your plan should also take into account…

Comments Off on How To Prepare a Reliable Disaster Recovery Plan

Five Essential Bookkeeping Tips for Small Businesses

“Making good judgements when one has complete data, facts, and knowledge is not leadership - it's bookkeeping” (Dee Hock, Founder and CEO of VISA) When running a small business, it often feels like you are doing everything yourself, and some important tasks can slip under the radar. One aspect that should never be forgotten though is bookkeeping. While intimidating, keeping your finances in order need not be as hard as it sounds. Here are our tips for ensuring your accounts remain ordered and your peace of mind intact. Ask your accountant If you want to keep things as simple as possible and guarantee you never run foul of the law, getting your accountant in to do your bookkeeping is the safest and most efficient way to do your books. Apart from being able to manage your finances, an accountant would be able to help save on taxes and advise you on areas of the business that may be streamlined. Keep your personal and business accounts separate It may not seem like much, but mixing up which account pays for what can lead to hundreds of extra hours of work over the course of a year working out which deductions and expenses relate to your business. Rather keep personal and business accounts and banking separate. Set up reminders for important deadlines Using an online calendar, it’s now easy to set up reminders for all those important tax and other deadline dates so you know when things are becoming urgent. Keep receipts Be sure to keep all receipts to build a verifiable audit trail. Whenever you pay anything out to a supplier it's important to get an invoice and file it away. Keep all your receipts for all business expenses and purchases. You never know when you may be hit with an audit and need to prove everything you have said. Keep reports Every month generate a one-page document detailing all your income and expenditure. Ask your accountant to set up a simple monthly one-page report that, in addition, compares actual income and expenses to your budget. It doesn’t have to be detailed but should give you an idea of just where the money is going and what is coming in. As well as making bookkeeping easier, it will also help you track the growth and health of your company. Disclaimer: The information provided herein should not be used or relied on as professional advice. No liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions nor for any loss or damage arising from reliance upon any information herein. Always contact your professional adviser for specific and detailed advice. © CA(SA)DotNews

Comments Off on Five Essential Bookkeeping Tips for Small Businesses
Read more about the article Effective 1 March 2023: New Earnings Threshold and National Minimum Wage
Folders with the label Employees and Salaries

Effective 1 March 2023: New Earnings Threshold and National Minimum Wage

Employers and employees need to keep an eye on the annual increases in both the National Minimum Wage and the Earnings Threshold, summarised below for your convenience. Both are effective from 1 March 2023. The National Minimum Wage increase The National Minimum Wage (NMW) for each “ordinary hour worked” has been increased by 9.6% from R23-19 to R25-42. Workers who have concluded learnership agreements in terms of the Skills Development Act are entitled to a sliding scale of allowances. Domestic workers Domestic workers were brought into line with the NMW in 2022, and assuming a work month of 21 days x 8 hours per day, R25-42 per hour equates to R4,270-56 per month. The Living Wage calculator will help you check whether or not you are actually paying your domestic worker enough to cover a household’s “minimal need” (adjust the “Assumptions” in the calculator to ensure that the figures used are up to date). The Earnings Threshold Increase The annual earnings threshold above which employees lose some of the protections of the Basic Conditions of Employment Act has been increased by 7.6% from R224,080-48 p.a. (R18,673-87 p.m.) to R241,110-59 p.a. (R20,092-55 p.m.). "Earnings" (for this purpose only) means “the regular annual remuneration before deductions, i.e. income tax, pension, medical and similar payments but excluding similar payments (contributions) made by the employer in respect of the employee: Provided that subsistence and transport allowances received, achievement awards and payments for overtime worked shall not be regarded as remuneration”. Some employees enjoy only limited BCEA protection even if they earn below the threshold - notably any “senior managerial employee" (“an employee who has the authority to hire, discipline and dismiss employees and to represent the employer internally and externally”), any “sales staff who travel to the premises of customers and who regulate their own hours of work” and any “employees who work less than 24 hours a month for an employer”. Take specific advice for details. The threshold also impacts on some of the protections provided in the Labour Relations Act – Employees earning less than the threshold, if contracted to a client for more than three months through a temporary employment service (“labour broker”) are deemed to be employed by the client unless they are actually performing a temporary service. Fixed-term employees earning below the threshold are deemed to be employed indefinitely after three months unless the employer has a justifiable reason for fixing the term of the contract. Turning to the Employment Equity Act, employees earning over the threshold can only refer unfair discrimination disputes (other than disputes based on sexual harassment) to the Commission for Conciliation, Mediation and Arbitration (CCMA) with the consent of all parties. Otherwise, they must go to the Labour Court for arbitration. Disclaimer: The information provided herein should not be used or relied on as professional advice. No liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions nor for any loss or damage arising from reliance upon any information herein. Always contact your professional adviser for specific and detailed advice. © CA(SA)DotNews

Comments Off on Effective 1 March 2023: New Earnings Threshold and National Minimum Wage
Read more about the article Your Tax Deadlines for March 2023
time for taxes

Your Tax Deadlines for March 2023

7 March - Monthly Pay-As-You-Earn (PAYE) submissions and payments  30 March - Excise Duty payments  31 March – End of the 2022/23 Financial Year  31 March - Value-Added Tax (VAT) electronic submissions and payments & CIT Provisional payments where applicable. Disclaimer: The information provided herein should not be used or relied on as professional advice. No liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions nor for any loss or damage arising from reliance upon any information herein. Always contact your professional adviser for specific and detailed advice. © CA(SA)DotNews

Comments Off on Your Tax Deadlines for March 2023
Read more about the article Ignoring an Online Review Could be Catastrophic for Your Business!
Charging station for phone, tablet, laptop and other gadgets when there is no light during blackout. Generator power bank battery in the absence of electricity. Charge electric rechargeable battery

Ignoring an Online Review Could be Catastrophic for Your Business!

“Your most unhappy customers are your greatest source of learning” (Bill Gates) If you have founded a business then there is little less certain than that at some point in the future, you will get a bad review. It’s simply impossible to please all of the people all of the time, which is why many business owners say they don’t worry too much about reviews and try to keep on doing their best. The sad part is, they really should be worrying about their reviews, both good and bad. A series of recent reports suggest that there is little as damaging to a modern business as bad reviews that go unanswered. With 91% of all 18 to 34-year-olds saying they trust online reviews as much as recommendations from a friend and as many as 93% of all customers saying they check reviews before buying, the impact of a company’s online reviews is obvious. But there’s more – you should respond to all reviews, both good and bad. According to the BrightLocal Local Consumer Review Survey 2022, 57% of all consumers say they would be 'not very' or 'not at all' likely to use a business that doesn't respond to reviews at all. Under this climate it might seem that, while a good review could gather new customers, getting a bad review could be a death knell for your company. Fortunately, all kinds of reviews are good opportunities to show off your company, turn experiences around, and even gather customers. Assuming you do the right things. Here then is how you should be handling your online reviews. Track your reviews The first step is to make sure you know when and where a new review has been written about your company. How can you possibly respond to something you don’t know exists? Once you know a review is up, you need to react quickly. It’s no good responding years later. Two different sites will help you to track and respond to reviews across the internet and may become valuable tools for managing your reviews as well. First is Google my Business which not only allows you to manage and track your online reviews but can also help with sending information to clients and promoting your business. All it takes is a free account and you can help potential new customers find your business and ensure they get the information they need. Having positive Google Reviews can often be critical when it comes to customers making buying decisions. In South Africa, Hello Peter has established itself as a core place to review companies and for companies to respond. While it can be more expensive to respond as a business, there are definite benefits and keeping tabs on your Hello Peter reviews will help you to know exactly where you stand. Professional accounts on other sites like Trust Pilot or Media Tool Kit can also help you to track and interact with customer reviews. If you are a new company this may seem like an unnecessary or unwarranted expense, but as already…

Comments Off on Ignoring an Online Review Could be Catastrophic for Your Business!
Read more about the article Maximise Your Business Travel Tax Deduction
Charging station for phone, tablet, laptop and other gadgets when there is no light during blackout. Generator power bank battery in the absence of electricity. Charge electric rechargeable battery

Maximise Your Business Travel Tax Deduction

“Without a logbook, you will not be able to claim a travel deduction.” (SARS Travel Logbook 2022/23) Even while recovering from the economic impact of COVID and facing the challenges of power blackouts, businesses and their employees are also contending with the costs of travel that have reached historic highs. Thankfully, expenses related to business travel can be deducted from taxable income – reducing the tax liability for taxpayers, including businesses, employees, commission-earners and independent contractors. All these taxpayers should prioritise maximising the available tax deductions by ensuring they can claim for every actual business travel-related expense. This is increasingly important given the rapidly rising costs of travel, fuel and vehicle ownership. Fuel prices have more than doubled over the last five years and continue to set new records. In addition, Wesbank recently reported that the monthly cost of vehicle ownership for an average entry-level vehicle is 33% higher than five years ago and has increased 32% between November 2021 and November 2022. To claim any business travel expenses, it is compulsory to keep an accurate and up-to-date SARS-compliant logbook for each vehicle. In addition, there are other tax implications related to travel expenses, travel allowances and travel reimbursements, some of which are briefly highlighted below. Claiming the business travel deduction – fast facts Businesses can claim business travel expenses incurred in the production of income. Employees who receive a travel allowance can claim a deduction for the use of their private vehicles for business purposes. Employees may also be entitled to claim a reduction on the fringe benefit in respect of business kilometres travelled in a company car. To claim any travel deduction, an accurate, up-to-date logbook detailing all business kilometres travelled is required. SARS accepts electronic logbooks. There is no deduction allowed for private travel, which is any travel not for business purposes, such as travelling between home and work. In addition to a logbook, taxpayers who want to claim actual travel expenses should keep accurate records and proof of all travel expenses, such as fuel and maintenance, incurred during the year. A separate logbook and records must be kept for each vehicle used for business purposes. SARS reserves the right to query and audit the content or information recorded in any logbook by the taxpayer. Logbooks and other records must be kept for at least five years as taxpayers may be required to submit them to SARS for verification of travel claims. How to claim a business travel tax deduction Record the vehicle’s odometer reading on the first day of a tax year (1 March for individuals and also for companies). Maintain the logbook all year – SARS requires the following minimum information for every single business trip: date of travel; kilometres travelled; and travel details including where the trip started, the destination and the reason for the trip. It is not necessary to record details of private travel. Keep records of all related travel expenses such as fuel, oil, repairs and maintenance, car licence, insurance, vehicle…

Comments Off on Maximise Your Business Travel Tax Deduction
Read more about the article Loadshedding: Survival Tips for Small Businesses
Charging station for phone, tablet, laptop and other gadgets when there is no light during blackout. Generator power bank battery in the absence of electricity. Charge electric rechargeable battery

Loadshedding: Survival Tips for Small Businesses

"We want to assure business that by the time you get back to work in January, we will have a much more stable situation." (Public Enterprises Minister, Pravin Gordhan, December 7, 2018) With loadshedding now a constant reality in our lives and Eskom and the government offering no signs of any form of short-term recovery, small business owners are being forced to increasingly adapt in order to survive. Here are our top five tips that might help, beyond simply “buy a generator/inverter”. Adopt work from home Those who are single will have heard the advice to date someone on a different loadshedding schedule, and this tip can be liberally applied across a company. By allowing staff to work from home, most businesses can be reasonably assured of having someone online and capable of handling client calls and enquiries at any given time. At the very least companies need to be looking at offering flexible work hours, so they don’t find employees sitting in the traffic caused by all the traffic lights being out, only to arrive at work to sit in the dark. Allowing staff to do the work when and where they want could do wonders for productivity. Perhaps you can even negotiate with a local coffee shop for discounts when your staff come to work there? Move to cloud-based solutions If you aren’t already using cloud-based solutions now is the time to adapt. Storing everything you do on the cloud with storage and backup solutions such as Dropbox or Microsoft’s OneDrive will mean your data can be accessed from anywhere and is much less likely to be lost should servers or computers become damaged by the power cuts. Set computers to do regular saves and backups so nothing gets lost. Use mains-free tools If your tools can come in a battery-operated version, then now is the time to start trading out of plug reliant technology. PCs should be traded in for laptops, electric cookers and fridges can be traded in for gas and everything from power tools to hairdryers have battery operated versions. Move your company's main number to a cell phone or to a VoIP solution and make sure all key personnel cell phones are permanently charged. Unplug equipment The second the power goes down it’s time to unplug all the expensive equipment. Don’t take the risk of the surge destroying your vital machines, assembly lines and computers when the power comes back on. If you can, invest in insurance, but make 100% sure that it covers loadshedding damage, as some companies have removed that protection from their contracts. Ensure that your, and your key employees’ Wi-Fi connections are attached to a UPS system. Use more than one payment system Using two or even three different network options will ensure you are always able to take payments whenever your equipment is charged, even if the power is off. Don’t lose a vital sale or shut up shop simply because you have a contract with one network service…

Comments Off on Loadshedding: Survival Tips for Small Businesses

How the New Assessed Loss Tax Limitation Works

"People who complain about taxes can be divided into two classes: men and women." (Unknown) The assessed loss rules have always allowed companies to deduct from their taxable income each year any assessed losses from previous years. The remaining assessed loss balances could be carried forward indefinitely. This meant that a company would only pay income tax once it made a taxable profit and all previous assessed losses had been deducted from the taxable income. These rules have changed and may affect your next income tax bill. What’s new? Under the new rules, assessed losses brought forward from a previous year of assessment can only be offset against a maximum of 80% of the current year’s taxable income or R1 million, whichever is higher. This means that many companies will now pay income tax on up to 20% of the taxable income for the year if it exceeds R1 million, even if the assessed loss balance carried forward from previous years far exceeds the taxable income. Adjust your cash flow forecasts accordingly.  What you should know The new rules apply to any year of assessment that began on 1 April 2022 onwards and that ends on or after 31 March 2023. The new limitation applies to a company’s assessed loss balance as at 1 April 2022, and not only to assessed losses accumulated after this date. Companies do not lose the balance of an assessed loss that could not be utilised in one tax year, it is just carried forward to the next tax year. If a company does not trade for a full year of assessment and no income is earned from such trade, the assessed loss balance will be lost. Further complex rules may apply in certain circumstances, for example, the 3-out-of-5-years rule and the ring-fencing of losses if a business carries on one of the listed “suspect trades”, which means professional advice is essential when deducting an assessed loss against taxable income. Will your tax bill be affected? Some companies will not be affected immediately, for example: Companies that made a loss during the year and therefore have no taxable income to reduce; Companies that do not have an assessed loss balance brought forward; and Smaller companies with a taxable income below R1 million are not affected by the new rules and can still deduct the full balance of an assessed loss against 100% of their taxable income.  However, the changes will have tax cash flow implications for other companies. The examples below illustrate this. Both the old and the new rules are complex. In addition, some of the wording in the legislation still needs to be clarified, so speak to your accountant about the impact the new rules will have on your next tax bill. Disclaimer: The information provided herein should not be used or relied on as professional advice. No liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions nor for any loss or damage arising from reliance upon any information herein. Always contact your professional adviser for specific…

Comments Off on How the New Assessed Loss Tax Limitation Works

Budget 2023: The Minister of Finance Wants to Hear from You!

“Finally, we pay tribute to the millions of South Africans, whose resilience and courage during these times of pandemic and economic hardship, is an inspiration to all of us who have the privilege to serve in the public sector.” (From the 2022 Budget Speech) Finance Minister Enoch Godongwana has invited the public to share suggestions on the 2023 Budget he is expected to deliver on Wednesday 22 February 2023. Go to National Treasury’s “Budget Tips for the Minister of Finance” page and fill out the online form. Disclaimer: The information provided herein should not be used or relied on as professional advice. No liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions nor for any loss or damage arising from reliance upon any information herein. Always contact your professional adviser for specific and detailed advice. © CA(SA)DotNews

Comments Off on Budget 2023: The Minister of Finance Wants to Hear from You!
Read more about the article Your Tax Deadlines for February 2023
Clock with"Taxes" folder on busy office desk.

Your Tax Deadlines for February 2023

7 February - Monthly Pay-As-You-Earn (PAYE) submissions and payments 27 February - Excise Duty payments 28 February - Value-Added Tax (VAT) electronic submissions and payments & CIT Provisional payments where applicable. Disclaimer: The information provided herein should not be used or relied on as professional advice. No liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions nor for any loss or damage arising from reliance upon any information herein. Always contact your professional adviser for specific and detailed advice. © CA(SA)DotNews

Comments Off on Your Tax Deadlines for February 2023

Start 2023 Strong with the “Fresh Start Effect”

“We change our tools and then our tools change us.” (Jeff Bezos) Every January, individuals and businesses have an opportunity to take advantage of what is called the “Fresh Start Effect” – referring to research evidence that shows people are more likely to make positive changes at times that mark the start of a new time period and represent a new beginning, most notably the start of a new year.  With the right tools, businesses can maximise this Fresh Start Effect to begin the new year on a strong footing. Three business tools, in particular, are indispensable to achieve this: a business review; goals and a plan for the year – including a budget; and ways to measure progress in achieving goals and executing the plan in the months ahead. Fortunately, these tools are not expensive or difficult to use, and your accountant will be able to assist you to set your business up for great results in 2023. A business review A comprehensive review of business operations is a simple but powerful business tool.It enables business owners and managers to analyse performance in achieving goals and meeting key performance indicators (KPIs), and to identify problems and spot trends timeously. Most importantly, an effective review will reveal what is working and what is not, so the team can celebrate successes and build on what is working, and also change what is not working to get better results.Some of the business areas that need to be reviewed may include:Business plan, sales, marketing and branding strategies.Total income to total expenses, cash flow statement and debtors’ reports, actual vs budget spend, and the balance sheet.Internal resources including the company’s people and processes.Client base, client processes and customer satisfaction.Statutory and regulatory compliance.Fees, contracts and costs.The best way to do a business review is to involve your entire team and to call in professional assistance for a clearer understanding, particularly of the financial aspects of the review. Goals and a plan for 2023, including a budget The business review will provide invaluable information and insights, creating a baseline from which goals can be set for the next 12 months. This enables planning for the year ahead, incorporating the necessary changes to get better results, as well as enhancing or duplicating the processes already generating good results.Goalsetting, as well as planning and budgeting to achieve these goals, are great tools for establishing the direction of the business for the next year, focussing the team’s attention and efforts, and improving the chances of success.SMART goals are always the most effective – these are goals that are Specific, Measurable, Achievable, Relevant, and Time-Bound. That is because SMART goals are clear and quantifiable and can be broken down into a plan that details the specific steps or milestones to be completed - and the budgets within which to do so. Measuring progress during the year aheadMeasuring progress ensures both better management and greater motivation. What is measured can be managed, and progress on all business goals can be measured through, among…

Comments Off on Start 2023 Strong with the “Fresh Start Effect”

The Financial Steps You Need to Take Before You Open Your New Business

“Good fortune is what happens when opportunity meets planning,” - Thomas Edison You have your idea, you have your mission statement and perhaps you even have an idea of who your first customers will be, but there are still a few things you should consider doing before you launch your company. When it comes to your finances doing these five things in advance will ready you and your business for success and allow you to focus more on the company and less on the necessary financial administration. Deal with your personal finances For some entrepreneurs starting a company is seen as a way to get themselves out of financial trouble. Unfortunately, if this is the case, the company will be starting off on the back foot. If your motivation for starting a business is as a way to repay your own loans or debts, then you won't be making the best decisions for the company. Ideally, your finances should be clean with debts paid off and taxes up to date. This will allow you to focus on the company for what it is, rather than on what you need. Ideally, you will be starting your company with your own personal finances sorted for the first six months at least, and with no debt.  If you are in trouble, or don't have any savings, then it is important that you get any loans and debts under control and reshape your personal expenses in line with leaner times before you take your first new business step. Consolidate any debts you may have and arrange for lower monthly payments. Cancel any unnecessary services and costs and try to get your monthly outgoings as low as you can before you quit your job or start your company. You are going to have tough months and it's important that you are ready to weather them if you hope to succeed. Open a business account Many new businesses begin as extensions of the owner. Sometimes the owner's finances are used to pay for business expenses and these costs get lost along the way in the search for success. It is therefore important to decide on a vehicle for your business (ask your accountant to advise you on whether you will be best off with a company, trading trust, or sole tradership) then open a business banking account to more accurately keep track of exactly what is owed by your business to you, or you to your business. All relevant business expenses are tax deductible, but this can't happen if they aren't accurately tracked and accounted for in the business. Opening an account will help you not only look more professional but also track your income and outgoings more effectively. Get your taxes up to date Your personal taxes are an important aspect of business leadership. If your taxes are not properly filed and up to date when you have a job, the chances are they are only going to get worse. Ask your accountant to look…

Comments Off on The Financial Steps You Need to Take Before You Open Your New Business

The Importance of Maintaining Your Tax Compliance Status in 2023

“Being tax compliant… is not just good for you, but also contributes to the positive growth of our country’s economy which in turn benefits all South Africans.” (SARS) Businesses are often required to provide, confirm or share tax clearance information to another entity. This is because proof of tax compliance is an indicator of a company’s good standing in terms of its legal obligations and how well it is managed. There may be instances when an individual, another company, or a government entity needs to verify your tax compliance status, for example, during a prequalification as a supplier; for a tender application or bidding process; to confirm good standing and that your tax matters are in order with SARS; or for foreign investment allowances.   Tax clearance information is no longer confirmed via Tax Clearance Certificates – these have been replaced by SARS’ Tax Compliance Status (TCS) system, which verifies your tax status online and in real-time, and makes it very important to ensure you and your company are always compliant. How it works now Instead of a manual tax certificate being issued as in the past, SARS’ new system allows individuals and businesses to obtain a TCS PIN (personal identification number). Your accountant will be able to assist with the process of applying to SARS to obtain this PIN through eFiling which requires, for example, activating the TCS for the business or individual, merging all the tax types into one registered profile, completing the Tax Compliance Status Request and selecting the correct type of TCS: good standing, tender, or – for individuals only - emigration and foreign investment allowance.  If all your tax affairs are in order, your PIN should be issued immediately via SMS or email. A unique PIN is issued for each TCS request submitted to SARS. This PIN, along with your tax reference number is then sent to the third-party that requires confirmation of your or the company’s tax compliance status. To verify tax compliance status, the third-party will go to eFiling and submit your tax reference number and PIN under “New Verification Request.” Your current tax compliance status will appear and will be colour-coded, indicating if your tax affairs are currently in order or not:  - green indicates that all tax affairs are in order and the taxpayer is tax compliant;  - red means the taxpayer is not tax compliant. Click here to see full size screenshotSource: SARS It is important to note that the PIN is valid for a year and will reflect the current tax status at the date and time the PIN is entered into the TCS system (not the compliance status at the time the PIN was issued). This means your tax compliance status on the system can change during the year in line with your tax behaviour, which might include, for example, an inadvertent late submission or missed payment. For this reason, it is crucial to continuously monitor your tax compliance status to ensure a non-compliant tax status does not impact business and other opportunities.…

Comments Off on The Importance of Maintaining Your Tax Compliance Status in 2023

How to Know if You Need an Office for Your Business (and How to Make the Most of a Lease if You Do)

“In business, you don't get what you deserve, you get what you negotiate,” Chester Karrass, Founder of Seminar group Karrass. At some point, around halfway through the pandemic, experts began to whisper that office space was dead. “No one will be using an office by 2023,” they said. And yet, while it's true that office space use has declined steeply in some parts of the country, many companies are still finding a use for a dedicated environment in which to conduct business. Do you need an office for your business? Remote work has proven that the humble office we remember is not essential, but there are still several functions an office can serve. For many employees, an office can serve simply as a distraction-free environment in which to work, while for others it may cement team relationships. For others, it can be a way to separate work and home lives. Employees also often need physical meeting spaces, a place to pore over designs and showcase physical models. Moreover, introducing new employees is easier in a formal physical office space, as is hosting company celebrations. Despite this, remote work has seen a decrease in demand in many parts of South Africa and given this there has never been a better time than now to negotiate for that dedicated office space if you find that your company needs it. These tips will help you get what you need. Get the right amount of space Here's a quick guide to getting the space you need and no more: Conference room (15 to 30 people): 75 to 90 square metres Small meeting room (2 to 4 people): 30 square metres Large meeting room (4 to 8 people): 45 square metres Manager's office: 25 square metres Senior Manager's office including private meeting table: 50 square metres Server room (1 to 4 racks): 12 to 40 square metres. In addition, you will need roughly 30 square metres of space per employee. This may adjust upward dependent on the kind of work you do (do your employees need to spread plans out on their desks for instance?) or downward if employees are hot-desking and not expected to be in the office each day. Finally, remember your future expectations. If the plan is to hire more people shortly, then they should be catered for as well. No use incurring the cost of moving in a few years if you can avoid it. For a more accurate picture that includes what you need, try this office space calculator. Consider also the “hive” or “shared office space” alternatives on offer in some cities. Other facilities When renting an office, you may want to consider a variety of factors that don't include size. How easy is the office to travel to? Is there traffic and easy access to public transport? Does the block have a generator or solar for loadshedding? Do you need access to printing shops or mailing? What sort of hours will you be open, and will employees need night…

Comments Off on How to Know if You Need an Office for Your Business (and How to Make the Most of a Lease if You Do)
Read more about the article Your Tax Deadlines for January 2023
Clock with"Taxes" folder on busy office desk.

Your Tax Deadlines for January 2023

6 January - Monthly Pay-As-You-Earn (PAYE) submissions and payments 30 January - Excise Duty payments 31 January - Value-Added Tax (VAT) electronic submissions and payments & CIT Provisional payments where applicable. Disclaimer: The information provided herein should not be used or relied on as professional advice. No liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions nor for any loss or damage arising from reliance upon any information herein. Always contact your professional adviser for specific and detailed advice. © CA(SA)DotNews

Comments Off on Your Tax Deadlines for January 2023
Read more about the article The Why and the How of Annual Price Increases
Finance and money technology background concept of business prosperity and asset management . Creative graphic show economy and financial growth by investment in valuable asset to gain wealth profit .

The Why and the How of Annual Price Increases

“Pricing power is important in business. You want your business to have the ability to raise prices as needed, especially with regard to inflation.” (Hendrith Vanlon Smith Jr) It is imperative that businesses increase their fees, rates or product prices annually by at least the rate of inflation, just to keep pace with the ongoing increases in the cost of materials and production. Inflation is the increase in the cost of goods and services in an economy. It ensures that, year after year, a business pays more and more for the same goods or services it uses in the production of its income. The higher the inflation rate, the higher the increase in your costs each year. Without related annual price increases on goods or services provided by your business, the inflationary increases in the costs of production will result in lower profits, reduced product or service quality, or even market perceptions that your goods or services are cheap. In addition, the compounding impact of not increasing prices means your business falls progressively further behind in its ability to generate the appropriate and needed levels of profits. Why do businesses neglect price increases? There are many reasons why businesses do not increase their rates annually. Some may simply not have the business skills to set or maintain correct pricing. Many business owners are concerned that in a highly competitive market, a price increase will result in lost customers - a fear that was particularly heightened during the COVID years. Most businesses may simply not know how to increase their prices, especially if they have not done so for a few years, and then a substantial increase is required just to return to previous levels of profitability. Why increases are crucial In South Africa, the inflation rate is currently at a 13-year high of 7.5% - almost double the average inflation rate of 4.5% in 2021. This means that the cost of producing goods and services has increased by 12% over just two years, and without a related increase in sales prices, your business profits are being eroded at an alarming rate and with every sale.         Conversely, increasing prices correctly can have a substantial impact on a company’s profitability. Studies quoted in The Harvard Business Review found that improvements in price typically have three to four times the effect on profitability as proportionate increases in volume. In fact, it was noted that a 1% improvement in price, assuming no loss of volume, increases operating profit by 11.1%. Top tips for implementing price increases Speak to your accountant about the impact of various price increases on your company’s income, profitability and tax liabilities. Remember to discuss the potential impact of price increases with all staff, from the production team to marketing, sales and the accounts teams. An easy place to start raising prices is to issue quotes for new business at the higher prices. Include an annual price increase clause in all new client contracts and in contracts that are…

Comments Off on The Why and the How of Annual Price Increases
Read more about the article Simple Communication Tips to Boost Your Profitability
Successful business presentation of a man at the office

Simple Communication Tips to Boost Your Profitability

"Communication is a skill that you can learn. It's like riding a bicycle or typing. If you're willing to work at it, you can rapidly improve the quality of every part of your life.” (American business speaker Brian Tracy) Successful communication can be the difference between a profitable business and a failing one. Leaders who are unable to get across the needs of the company to their employees will very quickly close its doors. Likewise, people who are effectively able to communicate the things they need to be done will find their reward in a harmonious team and profitable enterprise. This article is for those people who believe themselves to be among the latter. Those who have managed to traverse the minefield of communication and who find themselves surrounded by a largely effective team. In this position, it is possible you may still be making communication errors that are chipping away at your profitability and leading to a team that isn't as effective as it possibly could be. They are common errors that anyone could make and everyone has seen at some point, but they definitely impact the bottom line. Here is how to cut them out and take your company to a brand-new level. Avoid these communication errors Not answering the questionNo matter how well you explain things, being a leader sometimes requires you to answer follow-up questions from your team. While most of the time these questions are simple enough to answer, there may be occasions in which a manager may not be able to answer the question. Perhaps they don't know the answer or simply didn't take time to understand the question or misunderstood the question.When it comes to the effectiveness of your employee who is asking the question though, purposefully avoiding a response is as bad as mistakenly answering it incorrectly or ambiguously.For example, imagine your employee has sent you an email asking, “Did you say you wanted that report today, or next week?”A distracted communicator may see the first half of the message and rush to reply “Absolutely” or “Yes.” This ambiguous reply now wastes time and further confuses the employee. Does this mean the deadline has been pushed out or that it's still due today? The employee may then be forced to follow up, or worse, assume an extension has been granted when it has not. Either situation wastes that employee's time and can even lose a client.Avoid this simple error by ensuring you automatically read the full email and understand it before responding. Then make sure you make it clear which answer is to which question. Don't assume the employee will be able to infer what is meant each step of the way. Too much informationThere is a very clear difference between providing your employee with the context and information they need to do their jobs and live up to expectations and giving them too much information. Giving an order with the right amount of information and the proper context will save time…

Comments Off on Simple Communication Tips to Boost Your Profitability
Read more about the article What is the Metaverse and How Will It Impact Your Business?
Business, Technology, Internet and network concept. Young businessman working in virtual reality glasses sees the inscription: trends

What is the Metaverse and How Will It Impact Your Business?

“Metaverse isn't a thing a company builds. It's the next chapter of the internet overall” (Mark Zuckerberg, Meta) Among businesses, one of the most misunderstood aspects at the moment is ‘The Metaverse’. Businesses that do understand this new phase of the internet are currently seizing opportunities that their competition doesn't even know exist. This is beginning to change the face of business and social interaction around the world. But what is the Metaverse and why should you be paying attention? What is the Metaverse? Quite simply, the metaverse is an extension of the current internet. It is a virtual three-dimensional space where people can interact with one another by developing 3D avatars. This space can take on the appearance of numerous real-world places, such as meeting rooms or concerts, or even more fantastical spaces. It is a fully immersive space on the internet A blend of virtual reality, second lifestyle online worlds and augmented reality, the Metaverse can be accessed using a simple smartphone or laptop. This makes it extremely accessible for everyone. What will it be used for? No one knows for sure just how wide the eventual use case will be, but it will no doubt be huge. Some diverse examples will help illustrate just how fundamentally this might affect our lives and businesses: Advertising and marketing – finding new customers and communicating with them; The average person in the street - who may use it as a virtual reality gaming platform, or a place to attend a concert by an artist they would otherwise never get to see; Businesses tapping into machine learning and AI to incorporate multiple, diverse data sets into a virtual space to improve presentations and decision making; Surgeons from around the world all interacting over a patient's scans; Classrooms exploring the James Webb telescope images in 3D projections they can fly through; Immersive in-depth product demonstrations; Interactive TV shows; Remote maintenance assistance to areas where technicians are usually unavailable; or News production that puts viewers seemingly on the spot. At the moment, the opportunities seem unlimited. How will this affect your business? At the moment only a small percentage of businesses are using, or even aware of the Metaverse, but this is set to change.  A recent Gartner Marketing Survey found that 35% of consumers have never heard of the Metaverse but as per projections, Gartner expects that by 2026, 25% of people will spend at least one hour a day in the Metaverse for work, shopping, education, social media, and entertainment etc. Be ready to adapt! Here are just a few areas the rapidly developing Metaverse may impact your industry: Remote work Using the Metaverse for remote work will involve more than simply creating a virtual office to connect teams that may be working from home. Short, interactive virtual reality meet-ups could allow chats between colleagues and facilitate gatherings with, for example, a comedian or musician for entertainment. Three-dimensional online shopping Online shopping has the distinct downside of not allowing customers to interact with what they…

Comments Off on What is the Metaverse and How Will It Impact Your Business?

Your Tax Deadlines for December 2022

7 December Monthly Pay-As-You-Earn (PAYE) submissions and payments 23 December Value-Added Tax (VAT) manual submissions and payments 29 December Excise Duty payments 30 December End of the 3rd Financial Quarter 30 December Value-Added Tax (VAT) electronic submissions and payments & CIT Provisional payments where applicable Disclaimer: The information provided herein should not be used or relied on as professional advice. No liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions nor for any loss or damage arising from reliance upon any information herein. Always contact your professional adviser for specific and detailed advice. © CA(SA)DotNews

Comments Off on Your Tax Deadlines for December 2022
Read more about the article Selling Your Business – Plan Well, with a Tax Benefit When You Retire
Glad senior male flourishing hands on chair while looking at window during job. Rest during work concept

Selling Your Business – Plan Well, with a Tax Benefit When You Retire

“A diligent buyer will want up to five years’ worth of profit and loss statements, bank statements, tax returns, leases, supplier and vendor contracts, and customer data.” (Barbara Findlay Schenck – Author “Selling Your Business for Dummies”)  The reasons why a business owner might decide to sell their business are many – perhaps to pursue a new or more exciting business opportunity, relocation, health reasons or retirement. Selling a business to family, to the other partners, to a loyal employee or a group of employees could also be part of a succession plan; or the business owner’s exit strategy may involve selling to an outside buyer, perhaps a competitor, a supplier, or a customer, or even an investor.  Whatever the reason for selling, a smooth transition requires: Planning well and in advance,Determining a fair value for the business,Getting books, accounting records and financial reports in order,Collating the required paperwork, Managing stakeholder relations, andExercising a legal duty of care.  The outcome of this approach is a business sale to the right buyer at the right price, with little to no disruption to business operations and no negative impact on staff morale or other stakeholder relationships.  Plan well and far ahead, and beware the tax implications  Planning well and ahead provides more control over the process, as well as time and opportunity to strategically enhance the business to ensure its full value is realised when you sell, and also ensures financial and tax implications are well understood.  As just one example, the disposal or deemed disposal of assets, including the sale of a business, will attract capital gains tax (CGT), levied at a stiff 18% for individuals.  Planning to Retire? Do you know about this CGT relief? There is fortunately some CGT relief – little-known but very advantageous - if you are older than 55 (or in situations where the disposal is “in consequence of ill-health, other infirmity, superannuation or death”) of up to R1.8 million on the disposal of an interest in a small business; or of active business assets of a small business; or the sale of a small business. Of course, many conditions apply, including that the total active business assets of the taxpayer do not exceed R10 million and that the R1.8 million exclusion is cumulative over the taxpayer’s lifetime.  Such a single tax implication can make all the difference between a profitable sale and one that is not. For example, let’s say you bought shares in a company 7 years ago for R2 million, and have since been actively involved in running the business. You decide to sell your share for R4 million, triggering a capital gain of R2 million. At 18%, the CGT liability would be R360,000. If you are over 55 years of age and meet all the other conditions, applying the R1.8-million exclusion would mean only the remaining R200,000 is taxed at 18%, reducing the tax liability to R36,000. Seek professional advice Consult with your accountant to ensure that you understand all the potential financial…

Comments Off on Selling Your Business – Plan Well, with a Tax Benefit When You Retire
Read more about the article Business Loan or a Credit Facility – Which Is Right for Your Business?
Happy euphoric young african american guy received paper report, university admission letter, celebrating important goal achievement, banking loan approval, full credit repayment, lottery win notice.

Business Loan or a Credit Facility – Which Is Right for Your Business?

“I would borrow money all day long, if the cost of borrowing is less than the expected return.” (Brad Schneider, American congressman) At some point it's more likely than not that your small business will require a business loan. A 2021 study done by Fundera (a US financial resource business that sources financing for small businesses) suggested that 56% of all small businesses will need a loan to expand operations, pursue new business or acquire business assets. The same study found that 29% of small businesses fail simply because they run out of capital.Knowing that you need additional funding is not the same as acquiring it though. Other than angel investors there are two principal ways in which a company gains the financing it needs when cash flow is in short supply: a small business loan or a line of credit. But what are these? What are the differences? And how do you decide which you need for your business? An overview Essentially, small business loans and lines of credit are similar. They are both ways that businesses can borrow money from lenders and approval is determined based on past financial behaviour, the borrower's credit history and their established relationship with that lender. A traditional loan is a non-revolving credit limit, which means the borrower will be paid out funds once and will then be required to pay the money back, with interest, at a set rate and over a set period. A loan can be granted either “secured” or “unsecured”, meaning it is either backed by collateral or not, and the interest rate charged will depend on the risk to the lending institution, with lower rates available to those with collateral. With a loan, interest accrues immediately upon pay out either in cash to the company, or through payments to other firms where assets are purchased. Examples of loans that may impact a business include car loans, property financing, debt consolidation and commercial loans, which allow companies to hire extra staff, or continue day-to-day operations.A line of credit is different in that it offers the borrower a maximum amount that they can withdraw at any given stage and payments are made back based on the amount withdrawn and the interest accrued. Provided the borrower keeps up with the terms of the arrangement, this amount is available indefinitely and can be topped up and withdrawn at will. Generally, the interest rates on a line of credit are higher, and the amounts smaller than those offered for a small business loan. Interest only accrues when the line of credit is being used. Should it be fully paid up, then nothing is owed. Which is right for your business? Determining which of these loan types is best for your business will require you to look at a few factors.  How much money do you need?If the cash injection needed is large or you need to make significant equipment, vehicle or property purchases then a loan will almost always be the correct solution. With lower interest…

Comments Off on Business Loan or a Credit Facility – Which Is Right for Your Business?
Read more about the article SARS Can Take Money from Your Account! Here’s How to Prevent It…
Closeup portrait shocked, funny looking young man, disgusted at monthly statement, test, application, results isolated red background. Negative human emotion, facial expression, feeling. Bad news

SARS Can Take Money from Your Account! Here’s How to Prevent It…

“[Taxpayers] should give at least the same priority to tax obligations as their other responsibilities.” (SARS’ Short Guide to the Tax Administration Act) SARS has wide powers when it comes to the collection of tax debts and just one of these is the power to collect money owed by taxpayers from third parties who hold money for those taxpayers, such as a bank. This means that SARS can indeed take outstanding tax amounts from a personal or business bank account without your consent, by instructing the bank to pay the amount outstanding over to SARS through a process called Third Party Appointment (TPA). The same instruction can be issued by SARS to other third parties that hold money on behalf of a taxpayer, such as an employer, a customer, an insurance company, or an attorney.  Given the  significant negative implications this could have for a taxpayer, whether an individual or a company, there are certain procedures SARS must follow before it can collect tax debt via a third party appointment or another collection method, and individual and business taxpayers are well advised to understand how a tax debt can arise without their knowledge, and how to prevent SARS from collecting such tax debt from their bank accounts without their consent.   What is a tax debt?  While filing correct returns and making payments on time will protect taxpayers from tax debts, penalties and interest, taxpayers may not be able to meet these requirements on time for a range of reasons.  As such, administrative penalties on late or non-submission of tax returns, failure to submit tax returns, the submission of returns without payment, or partial payment of a tax liability can all result in a tax debt, which can also arise from a SARS assessment, or from an audit. How can a tax debt be collected?  SARS’ powers to collect tax debt are extensive, and include:  Recovering tax debt through third parties who hold money on taxpayers’ behalf, such as banks, employers, customers, insurance companies or attorneys. If such a third party fails to adhere to the appointment, the third party can be held personally liable to SARS and may be convicted of a criminal offence.Issuing a judgement and having a taxpayer blacklisted. Obtaining a preservation order in respect of taxpayer assets. Attaching and selling taxpayer assets.Bringing sequestration or liquidation proceedings against a taxpayer.Holding directors, members or related parties liable for the company’s tax debt. When can SARS collect tax debt?  If you cannot pay a tax debt to SARS and do not follow the correct procedures, SARS is legally allowed to exercise its powers of collection as detailed above, even if you are disputing the debt!  Fortunately, SARS must also follow the correct procedures. These include that the taxpayer must have received an assessment from SARS detailing how much is due and by when, as well as a final demand for payment that states available debt relief mechanisms contained in the Tax Administration Act (TAA); and recovery steps that SARS may take if…

Comments Off on SARS Can Take Money from Your Account! Here’s How to Prevent It…
Read more about the article Don’t Let Fraud Infect and Damage Your Company
Close-up Of A Businessperson's Hand Holding Magnifying Glass Over Invoice At Workplace

Don’t Let Fraud Infect and Damage Your Company

“In a way, fraud in business is no different from infidelity in marriage or plagiarism in scholarly work. Even people committed to high moral standards succumb” (Miroslav Volf, Director of the Yale Center for Faith and Culture)  Fraud (in this context) is the act wherein an employee or trusted partner makes a financial gain through criminal behaviour or deception within an organisation and it is extremely common. Recent studies suggest that as much as 46% of all companies will succumb at some stage or another. Given this, much thought has been put into how to prevent fraud and lower the impact that it can have on a business. Unsurprisingly, the issue is extremely complex and there is a lot that you as a business owner will need to do if you want to avoid the financial loss and reputation damage that fraud can cause to your business.  What is fraud? Business fraud has many aspects, and generally comes in three defined categories: Asset Misappropriation This is the most common type of fraud. Some numbers suggest that 90% of all fraud is this kind, in which employees will either steal or exploit their company's resources. Examples include where employees make false expense claims, help themselves to cash or even non-cash items, the creation of ghost employees, “buddy clocking” systems or under recording of the cash that is received for goods.Financial Statement Fraud Significantly less common than asset misappropriation these schemes are, however, significantly more damaging to the company itself. This is the deliberate manipulation of financial statements to mislead those who would use those statements for legitimate purposes. Usually, this is done to make a company appear more profitable than it is, or to avoid tax payments. CorruptionCorruption occurs when employees use their influence or positions in a company to benefit themselves to the cost of the company or agency for whom they work. An example of this would be when someone agrees to hire a less than ideal candidate because they are being paid a kickback to do so. Tips for detecting and preventing fraud Know your employeeAccording to the Association of Certified Fraud Examiners the average fraudster will operate their scheme for 18 months before getting caught. The reason for this according to employers’ reports is that quite often it was the employee they least suspectedIt is therefore vital to have regular feedback sessions with employees, even those who have been with the company for a long time, to discuss their personal circumstances and be aware of any significant changes in their lives. Someone who has been a model employee for years, may, due to changes in their life’s circumstances, feel they have no choice but to steal to make ends meet. Look for those employees whose habits have suddenly changed or who exhibit a change in attitude. These habits can point to problems in their personal lives, or potential bitterness at their employer resulting from perceived slights they may have received, such as a poor raise, or lack of promotion.Fraud policySet up a fraud policy and…

Comments Off on Don’t Let Fraud Infect and Damage Your Company

Your Tax Deadlines for November 2022

7 November – Monthly PAYE submissions and payments25 November - VAT manual submissions and payments29 November - Excise Duty payments30 November - Value-Added Tax (VAT) electronic submissions and payments & CIT Provisional payments.

Comments Off on Your Tax Deadlines for November 2022

End of content

No more pages to load